2. 狮子吼品显示巴利原文
2. Sīhanādavaggo
1. 小狮子吼经注释显示巴利原文
1. Cūḷasīhanādasuttavaṇṇanā
139 「事生起」(aṭṭhuppatti)是指名为经教叙述事件之义的起源;由于这部经具有这类事件,故称为「有事生起的」(aṭṭhuppattika),这便是它的含义。「因利养恭敬之缘」(lābhasakkārapaccayā):指以利养恭敬为起因,即由于世尊与僧团中生起了利养恭敬,或者是为了让自己产生利养恭敬的缘故。「外道的悲叹」(titthiyaparidevita):指外道们所发出的“难道只有沙门乔达摩才算沙门吗?”之类的悲叹之语。在说明了“生起了大利养恭敬”之后,为了彰显“一切善见”的义涵及其生起之因,而开示「四种量者」(catuppamāṇiko)等。四种量(cattāri pamāṇāni)即是四种衡量标准,具备这四种标准的人便称为「四种量者」。「世间共住」是指世间众生以聚集、会合的方式共同居住,所指即是有情之身。能用它来衡量殊胜等差别,故称为「量」(pamāṇa)。以身相、色身为衡量标准的,即是「色量者」;仅因色身而生起净信的,则是「色净信者」。其余词句也应依此方式理解。显示巴利原文
139. Suttadesanāvatthusaṅkhātassa atthassa uppatti aṭṭhuppatti, sā tassa atthīti aṭṭhuppattikoti vuttovāyamattho. Lābhasakkārapaccayāti lābhasakkāranimittaṃ, bhagavato saṅghassa ca uppannalābhasakkārahetu, attano vā lābhasakkāruppādanahetu. Titthiyaparideviteti titthiyānaṃ ‘‘kiṃ bho samaṇoyeva gotamo samaṇo’’tiādinā vippalapanimittaṃ. ‘‘Mahālābhasakkāro uppajjī’’ti vatvā samantapāsādikatthaṃ tassa uppattikāraṇaṃ dassento ‘‘catuppamāṇiko hī’’tiādimāha. Cattāri pamāṇāni catuppamāṇāni, catuppamāṇāni etassa atthīti catuppamāṇiko. Lokoyeva saṅgamma samāgamma vasanaṭṭhena lokasannivāso, sattakāyoti attho. Pamināti uḷāratādivisesaṃ etenāti pamāṇaṃ (a. ni. ṭī. 2.4.65) rūpaṃ rūpakāyo pamāṇaṃ etassāti rūpappamāṇo. Tato eva rūpe pasannoti rūpappasanno. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo . Ghosoti pavattathutighoso (a. ni. ṭī. 2.4.65). Lūkhanti paccayalūkhatā. Dhammoti sīlādayo guṇadhammā adhippetā.
对于那些人来说,「身高」(āroha)是指高度,并且在当时应视为合乎标准。「体围」(pariṇāha)是指不瘦不胖、恰到好处的围度。「形态」(saṇṭhāna)指身体各肢节的端正匀称。「圆满」(pāripūri)指身体所有部分完整无缺。「于彼取量为标准」(tattha pamāṇaṃ gahetvā):即依于那个色身的色相成就中所具有的标准性而生起净信,也就是生起决意(adhimokkha)。显示巴利原文
Tesaṃ puggalānaṃ. Ārohanti uccataṃ. Sā ca kho tasmiṃ tasmiṃ kāle pamāṇayuttā daṭṭhabbā. Pariṇāhanti nātikisanātithūlatāvasena mitapariṇāhaṃ. Saṇṭhānanti tesaṃ tesaṃ aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ susaṇṭhitataṃ. Pāripūrinti sabbesaṃ sarīrāvayavānaṃ paripuṇṇataṃ avekallataṃ. Tattha pamāṇaṃ gahetvāti tasmiṃ rūpe rūpasampattiyaṃ pamāṇabhāvaṃ upādāya. Pasādaṃ janetīti adhimokkhaṃ uppādeti.
“对他人的称赞”(paravaṇṇanā):指通过‘某甲如是如是’等言语,对其声誉与功德所作的称扬。“对他人的当面赞美”(parathomanā):指当面进行赞扬,以引发对方称叹。“对他人的背后称誉”(parapasaṃsanā):指在对方不在场时,宣扬其功德。“辗转的称赞”(paravaṇṇahārikā):即经由辗转相传,引来对他人赞誉之声的称赞。“此处”(tattha):意为在那称扬赞叹的声音之中。显示巴利原文
Paravaṇṇanāyāti ‘‘amuko ediso ca ediso cā’’ti yasaguṇavacanena. Parathomanāyāti sammukhāva parassa silāghuppādanena abhitthavanena. Parapasaṃsanāyāti parammukhā parassa guṇasaṃkittanena. Paravaṇṇahārikāyāti paramparavaṇṇahārikāya paramparāya parassa kittisaddūpasaṃhārena. Tatthāti tasmiṃ thutighose.
“衣粗弊”(cīvaralūkha):指衣的粗劣状态,如粗厚、破旧、多处缝补等。“钵粗弊”(pattalūkha):指钵的粗劣状态,如带有许多结、破损等。“或种种难行”(vividhaṃ vā dukkarakārika):即通过修习头陀支等,所实行的种种难行之行。显示巴利原文
Cīvaralūkhanti thūlajiṇṇabahutunnakatādiṃ cīvarassa lūkhabhāvaṃ. Pattalūkhanti anekaganthikāhatādiṃ pattassa lūkhabhāvaṃ. Vividhaṃ vā dukkarakārikanti dhutaṅgasevanādivasena pavattaṃ nānāvidhaṃ dukkaracariyaṃ.
“见戒”(sīlaṃ vā passitvā):由于具足戒行,以智慧之眼照见清净的身、语善行。“见定”(samādhiṃ vā):即见到由证得禅那等所成就的定。“见慧”(paññaṃ vā):即见到观与神通所摄的慧。显示巴利原文
Sīlaṃ vā passitvāti sīlapāripūrivasena visuddhaṃ kāyavacīsucaritaṃ ñāṇacakkhunā passitvā. Jhānādiadhigamasiddhaṃ samādhiṃ vā. Vipassanābhiññāsaṅkhātaṃ paññaṃ vā.
此处关联‘见到世尊的身体’的解说。即使是仅以身形来衡量的人,也唯独对正自觉者生起净信,因为世尊的色身成就圆满具足,一切形相无缺,完全无过,这是由无量时劫所累积的福德威力所成。其可爱光彩,在清净无云的满月之夜,胜过圆满分明的月轮而闪耀;在秋季,其光辉更超越那放射双倍光芒、璀璨夺目的日轮;它兼具柔和与强烈之光,超越日月二者,能于一刹那间照亮一万个世界,超过大梵天的光云,照耀、辉映、放光。显示巴利原文
Bhagavato sarīraṃ disvāti sambandho. Rūpappamāṇopi sammāsambuddheyeva pasīdati aparimitakālasamupacitapuññānubhāvanipphannāya sabbaso anavajjāya sabbākāraparipuṇṇāvayavāya rūpakāyasampattiyā samantapāsādikattā, yassā rucirabhāvo visuddhe vigatavalāhake deve puṇṇamāsiyaṃ paripuṇṇakalābhāgamaṇḍalaṃ candamaṇḍalaṃ abhibhavitvā atirocati, pabhassarabhāvo saradasamayaṃ saṃvaddhitadiguṇatejakiraṇajālasamujjalaṃ sūriyamaṇḍalaṃ abhibhavati, sommakiraṇarasasamujjalabhāvehi tadubhayehi abhibhuyya vattamānaṃ ekasmiṃ khaṇe dasasahassilokadhātuṃ vijjotanasamatthaṃ mahābrahmuno pabhāsamudayaṃ abhivihacca bhāsate tapate virocati ca.
虽然施舍身体部分等本身已属布施巴拉密,但为了显示布施的殊胜相与极难行相,才特别举出施舍身体部分等。其中,又从施舍身体部分中独举施舍眼睛;同理,虽同属布施之相,除了施舍王国,又独举施舍妻子儿女。以‘等’字所含的方式,即‘等’字包含了前际之行、前修行等因的成就,以及‘他是世尊……’所述的果德成就,和‘他开示法……’所述的利益众生之业,应如此理解其总括。唯独对正自觉者生起净信,因为如上所说的功德是不与其他人共通的,而且稀有、奇妙。对于其余情形也是同样的道理。显示巴利原文
Satipi aṅgapariccāgādīnaṃ dānapāramibhāve pariccāgavisesabhāvadassanatthañceva sudukkarabhāvadassanatthañca aṅgapariccāgādiggahaṇaṃ, tatthāpi ca aṅgapariccāgato visuṃ nayanapariccāgaggahaṇaṃ, pariccāgabhāvasāmaññepi rajjapariccāgato puttadārapariccāgaggahaṇañca kataṃ. Ādinā nayenāti ādi-saddena pubbayogapubbacariyādihetusampattiyā, ‘‘itipi so bhagavā’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.157, 255) vuttāya phalasampattiyā, ‘‘so dhammaṃ desetī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.255) vuttāya sattupakārakiriyāya ca saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Sammāsambuddheyeva pasīdati yathāvuttaguṇānaṃ anaññasādhāraṇabhāvato acchariyabbhutabhāvato ca. Sesesupi eseva nayo.
在说出‘见到粗弊衣’之后,为显示其含义,便说‘如果世尊……’等。以麻粪扫衣:即包裹死尸后丢弃,抖落掉如葫芦籽般大小的蛆虫后取用之麻粪扫衣。‘沉重’:即难担、难行之意。‘三种亲属’:依妻、青年女子、中年妇女,或依少年、青年、老年而有的三种亲属。豆汁:即绿豆汤或曼陀罗花汁。将‘他会活命’中的‘会’字关联起来。由于与‘会’字结合,便类似未来时的用法,其义即‘活命’。‘无息气的’:即没有呼吸,已停止出入息。显示巴利原文
‘‘Cīvaralūkhaṃ disvā’’ti vatvā taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sace bhagavā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sāṇapaṃsukūlacīvarenāti matakaḷevaraṃ paliveṭhetvā chaḍḍitena tumbamatte kimī papphoṭetvā gahitena sāṇapaṃsukūlacīvarena. Bhāriyanti garukaṃ, dukkaranti attho. Vadhuyuvatīmajjhimitthivasena, bālayobbanapurāṇavasena vā tividhanāṭakatā. Hareṇuyūsaṃ maṇḍalakalāyaraso. ‘‘Yāpessati nāmā’’ti nāma-saddaṃ ānetvā sambandho. Nāma-saddayogena hi anāgatakālassa viya payogo, yāpeti icceva attho. Appāṇakanti nirassāsaṃ nirodhitassāsapassāsaṃ.
「定之功德」:通过举出禅那等,阐明从共通处所说的含义。折伏慢心与刚强,达到无需侍奉的状态,这也是调伏,因此说「调伏波提迦子等」。「等」字包含了调伏萨遮迦、旷野夜叉、巴卡梵天等事例。「巴韦鲁」:指一个名叫巴韦鲁的地方。「具足音声者」:指具足八支音声。由此,通过显示梵音、迦陵频伽语等,依相摄之理,如同显示其余诸相的圆满一般——因为这些功德与其余诸相并不相离——这也揭示了诸佛语教的庄严。显示巴利原文
Samādhiguṇanti sādhāraṇato vuttamatthaṃ vivarati jhānādiggahaṇena. Mānadabbanimmadanena nibbisevanabhāvāpādanampi damanamevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘pāthikaputtadamanādīnī’’ti. Ādi-saddena saccakāḷavakabakadamanādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Bāverunti evaṃnāmakaṃ visayaṃ. Sarasampannoti aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgatena sarena samannāgato. Tena brahmassaratākaravīkabhāṇitādassanena lakkhaṇahāranayena avasesalakkhaṇapāripūriṃ viya tadavinābhāvato buddhānaṃ desanāvilāsañca vibhāveti.
「光芒被夺」:指由于佛陀的威光,他们的光芒消失了。「黑分譬喻」:因为压倒了众生的愚痴黑暗,故如同黑半月的夜晚一般。「于太阳」:意指当太阳升起而照耀之时。显示巴利原文
Hatappabhāti buddhānubhāvena vigatatejā. Kāḷapakkhūpameti sattānaṃ byāmohandhakārābhibhavena kāḷapakkharattūpame. Sūriyeti sūriye udayitvā obhāsenteti adhippāyo.
「在十字路口」:指在三角形的街道。「在四衢道」:指在道路的连接处。「悲叹」:指以悲泣诉苦的方式哭诉。因为由于过度忧愁而发出的无用言语,即是悲叹。「当世间正在产生时,他们便已产生」:他们以此显示自己邪见的古老性。显示巴利原文
Siṅghāṭaketi tikoṇaracchāyaṃ. Catukketi sandhiyaṃ. Paridevantīti anutthunanavasena vippalapanti. Sokādhikakato hi vacīpalāpo paridevo. Loke uppajjamāneyeva uppannāti attano diṭṭhivādassa purātanabhāvaṃ dīpenti.
“于其余文句”:即指“这里,第二位沙门……”等其余诸句。正如在“确实远离诸欲”一句中设立简别,在“远离不善法”一句中也同样设立了简别,因为这正是要表达的决定义;此处也是如此,故有“第二位等……”这段文字。“由证得沙门果,从非异门的意义上,即是沙门性”:因此,是根据这些人而在此宣说四种沙门。为了引他经以证此义,便说了“故世尊言……”等语。“依行道次第与教说次第,而说一来者等为第二等”:因为入流者位居第一乃是不说自明的事,所以未受责难。“此处所指为住果沙门”:因为经文所指,是“已止息恶”的沙门义。然而,在此处为何不像《大般涅槃经》那样,把处于道位的圣者和为证道而修行的人也一并列入呢?这是由于所化众生的意乐不同。在那部经中,为彰显“为证圣道,此处之外尚不能见内观,何况道与果”,所以世尊说:“于我教法理趣中,证得少分慧者,于外道中亦无沙门”。而此处,则是取已各自达到究竟的沙门性,因此只取了住果沙门,以“证果位之圣者……显示巴利原文
Sesapadesupīti ‘‘idha dutiyo samaṇo’’tiādīsu sesavāresupi (a. ni. ṭī. 2.4.241-242) yathā hi ‘‘vivicceva kāmehī’’ti (pārā. 11; dī. ni. 1.226; saṃ. ni. 2.152; a. ni. 4.123) ettha kato niyamo ‘‘vivicca akusalehī’’ti (pārā. 11; dī. ni. 1.226; saṃ. ni. 2.152; a. ni. 4.123) etthāpi katoyeva hoti sāvadhāraṇasseva atthassa icchitabbattā, evamidhāpīti. Tenāha ‘‘dutiyādayopī’’tiādi. Sāmaññaphalādhigamavasena nippariyāyato samaṇabhāvoti tesaṃ vasenettha cattāro samaṇā desitāti tamatthaṃ suttantarena samatthetuṃ ‘‘tenevāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Paṭipattikkamena desanākkamena ca sakadāgāmiādīnaṃ dutiyāditā vuttāti sotāpannassa paṭhamatā avuttasiddhāti na coditā. Phalaṭṭhakasamaṇāva adhippetā samitapāpasamaṇaggahaṇato. Kasmā panettha mahāparinibbāne viya maggaṭṭhā tadatthāya paṭipannā ca na gahitāti? Veneyyajjhāsayato. Tattha hi maggādhigamatthāya vipassanāpi ito bahiddhā natthi, kuto maggaphalānīti dassentena bhagavatā ‘‘ñāyassa dhammassa padesavattī, ito bahiddhā samaṇopi natthī’’ti vuttaṃ. Idha pana niṭṭhānappattameva taṃtaṃsamaṇabhāvaṃ gaṇhantena phalaṭṭhakasamaṇāva gahitā ‘‘maggaṭṭhato phalaṭṭho savisesaṃ dakkhiṇeyyo’’ti. Svāyamattho dvīsu suttesu desanābhedeneva viññāyatīti.
“空”:谓远离。“虚”:谓无精髓,因其中缺少真实修行者的实质。“论议”:那些见行者依这些而宣说各种邪见,故称为论议,它们就是说明种种理论的体系,因此说“四种常住论”等。其中所当释之义,随后即会说到。“他们”:指如前所说的那些沙门。“在这里”:是指被称为“外道论议”的外道宗义之中。显示巴利原文
Rittāti vivittā. Tucchāti nissārā paṭipannakasārābhāvato. Pavadanti etehīti pavādā, diṭṭhigatikānaṃ nānādiṭṭhidīpakā samayāti āha ‘‘cattāro sassatavādā’’tiādi. Tattha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ parato āgamissati. Teti yathāvuttasamaṇā. Etthāti ‘‘parappavādā’’ti vutte bāhirakasamaye.
“在其中”(yaṃ):意思是“在……中”(yasmiṃ)。因为这是表示处所格意义的主格形式。“理趣”:即所谓与观相应的圣道。正是通过此圣道,得以了知、到达、彻证涅槃。正因为它是证得涅槃之因,此理趣本身亦被称为“法”,因此说“理趣之法的……”显示巴利原文
Yanti yasmiṃ. Bhummatthe hi idaṃ paccattavacanaṃ. Ñāyo vuccati saha vipassanāya ariyamaggo. Tena hi nibbānaṃ ñāyati gammati paṭivijjhatīti. So eva nibbānasampāpakahetutāya dhammoti āha ‘‘ñāyassa dhammassā’’ti.
外道教说之所以成为‘非良田’或‘良田’,是由圣道的有无,以及由极清净的戒与极清净的止观是否具足所决定的。而这两者又以教法为恶说或善说为因,这恶说或善说又依非正自觉者或正自觉者的宣说而定。这是为了显示:由于导师的缺失为因,其教法便无法导向出离。显示巴利原文
Tesaṃ parappavādasāsanānaṃ akhettatā khettatā ca ariyamaggassa abhāvabhāvā suparisuddhassa sīlassa suparisuddhāya samathavipassanāya abhāvato sāvato ca. Tadubhayañca durakkhātasvākkhātabhāvahetukaṃ, so ca asammāsambuddhasammāsambuddhapaveditatāyāti parājikāya satthu vipattihetutāya sāsanassa aniyyānabhāvoti dasseti.
今为以譬喻及经据两方面来证成前述之义,故在引出“因此世尊”等经文后,复以譬喻之说开演其义,而说“因为”等语。其中,因为某些狮子——尤其是殊胜的狮子——其前双足也能起到手的作用,故说“妙手足”。狮子的毛称为鬐毛。所谓所行境为象族,即本性的象族,也称“黑耳”。Ghoṭaka指劣马。在须弥山侧,有一片方圆五十由旬、为木棉树所覆的湖,名为木棉湖,其周有大木棉林;正对此而说“在木棉林”。在外道居处,这些沙门中连一个也不会生起,但于此则不作此分别;为显其全然不生,故说“一个沙门也没有”。“为圣道所严饰”:意指为圣道的生起而作准备;当佛教徒正确地行道时,圣道便会生起。此为其义。显示巴利原文
Idāni yathāvuttamatthaṃ pariyāyato ca pāḷiyā ca samatthetuṃ ‘‘tenāha bhagavā’’tiādinā pāḷiṃ dassetvā upamāpadesena tattha suttaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘yasmā’’tiādimāha. Tattha yasmā ekaccānaṃ visesato sīhānaṃ purimaṃ pādadvayaṃ hatthakiccampi karoti, tasmā āha ‘‘surattahatthapādo’’ti. Sīhassa kesā nāma kesarāyatanā khandhalomā. Gocariyahatthikulaṃ nāma pakatihatthikulaṃ, yaṃ ‘‘kālāvaka’’ntipi vuccati. Ghoṭako nāma assakhaḷuṅko. Sineruparibhaṇḍe simbalirukkhehi sañchādito paññāsayojano daho simbalidaho, taṃ parivāretvā mahantaṃ simbalivanaṃ, taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘simbalidahavane’’ti. Aññatitthāvāsabhūmiyaṃ imesu samaṇesu ekacco na uppajjati, īdiso panettha vikappo natthi, sabbena sabbaṃ na uppajjantevāti dassento ‘‘ekasamaṇopī’’ti āha. Ariyamaggaparikkhateti ariyamagguppattiyā abhisaṅkhate, yadā sāsanikānaṃ sammāpaṭipattiyā ariyamaggo dibbati, tadāti attho.
“正”即善好。善好的吼声,即是依于因、善加宣说的,故说“以因”。此因又须是正确不谬的,故说“以理趣”,即依于正理。为显如此之事能成就所期望的意义,故说“以理由”。倘畜生狮子的吼声,因其在一切畜生、部分人及非人的叫声中最为殊胜,而得称最胜吼,则如来的狮子吼更是如此,故说“狮子吼即最胜吼”。若畜生狮子吼的最胜性被理解为无所畏、无敌对,则如来狮子吼于此义更为超胜,故说“无畏吼、无敌对吼”。今为以理据显示其最胜吼的性质,故说“对这些”等语,由此证成所说的“正”。其中,“存在性”表示狮子吼的最胜义。因为真实之义即为最胜义。正是由于具足此真实义,故为无畏之吼;为显此义,故说“这些沙门……名为……”。显示巴利原文
Sammāti suṭṭhu. Suṭṭhu nadanaṃ nāma hetuyuttaṃ suṭṭhu katvā kathananti āha ‘‘hetunā’’ti. So ca hetu aviparīto eva icchitabboti āha ‘‘nayenā’’ti, ñāyenāti attho. Evaṃbhūto ca so yathādhippetatthaṃ karoti sādhetīti dassento āha ‘‘kāraṇenā’’ti. Yadi tiracchānasīhassa nādo sabbatiracchānaekaccamanussāmanussanādato seṭṭhattā seṭṭhanādo, kimaṅgaṃ pana tathāgatasīhanādoti āha ‘‘sīhanādanti seṭṭhanāda’’nti. Yadi tiracchānasīhanādassa seṭṭhanādatā nibbhayatāya appaṭisattutāya icchitā, tathāgatasīhanādasseva ayamattho sātisayoti āha ‘‘abhītanādaṃ appaṭināda’’nti. Idānissa seṭṭhanādabhāvaṃ kāraṇena paṭipādento ‘‘imesañhī’’tiādimāha. Tena ‘‘sammā’’ti vuttamatthaṃ samattheti. Tattha atthitāyāti iminā sīhanādassa uttamatthataṃ dasseti. Bhūtaṭṭho hi uttamaṭṭho. Tāya eva bhūtaṭṭhatāya abhītanādatāti dassento ‘‘ime samaṇā…pe… nāma hotī’’ti āha. Abhūtañhi vadato kutoci bhayaṃ vā āsaṅkā vā siyāti ‘‘idhevā’’ti niyamassa aviparītataṃ dassento ‘‘amhākampi…pe… appaṭinādo nāma hotī’’ti āha. Yañhi aññatthāpi atthi, taṃ idhevāti avadhāretuṃ na yuttanti.
140 「Kho」:表决定。由此显示“确实存在”。「Yaṃ」是工具格用作主格,故说“以什么因由”(yena kāraṇena)。所谓「津渡」(tittha),指六十二种邪见,因为并不存在依之而起的任何邪见挣扎。度往彼岸的“度”,对见行者而言,是在各处一再浮沉地游渡,故称“渡、浮”。能产生者(uppādetā)即富兰那等人。从津渡生起者,便是外道;或者如前所说,具足恶见津渡者,便是外道,外道即是外道。在此得到安息,或以此为依靠,就是归宿。显示巴利原文
140.Khoti avadhāraṇe. Tena vijjati evāti dasseti. Yanti karaṇatthe paccattanti āha ‘‘yena kāraṇenā’’ti. Titthaṃ nāma dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhiyo tabbinimuttassa kassaci diṭṭhivipphanditassa abhāvato. Pāragamanasaṅkhātaṃ taraṇaṃ diṭṭhigatikānaṃ (a. ni. ṭī. 2.3.62) tattha tattheva aparāparaṃ ummujjananimujjanavasena pilavananti āha ‘‘taranti uppalavantī’’ti. Uppādetāti pūraṇādiko. Titthe jātāti titthiyā, yathāvuttaṃ vā diṭṭhigatasaṅkhātaṃ titthaṃ etesaṃ atthīti titthikā, titthikā eva titthiyā. Assasanti ettha, etenāti vā assāso, avassayo.
这是对已释义的阐示。所谓「yaṃ-taṃ-sadda」(彼-此词),是为了显示经由“bhagavatā”(由世尊)等词同格表述的那个义理:正是由于已正觉的状态,世尊才以导师之身为世所知、所证、所广;连同这已正觉的状态以及到达的途径,以义来显示,所以这样说:「yo so…pe… abhisambuddho」(那位…已正觉者)。虽然「ñāṇadassana」(智见)等语在此都是智慧的异名,但为了以各自的殊胜来显示各自领域中的作用,于是结合不共殊胜、三明、神通与无障碍智、一切知智与肉眼、通达智与教说智等来进行说明,而说了“tesaṃ tesaṃ”等等。其中,以志向与随眠智了知众生的志向与随眠,为‘知’;以一切知智和无障碍智照见一切所知法,为‘见’。所说「pubbenivāsādīhi」(以宿住等),是指以宿住智和漏尽智。世尊的色身由不共于他人的福德威力所生,自获得无上智以来,往昔即已运作;它超越诸天神力,故说「sabbasattānaṃ…」显示巴利原文
Pakatatthaniddeso yaṃ-taṃ-saddoti tassa ‘‘bhagavatā’’tiādīhi padehi samānādhikaraṇabhāvena vuttassa yena abhisambuddhabhāvena bhagavā pakato satthubhāvena adhigato supākaṭo ca, taṃ abhisambuddhabhāvaṃ saddhiṃ āgamanapaṭipadāya atthabhāvena dassento ‘‘yo so…pe… abhisambuddho’’ti āha. Satipi ñāṇadassanasaddānaṃ idha paññāvevacanabhāve tena tena visesena nesaṃ savisaye visesappavattidassanatthaṃ (sārattha. ṭī. parivāra 3.1) asādhāraṇavisesavasena vijjāttayavasena vijjābhiññānāvaraṇavasena sabbaññutaññāṇamaṃsacakkhuvasena paṭivedhadesanāñāṇavasena ca te yojetvā dassento ‘‘tesaṃ tesa’’ntiādimāha. Tattha āsayānusayaṃ jānatā āsayānusayañāṇena, sabbaṃ ñeyyadhammaṃ passatā sabbaññutānāvaraṇañāṇehi. Pubbenivāsādīhīti pubbenivāsaāsavakkhayañāṇehi. Anaññasādhāraṇapuññānubhāvanibbatto anuttarañāṇādhigamaladdhapurāvattako ca bhagavato rūpakāyo atikkammeva devānaṃ devānubhāvaṃ vattatīti āha ‘‘sabbasattānaṃ…pe… passatā’’ti. Paṭivedhapaññāyāti maggapaññāya. Tāya hi sabbaso ñeyyadhammesu sammohassa vidhamitattā pacchā pavattajānanaṃ tassa jānanaṃ viya vuccati.
「敌」(arīnaṃ):指烦恼敌,或五种魔,或教法的敌对者,或外道;对他们的「摧伏」(hananaṃ),是指以神变制伏、令其无言以对,或置之不理。在此亦以《调御马师经》(Kesivinayasutta)为喻。同样地,了知处非处等,而称「知」(jānatā);照见众生随业受生,而称「见」(passatā);诸漏连同习气皆完全灭尽,而称「阿拉汉」(arahatā);于应了知、应证得等诸法,从应了知等角度正确无谬地通达,而称「正自觉者」(sammāsambuddhena)。再者,亦可就三时中智慧无碍而称为「知」,以身业等与智慧不相违且经审虑而行而称为「见」,以远离喧杂等无故成就断除而称为「阿拉汉」,以成就了令欲等不退失的因——无碍辩才与一切知性——而称为「正自觉者」。如是,也应理解为与十力、十八不共佛法相结合。「ye」(那些)指四法。「attani」(在自己)指在我们之中。「不见于王、大臣等有依靠,不见于身体力量有依靠」(na rājarājamahāmattādīsu upat…)显示巴利原文
Arīnanti kilesārīnaṃ, pañcavidhamārānaṃ vā sāsanapaccatthikānaṃ vā aññatitthiyānaṃ, tesaṃ hananaṃ pāṭihāriyehi abhibhavanaṃ appaṭibhānatākaraṇaṃ ajjhupekkhanaṃ vā. Kesivinayasuttañcettha (a. ni. 4.111) nidassanaṃ. Tathā ca ṭhānāṭṭhānādīni vā jānatā, yathākammupage satte passatā, savāsanānamāsavānaṃ khīṇattā arahatā, abhiññeyyādibhede dhamme abhiññeyyādito aviparītāvabodhena sammāsambuddhena. Atha vā tīsu kālesu appaṭihatañāṇatāya jānatā, kāyakammādīnaṃ ñāṇānuparivattanena nisammakāritāya passatā, ravādīnampi (sārattha. ṭī. parivāra 3.1) abhāvasādhikāya pahānasampadāya arahatā, chandādīnaṃ ahānihetubhūtāya akkhayapaṭibhānasādhikāya sabbaññutāya sammāsambuddhena. Evaṃ dasabalaaṭṭhārasāveṇikabuddhadhammavasenapi yojanā veditabbā. Yeti caturo dhamme. Attanīti amhesu. Na rājarājamahāmattādīsu upatthambhaṃ sampassamānā, na kāyabalaṃ sampassamānāti yojanā.
“已生净信”:指不坏净信,因为下文将说“已宣说入流者的四支”。无学由于修学无学,确实是同法者;然而他们已经圆满梵行,故不应说为“同行梵行”。因此,这里未摄无学。“所有这些”:指如前所述的比丘等、入流者等,以及凡夫与圣者等,所有这些人都因各自修学而具有共同的法性,故称为“同法者”。现在,为了依所生的圣法来显示同法者,又说“复次”等。“于见道时”:指通过遍知等现观而通达谛理时,关于“九道支、八觉支”等没有争论。“以一法而行”:指以相同的法而行。因为已通达谛理的人之间,不会有“我善见法,你恶见法”等争论。他们正是以见与戒的共具而和合,成为最上之人。“以此”:指“同法者”等语句。其中,通过把握“可爱、可意”之义,以戒圆满行为例,完整地显示了僧团的善行道。因为那些戒行圆满、见极为清净的人,正是智者所喜爱、所悦意的。“至此”:指通过“友,我等确实有……”等开示,以宣说对三宝净信的方式,在诸经中演说。显示巴利原文
Uppannapasādoti aveccappasādaṃ vadati. Vakkhati hi ‘‘cattāri sotāpannassa aṅgāni kathitānī’’ti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.140). Kāmaṃ asekkhāpi asekkhāya samasikkhatāya sahadhammikā eva, ciṇṇabrahmacariyatāya pana sahadhammaṃ carantīti na vattabbāti asekkhavāro na gahito. Sabbepeteti ete yathāvuttā bhikkhuādayo sotāpannādayo ca puthujjanā ariyā cāti sabbepi ete taṃtaṃsikkhāhi samānadhammattā sahadhammattā ‘‘sahadhammikā’’ti vuccanti. Idāni nibbattitaariyadhammavaseneva sahadhammike dassento ‘‘apicā’’tiādimāha. Maggadassanamhīti pariññābhisamayādivasena saccapaṭivedhena ‘‘nava maggaṅgāni, aṭṭha bojjhaṅgānī’’tiādinā vivādo natthi. Ekadhammacāritāyāti samānadhammacāritāya. Na hi paṭividdhasaccānaṃ ‘‘mayā dhammo sudiṭṭho, tayā duddiṭṭho’’tiādinā vivādo atthi. Diṭṭhisīlasāmaññena saṅghātā hi te uttamapurisā. Imināti ‘‘sahadhammikā kho panā’’tiādivacanena. Tattha piyamanāpaggahaṇena sīlesu paripūrakāritāpadesena ekadesena gahitaṃ saṅghasuppaṭipattiṃ paripuṇṇaṃ katvā dasseti. Ye hi sampannasīlā suvisuddhadassanā, te viññūnaṃ piyā manāpāti. Ettāvatāti ‘‘atthi kho no āvuso’’tiādinayappavattena ratanattayapasādajotanena akkhātā tesu tesu suttapadesesu.
141 “对导师的净信”:以净信一词,涵盖了“世尊”等能生净信的法。由此显示佛陀是善觉醒者;同样,“对法的净信”显示法是善说,另一者显示僧团是善行道。应知:凭着一颗在外道中无法找到的心,仅仅在自教法中才能断定“外道中无沙门”,这一意义是妥善成立的。这里应这样结合:因为正自觉者是我们的导师,所以朋友,我们确实有对导师的净信;又因为他是正自觉者,所说的法是善说的,所以有对法的净信;正因为如此,有了对戒的圆满行,所以有同法者……乃至出家众等等。就这样,这里由对导师的净信而有对法的净信,由此而有僧团的善行道。这个道理,即便是一点儿,在外道的教说中也全然没有,只有在这里才有沙门……乃至与其他沙门不同。显示巴利原文
141.Satthari pasādoti pasādaggahaṇena ‘‘bhagavatā’’tiādinā vā pasādanīyā dhammā gahitā. Tena buddhasubuddhataṃ dasseti, tathā ‘‘dhammepasādo’’ti iminā dhammasudhammataṃ, itarena saṅghasuppaṭipannataṃ. Yena cittena aññattha anupalabbhamānena sāsaneyeva samaṇo ito bahiddhā natthīti ayamattho, sammadeva, patiṭṭhāpitoti veditabbaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ yojanā – yasmā sammāsambuddho amhākaṃ satthā, tasmā atthi kho no, āvuso, satthari pasādo, sammāsambuddhattā cassa svākhāto dhammoti atthi dhamme pasādo, tato eva ca atthi sīlesu paripūrakāritāti sahadhammikā…pe… pabbajitā cāti evamettha satthari pasādena dhamme pasādo, tena saṅghasuppaṭipattīti ayañca nayo lesenapi parappavādesu natthīti idheva samaṇo…pe… samaṇehi aññehīti.
对于已通达谛理、已舍断随顺的人来说,依止于家的爱著确实不可能存在,所以这里说「idāni」。如果这样,那「诸比丘,戒师应对同住比丘安立如子之爱」等语句又该如何理解呢?这并非指依止于家的爱著,而是因为与此相似,所以借用「爱」一词来指慈爱与柔爱。因为世尊不会让比丘们去从事杂染。对于这类爱,应知:在奉行、增益等情况下,它虽然能带来净信功德,但其实并非真正的净信,而是看起来像净信的贪欲在活动。所谓「长老」指大僧护长老,由他将这部注释书载入贝叶。导师是独一无二的,因为他具备他人所没有的功德;否则,若是寻常,就不能圆满导师的特征了。「分别开来」是指从其他诸说中区别开来,使其成为自己独有的。宣称「我们的导师」的人,其他人就不是他的导师——这从含义上就可以成立。同样,那些承认某位导师仅具有区域性导师身份的人,即使他们也想获得具足圆满特征的导师身份,也会因为寻求与之相违的导师状态而失败。「于教法之理」指在殊胜梵行功德、修多罗、祇夜等分类之时。这里提到「于山羊戒……乃至……狗戒等」,主要是就外道中常有这类受持誓戒的情况而说的;用「等」这个词,则包括了禁制、劝制、四律仪防护等。「增上勤励」:称为「增上勤励」,意思是额外的努力、用力,是指借助它而进行的更进一步的加行,也就是殊胜的应做修行。所以又说「增上功用」。显示巴利原文
Paṭividdhasaccānaṃ pahīnānurodhānaṃ gehassitapemassa asambhavo evāti ‘‘idānī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘upajjhāyena, bhikkhave, saddhivihārikamhi puttapemaṃ upaṭṭhapetabbaṃ’’tiādivacanaṃ (mahāva. 65) kathanti? Nayidaṃ gehassitapemaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, taṃsadisattā pana pemamukhena vutto mettāsneho. Na hi bhagavā bhikkhū saṃkilese niyojeti. Evarūpaṃ pemaṃ sandhāyāti pasādāvahaguṇāvahato pūraṇādīsu bhatti pasādo na hoti, pasādapatirūpakā pana lobhapavattīti daṭṭhabbā. Theroti mahāsaṅgharakkhitatthero. Yena aṭṭhakathā potthakaṃ āropitā. Ekova satthā anaññasādhāraṇaguṇattā, aññathā anacchariyattā satthulakkhaṇameva na paripūreyya. Visuṃ katvāti aññehi vivecetvā attano āveṇikaṃ katvā. ‘‘Amhākaṃ satthā’’ti byāvadantānaṃ aññesaṃ satthā na hotīti atthato āpannameva hoti, tathā ca padesavattiniṃ tassa satthutaṃ paṭijānantā paripuṇṇalakkhaṇasatthutaṃ icchantānampi tato viruddhā satthubhāvapariyesanena parājitā honti. Pariyattidhammeti adhikabrahmaguṇasuttageyyādippabhedasamaye. Tattha ajasīla…pe… kukkurasīlādīsūti idaṃ yebhuyyena aññatitthiyānaṃ tādisaṃ vatasamādānasabbhāvato vuttaṃ, ādi-saddena yamaniyamacātuyāmasaṃvarādīnaṃ saṅgahoti. Adhippayāsoti adhikaṃ payasati payujjati etenāti adhippayāso, savisesaṃ adhikattabbakiriyā (a. ni. ṭī. 2.3.117). Tenāha ‘‘adhikappayogo’’ti.
“tassa pasādassa pariyosānabhūtā”(成为彼净信的究竟),指对导师与法之净信的终点。“niṭṭhā”(究竟)即解脱。对于分时说者,他们于各时期对相应教导者所生的净信,其意义唯在证得解脱。而见行者则依各自所持的观点,构想各自的究竟,故说“niṭṭhaṃ apaññapento nāma natthi”(没有不施设究竟的人)。“brāhmaṇānaṃ”(于婆罗门)指婆罗门论者。他们之中,有的说与梵天同界为究竟,有的说与其邻近为究竟,还有的说与其结合为究竟。其中,持同界说与邻近说者为持二分说者,其余为持非二分说者。所有这些人在意义上都只是以生于梵天界为究竟想。因为他们对此生起恒常之执著,如同跋伽梵天。因此说“brahmaloko niṭṭhā”(梵天界为究竟)。所谓“brahmaloko”(梵天界)指初禅地。“mahātāpasānaṃ”(于大苦行者)指吠卡那萨等苦行者。因如同大梵天那样,初禅地之光音天中无有更高者,故以此……显示巴利原文
Tassapasādassa pariyosānabhūtāti tassa satthari dhamme ca pasādassa niṭṭhānabhūtā. Niṭṭhāti mokkho. Samayavādīnañhi tasmiṃ tasmiṃ samaye tadupadesake ca pasādo yāvadeva mokkhādhigamanaṭṭho. Diṭṭhigatikā tathā tathā attano laddhivasena niṭṭhaṃ parikappenti yevāti āha ‘‘niṭṭhaṃ apaññapento nāma natthī’’ti. Brāhmaṇānanti brāhmaṇavādīnaṃ. Tesaṃ ekacce brahmunā salokatā niṭṭhāti vadanti, ekacce tassa samīpatā, ekacce tena saṃyogo niṭṭhāti vadanti. Tattha ye salokatāvādino samīpatāvādino ca, te dvedhāvādino, itare advedhāvādino. Sabbepi te atthato brahmalokupapattiyaṃyeva niṭṭhāsaññino. Tattha hi nesaṃ niccābhiniveso yathā taṃ bakassa brahmuno. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘brahmaloko niṭṭhā’’ti. Brahmalokoti paṭhamajjhānabhūmi. Mahātāpasānanti vekhanasāditāpasānaṃ. Mahābrahmā viya paṭhamajjhānabhūmiyaṃ ābhassaresu eko sabbaseṭṭho natthīti ‘‘ābhassarā’’ti puthuvacanaṃ. Paribbājakānanti sañcayādiparibbājakānaṃ. Anto ca mano ca etassa natthīti anantamānaso. Ājīvakānañhi sabbadābhāvato ananto, sukhadukkhādisamatikkamanato amānaso. Iminā aṭṭhahi lokadhammehi upakkiliṭṭhacittataṃ dasseti.
关于“papañca”(戏论),该说的内容前面已经说了。此处立意即贪爱与见,目的乃为断除我所执与我执。正如前五处唯贪这一种烦恼出现,此二处则有三种烦恼出现:“doso moho diṭṭhi”(嗔、痴、见)。因为在说“sadosassa”(有嗔者)时,已含摄恚的不善根;在说“paṭiviruddhassa”(有违逆者)时,含摄了违逆;在说“samohassa”(有痴者)时,含摄了痴的不善根;在说“aviddasuno”(无慧者)时,含摄了垢秽或无正知;在说“saupādānassa”(有取者)时,以“没有布施”等方式含摄了取;在说“papañcārāmassā”(乐戏论者)时,则是依戏论生起的方式而阐明的。显示巴利原文
Papañce yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Taṇhādiṭṭhiyova adhippetā mamaṅkāraahaṅkāravigamassa adhippetattā. Yathā pañcasu ṭhānesu ekova kileso lobho āgato, evaṃ dvīsu ṭhānesu tayo kilesā āgatā ‘‘doso moho diṭṭhī’’ti. ‘‘Sadosassā’’ti hi vuttaṭṭhāne paṭighaṃ akusalamūlaṃ gahitaṃ, ‘‘paṭiviruddhassā’’ti virodho, ‘‘samohassā’’ti moho akusalamūlaṃ, ‘‘aviddasuno’’ti malyaṃ, asampajaññaṃ vā, ‘‘saupādānassā’’ti ‘‘natthi dinna’’ntiādinā nayena gahaṇaṃ, ‘‘papañcārāmassā’’ti papañcuppattivasena.
“ākārato”(由行相):指由转起的行相。由于用不同的词语来显示贪的种种差别,所以最初提到的“sarāga”(有贪)一词,是针对粗显的贪境而说,因此解释为“pañcakāmaguṇikarāgavasena”(依五种欲功德贪)。“gahaṇavasena”(依执取):指依强力执取。因为在经文中,“anuruddhapaṭiviruddhassa”(随顺者和违逆者)是作为一个复合词出现的,所以把它们合起来加以解释。但这里,“anuruddhassa”(随顺者)的意思应理解为依净相而有;因为违逆并非基于净相。“papañcuppattidassanavasenāti”(依显示戏论生起):因为烦恼、业、果它们之间互为辗转生起的条件,致使轮回成为一种戏论,所以“戏论”就是指这个;这里则是依显示它作为生起因的方式来阐述。因为渴爱是导致“有”生起的殊胜条件。“taṇhāpaccayā upādānadassanavasena”(依显示渴爱为缘而有取):就是依显示作为渴爱之缘的取这一层关系来解释;也就是按照渴爱成为取之缘的那个状态来显示。因为这是用果来彰表因的特殊性。这里问:为什么要像“evaṃ viddhaṃsetha”(这样加以分解)那样,把贪分散开来解说呢?这是为了从欲贪、有爱等不同角度来说明贪。“taṇhākaraṇavasena”(依渴爱的作用):就是依渴爱的渴求作用、依执取为净相的方式来解释。因为对于所缘,把它当作“净”而生起的贪,就被称为“subha”(净)。显示巴利原文
Ākāratoti pavattiākārato. Padantarena rāgavisesassa vuccamānattāādito vuttaṃ sarāgavacanaṃ oḷārikaṃ rāgavisayanti āha ‘‘pañcakāmaguṇikarāgavasenā’’ti. Gahaṇavasenāti daḷhaggahaṇavasena. ‘‘Anuruddhapaṭiviruddhassā’’ti ekapadavasena pāḷiyaṃ āgatattā ekajjhaṃ paduddhāro kato. Tattha pana ‘‘anuruddhassā’’ti subhavasenāti evamattho vattabbo. Na hi paṭivirujjhanaṃ subhavasena hoti. Papañcuppattidassanavasenāti kilesakammavipākānaṃ aparāparuppattipaccayatāya saṃsārassa papañcanaṃ papañco, tassa uppattihetubhāvadassanavasena. Taṇhā hi bhavuppattiyā visesapaccayo. Taṇhāpaccayā upādānadassanavasenāti taṇhāpaccayassa upādānassa dassanavasena, yadavatthā taṇhā upādānassa paccayo, tadavatthādassanavasena. Phalena hi hetuvisesakittanametanti. Evaṃ viddhaṃsethāti kāmarāgabhavataṇhādivasena lobhaṃ kasmā evaṃ vippakiretha. Taṇhākaraṇavasenāti taṇhāyanakaraṇavasena subhākāraggahaṇavasena. Subhanti hi ārammaṇe pavatto rāgo ‘‘subha’’nti vutto.
142 “vadanti etenāti vādo”——依此而说,故称为“说”,即关于见的言论。因为依于见,执见者才施设出“我与世间是常”或“我与世间是非常”等观点。因此世尊说:“诸比丘,有此二见。”由于不存在脱离渴爱的见,并且正是依于渴爱,才会对自己的恒常性产生执著,所以此处解释为“依渴爱与见”(taṇhādiṭṭhivasena)。“allīnā”(粘着):即依附。“upagatā”(接近):犹如因执取不舍而与之成为一体那样地接近。“ajjhositā”(被联结):即被此见所吞没,仿佛被它彻底决定一般,深陷其中。故说“anupaviṭṭhā”(进入)。正如在家人对欲乐的联结是争论的根源,出家人对见的联结也是如此,所以说“他们与无有见相对立”(vibhavadiṭṭhiyā te paṭiviruddhā)。正是依于见,才导致了执见者之间的对立。显示巴利原文
142. Vadanti etenāti vādo, diṭṭhivādo. Diṭṭhivasena hi ‘‘sassato attā ca loko ca, asassato attā ca loko cā’’ti ca diṭṭhigatikā paññapenti. Tenāha ‘‘dvemā, bhikkhave, diṭṭhiyo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.142). Taṇhārahitāya diṭṭhiyā abhāvato taṇhāvaseneva ca attano sassatabhāvābhinivesoti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘taṇhādiṭṭhivasenā’’ti. Allīnāti nissitā. Upagatāti avissajjanavasena ekibhāvamiva gatā. Ajjhositāti tāya diṭṭhiyā gilitvā pariniṭṭhāpitā viya tadantogadhā. Tenāha ‘‘anupaviṭṭhā’’ti. Yathā gahaṭṭhānaṃ kāmajjhosānaṃ vivādamūlaṃ, evaṃ pabbajitānaṃ diṭṭhajjhosānanti āha ‘‘vibhavadiṭṭhiyā te paṭiviruddhā’’ti. Diṭṭhivirodhena hi diṭṭhigatikavirodho.
“刹那生”即生时,所以说“诸见的生起”。这里,通过“诸见的生起”这一表述,既阐明了诸见是缘生的,同样也阐明了诸见的所依也是如此,因此应知这两者都是无常、苦、无我的。为了显示在《无碍解道》理趣中所说的“缘生八处”,于是说了“诸蕴”等语句。其中,诸蕴也是见的立足处,因为经中说“见色是我”等,以所缘的意义而成为见的立足处。无明也是见的立足处,因为它以亲依止缘等方式成为缘。正如经中所说:“诸比丘,无闻凡夫不见圣者,不熟娴圣法……”等。触也是见的立足处。就像经中说:“那也是以触为缘”,以及“触了又触而领受”。想也是见的立足处。经中曾说:“由想为因,而有了戏论之数”,以及“由地想而认知地”等。寻也是见的立足处。经中也曾说:“依寻思于诸见中构造后,说‘真实与虚妄’这一对法”,以及“是寻思者、审察者”。不如理作意也是见的立足处。如世尊所说:“对于那个不如理作意的人,六种见中的某一种见就会生起,他会生起‘我有我’是真实、是谛实的见”等。依此生起,故称为“生起因”,即生起因的状态,以此义而说。“刹那灭”就是刹那灭尽。“缘灭”是指无明等的彻底灭尽。但是为了说明那彻底灭尽是由什么带来的,所以说到“入流道”。因为四圣道各自相应地对那些行所摄的法来说是彻底灭尽之因,而刹那灭则是无因的。显示巴利原文
Khaṇikasamudayo uppādakkhaṇoti āha ‘‘diṭṭhīnaṃ nibbattī’’ti. Diṭṭhinibbattiggahaṇeneva cettha yathā diṭṭhīnaṃ paṭiccasamuppannatā vibhāvitā, evaṃ diṭṭhivatthunopīti ubhayesampi aniccatā dukkhatā anattatā ca vibhāvitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yāni paṭisambhidānayena (paṭi. ma. 1.122) ‘‘paccayasamudayo aṭṭha ṭhānānī’’ti vuttāni, tāni dassento ‘‘khandhāpī’’tiādimāha. Tattha khandhāpi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ ārammaṇaṭṭhena ‘‘rūpaṃ attato samanupassatī’’tiādivacanato (saṃ. ni. 3.81; 4.345). Avijjāpi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ upanissayādivasena paccayabhāvato. Yathāha – ‘‘assutavā, bhikkhave, puthujjano ariyānaṃ adassāvī ariyadhammassa akovido’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.2, 461; saṃ. ni. 3.1, 7). Phassopi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ. Yathā cāha ‘‘tadapi phassapaccayā (dī. ni. 1.118-130), phussa phussa paṭisaṃvediyantī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.144) ca . Saññāpi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘saññānidānā hi papañcasaṅkhāti (su. ni. 880), pathaviṃ pathavito saññatvā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.2) ca ādi. Vitakkopi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘takkañca diṭṭhīsu pakappayitvā, saccaṃ musāti dvayadhammamāhū’’ti (su. ni. 892; mahāni. 121) ‘‘takkī hoti vīmaṃsī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.34) ca ādi. Ayonisomanasikāropi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ. Yathāha bhagavā ‘‘tasseva ayoniso manasikaroto channaṃ diṭṭhīnaṃ aññatarā diṭṭhi uppajjati, atthi me attāti assa saccato thetato diṭṭhi uppajjatī’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.19). Samuṭṭhāti etenāti samuṭṭhānaṃ, tassa bhāvo samuṭṭhānaṭṭho, tena. Khaṇikatthaṅgamo khaṇikanirodho. Paccayatthaṅgamo avijjādīnaṃ accantanirodho. So pana yena hoti, taṃ dassento ‘‘sotāpattimaggo’’ti āha. Cattāro hi ariyamaggā yathārahaṃ tassa tassa saṅkhāragatassa accantanirodhahetu, khaṇikanirodho pana ahetuko.
“利益”即增长。但利益又分为现法利益和来世利益两种。其中,来世利益因为恶趣等杂染的缘故,实际上属于过患的范畴,因此,为了显示另一种——即现法利益,所以提到:“以此(现法利益)为指向……”等。为了说明过患也存在于现法利益中,又说到“以执取现法为根源的灾祸”等。那个“过患”指的就是过失。“过患”一词中的“等”字,包括了裸体、无座、险难行等情形。如果按照“由此而得出离”的字面,说“出离”的话,那么只有见道才能算是诸见的出离;但是,因为见道是作为诸见消失的同义词而被理解的,所以,从一切有为法中出离的涅槃,也被称为从诸见中出离,因此说:“诸见的出离名为涅槃”。关于“以此……”等词句的解释,应该按照前面“修习”一节里所说的方式来理解。显示巴利原文
Ānisaṃsanti udayaṃ. So pana diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikavasena duvidho. Tattha samparāyiko duggatiparikilesatāyaādīnavapakkhiko evāti itaraṃ dassento ‘‘yaṃ sandhāyā’’tiādimāha. Ādīnavampi diṭṭhadhammikameva dassento ‘‘diṭṭhiggahaṇamūlakaṃ upaddava’’ntiādimāha. Sotiādīnavo. Ādīnanti ādi-saddena naggiyānasanasaṅkaṭivatādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Nissarati etenāti nissaraṇanti vuccamāne dassanamaggo eva diṭṭhīnaṃ nissaraṇaṃ siyā, tassa pana atthaṅgamapariyāyena gahitattā sabbasaṅkhatanissaṭaṃ nibbānaṃ diṭṭhīhipi nissaṭanti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘diṭṭhīnaṃ nissaraṇaṃ nāma nibbāna’’nti. Iminātiādīsu vattabbaṃ anuyogavatte vuttanayameva.
143 显示“断除诸见”:通过阐明对一切取的遍知,展示彻底断除诸见的方法。这正是前面所说。显示巴利原文
143.Diṭṭhicchedanaṃ dassentoti sabbupādānapariññādassanena sabbaso diṭṭhīnaṃ samucchedavidhiṃ dassento. Vuttāyevāti –
“取”有四种,通过对含义的分别、
及以法的略说、广说与次第,来加以阐明。”(《清净道论》2.645)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Upādānāni cattāri, tāni atthavibhāgato; Dhammasaṅkhepavitthārā, kamato ca vibhāvaye’’ti. (visuddhi. 2.645) –
如前所述,举出偈颂之后,接着以义理分析等方式进行解说。确实,外道们并没有这样一种了知:“这些取只有这四种,不会超过这个数目。”只是一部分人说“应当断除诸欲”,一部分人说“没有他世是邪见”,另一部分人说“以戒禁而得清净是邪见”,但对于“有我见”是邪见这件事,他们全然不知。即使对他们所知道的那一点点,也不知道要彻底地予以断除,反而固执地滞留在“对于一切应遍知的,我们已施设了遍知”之类的想法中。为了指出处于这种境地的他们所行持的是什么,世尊说:“有,比丘们……”等等。其中,“有”指的是存在,借此表明那些邪见者确实存在,并未断绝。“某些”的意思是一部分。“沙门婆罗门”:通过出家而成为沙门,仅凭出身而称为婆罗门。“一切”:指对所有的取彻底超越和断除。“不能正确地施设”:是说即使他们有所主张,也未能正确地施设遍知。现在为了详细开显这个意义,又说到“哪些……”等。其中,有禾提咖、库提咖咖、巴呼达咖、汉萨、巴拉玛汉萨、卡加咖、持三杖者、修禁语者、西瓦、巴鲁巴咖、五夜行者、索玛卡啦咖、修牛行等。显示巴利原文
Gāthaṃ uddisitvā atthavibhāgādivasena vuttāyeva. Kāmaṃ ito bāhirakānaṃ ‘‘imāni upādānāni ettakāni cattāri, na ito bhiyyo’’ti īdisaṃ ñāṇaṃ natthi, kevalaṃ pana keci ‘‘kāmā pahātabbā’’ti vadanti, keci ‘‘natthi paro lokoti ca, micchā’’ti vadanti, apare ‘‘sīlabbatena suddhīti ca, micchā’’ti vadanti, attadiṭṭhiyā pana micchābhāvaṃ sabbaso na jānanti eva. Yattakaṃ pana jānanti, tassapi accantappahānaṃ na jānanti, tathāpi sabbassa pariññeyyassa pariññeyyaṃ paññapemaicceva tiṭṭhanti. Evaṃbhūtānaṃ pana nesaṃ tattha yādisī paṭipatti, taṃ dassento satthā ‘‘santi, bhikkhave’’tiādimāha. Tattha santīti saṃvijjanti. Tena tesaṃ diṭṭhigatikānaṃ vijjamānatāya avicchedataṃ dasseti. Eketi ekacce. Samaṇabrāhmaṇāti pabbajjupagamanena samaṇā, jātimattena ca brāhmaṇā. Sabbesanti anavasesānaṃ upādānānaṃ samatikkamaṃ pahānaṃ. Sammā na paññapentīti yesaṃ paññapenti, tesampi sammā pariññaṃ na paññapenti. Idāni taṃ atthaṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘kecī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha hotika-kuṭīcaka-bahūdaka-haṃsa-paramahaṃsa-kājaka-tidaṇḍa-monavata-seva-pārupaka-pañcamarattika- somakāraka-mugabbata-carabāka-tāpasa-niganthā-jīvaka-isi-pārāyanika-pañcātapika-kāpila- kāṇāda-saṃsāramocaka-aggibhattika-magavatika-govatika-kukkuravatika-kāmaṇḍaluka- vaggulivatika-ekasāṭaka-odakasuddhika-sarīrasantāpaka-sīlasuddhika-jhānasuddhika-catubbidha- sassatavādādayo channavuti taṇhāpāsena ḍaṃsanato, ariyadhammassa vā vibādhanato pāsaṇḍā. Vatthupaṭisevanaṃ kāmanti byāpārassa vatthuno paṭisevanasaṅkhātaṃ kāmaṃ. Theyyena sevantīti paṭihatthaādisamaññāya lokassa vacanavasena sevanti. Tīṇi kāraṇānīti ‘‘natthi dinna’’ntiādinayappavattāni diṭṭhivisesabhūtāni vaṭṭakāraṇāni.
“义谈”:指关于义理的谈话,即能明了双方所欲表达之义理的交谈。因为两人之间的言谈就称为“谈”。因此说“据说大地……”等。显示巴利原文
Atthasallāpikāti atthassa sallāpikā, dvinnaṃ adhippetatthasallāpavibhāvinīti adhippāyo. Dvinnañhi vacanaṃ sallāpo. Tenāha ‘‘pathavī kirā’’tiādi.
对于外道所说的对自己导师、法和同梵行者的净信,由于它不能成为(善趣的)所依,为了显示这种信并非真正的净信,所以称为「信之截断」。基于此而兴起的言论,就叫做「信之截断论」。「像这样的」:指像前面所说的那样,并不能导向烦恼的止息。「法」:指的是相似于正法的东西。「律」:指的是相似于律的东西。因为那些外道立足于欺骗,欺诳世人说“我在说法”,像“这些七种身不是被造的,也没有被造的作者……”等等(《长部》1.174),随便说些什么,就声称是法;他们还说“我们施设律”,从而施设了牛戒、狐蝠戒等,教导他们的弟子这些学处,然后称之为“法与律”。此处所说的“法与律”正是这个意思。因此说:“这两样东西都显示非导出的教说”。即便是想造一点点小福德的人,被悭吝垢秽所征服,障碍他、阻止他去行善,这人在现世中必定被智者所呵责,来世则堕恶趣;更何况是去打击那能令人彻底出离整个轮回之苦的胜利之轮(佛陀教法)的外道师以及随他教说的人呢?为了显示这个道理,他说:“在非导出的教说中,确实……”等等。为了显示那样的净信在未来世并不是随顺正道,只是随其自身性质而转,他又说:“即使经过一段时间,最终也必定毁灭。”意思是:它不像不坏净信那样是究竟的。显示巴利原文
Yo titthiyānaṃ attano satthari dhamme sahadhammikesu ca pasādo vutto, tassa anāyatanagatattā appasādakabhāvadassanaṃ pasādapacchedo. Tathāpavatto vādo pasādapacchedavādo vutto. Evarūpeti īdise vuttanayena kilesānaṃ anupasamasaṃvattanike. Dhammeti dhammapatirūpake. Vinayeti vinayapatirūpake. Titthiyā hi kohaññe ṭhatvā lokaṃ vañcentā dhammaṃ kathemāti ‘‘sattime kāyā akaṭā akaṭavidhā’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.174) yaṃ kiñci kathetvā tathā ‘‘vinayaṃ paññapemā’’ti gosīlavaggulivatādīni paññapetvā tādisaṃ sāvake sikkhāpetvā ‘‘dhammavinayo’’ti kathenti, taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘dhammavinaye’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘ubhayenapi aniyyānikaṃ sāsanaṃ dassetī’’ti. Parittampi nāma puññaṃ kātukāmaṃ maccheramalābhibhūtatāya nivārentassa antarāyaṃ tassa karoto diṭṭheva dhamme viññūhi garahitabbatā samparāye ca duggati pāṭikaṅkhā, kimaṅgaṃ pana sakalavaṭṭadukkhanissaraṇāvahe jinacakke pahāradāyino titthakarassa tadovādakarassa cāti imamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘aniyyānikasāsanamhi hī’’tiādimāha. Yathā so pasādo samparāye na sammaggato attano pavattivasenāti dassento ‘‘kañci kālaṃ gantvāpi pacchā vinassati yevā’’ti āha, aveccappasādo viya accantiko na hotīti attho.
依那种行持而成就时,会带来畜生道,因为业报必定与其业相似。“一切原因的差别”,即前述那些外道师及其弟子们招感恶趣之苦的邪行,也就是种种特殊的原因。然而,那种净信并不导向出离,因其属于邪的范畴,正如对饮酒的狐狸所生的净信一样。滤酒后丢弃的酒渣即是酒滓。那个婆罗门确实贪财,他心想“我要骗他”,于是便说。“一百铜盆”即一百个咖哈巴那钱。显示巴利原文
Sampajjamānā yathāvidhipaṭipattiyā tiracchānayoniṃ āvahati. Kammasarikkhakena hi vipākeneva bhavitabbaṃ. Sabbampi kāraṇabhedanti sabbampi yathāvuttaṃ titthakarānaṃ sāvakānaṃ apāyadukkhāvahaṃ micchāpaṭipattisaṅkhātaṃ kāraṇavisesaṃ. So panesa pasādo na niyyāti micchattapakkhikattā surāpītasiṅgāle pasādo viya. Suraṃ parissāvetvā chaḍḍitakasaṭaṃ surājallikaṃ. Brāhmaṇā nāma dhanaluddhāti adhippāyenāha ‘‘imaṃ vañcessāmī’’ti. Kaṃsasatāti kahāpaṇasatā.
144 “彼”即这种信。一切贪爱都可称为“欲取尽处”,因此说“以阿拉汉道断除遍知欲取”。“像这样的”,指能令烦恼完全止息的教说。“法”,具有令依教奉行者不堕恶趣的“持”义。“律”,具有彻底调伏之义。在此教说中,这能导向出离有之苦。显示巴利原文
144.Tassāti pasādassa. Sabbopi lobho kāmupādānanteva vuccatīti āha ‘‘arahattamaggena kāmupādānassa pahānapariñña’’nti. Evarūpeti īdise sabbaso kilesānaṃ upasamasaṃvattanike. Yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamānānaṃ apāyesu apatanavasena dhāraṇaṭṭhena dhamme. Sabbaso vinayanaṭṭhena vinaye. Tattha bhavadukkhanissaraṇāya saṃvattane.
“礼敬而立”:他于过去两个不可计数劫中,圆满过辟支菩提的资粮,加上当时对佛陀教法有所熟悉,且对世尊怀有净信心,因此礼敬后站在那里。“猫头鹰……”等偈颂是树神所说。“傍晚起来”,指傍晚时分从昼间住处起身。“这个恶趣者不去”,意为他不会去恶趣。“毛拉吉咖”即演奏手鼓的人。至于大鼓演奏者等故事,应当以引人发笑的方式开头,再详细展开叙述。显示巴利原文
Namassamāno aṭṭhāsi dve asaṅkhyeyyāni paccekabodhipāramīnaṃ pūraṇena tattha buddhasāsane paricayena ca bhagavati pasannacittatāya ca. ‘‘Ulūkā’’tyādigāthā rukkhadevatāya bhāsitā. Kāluṭṭhitanti sāyanhakāle divāvihārato uṭṭhitaṃ. Duggateso na gacchatīti duggatiṃ eso na gamissati. Morajiko murajavādako. Mahābherivādakavatthuādīnipi sitapātukaraṇaṃ ādiṃ katvā vitthāretabbāni.
「究竟义」:即出世间法。那么,对那些在法上执取相而听闻的人,又有什么可说呢?「沙弥的故事」:即出家当天便被蛇咬死、随后投生天界的沙弥的故事。显示巴利原文
Paramattheti lokuttaradhamme. Kiṃ pana vattabbanti dhammepi paramatthe nimittaṃ gahetvā suṇantānaṃ. Sāmaṇeravatthūti pabbajitadivaseyeva sappena daṭṭho hutvā kālaṃ katvā devalokaṃ upapannasāmaṇeravatthu.
「乳饭」:与牛乳混合的饭。「Timbarusaka」:即黑乌木果。有人说,有一种形似黄瓜的蔓生植物叫 timbarusa,其果实即为 timbarusaka。「Kakkārika」:指小黄瓜,也有人说它是大黄瓜。「蔓果」:即小黄瓜蔓的果实。「手煎锅」:指慢火煎锅。「芒果粥」:即酸粥,也称 khaḷayāgu。「捣臼饼」:带油的芝麻饼。「Vidhupana」:方扇。「棕榈扇」:用棕榈叶制成的圆扇。「孔雀手扇」:用孔雀羽毛制成的驱蚊扇。显示巴利原文
Khīrodananti khīrena saddhiṃ sammissaṃ odanaṃ. Timbarusakanti tindukaphalaṃ. Tipusasadisā ekā vallijāti timbarusaṃ, tassa phalaṃ timbarusakanti ca vadanti. Kakkārikanti khuddakaelāḷukaṃ. Mahātipusanti ca vadanti. Vallipakkanti khuddakatipusavalliyā phalaṃ. Hatthapatāpakanti mandāmukhi. Ambakañjikanti ambilakañjikaṃ. Khaḷayāguntipi vadanti. Doṇinimmajjaninti satelaṃ tilapiññākaṃ. Vidhupananti caturassabījaniṃ . Tālavaṇṭanti tālapattehi katamaṇḍalabījaniṃ. Morahatthanti morapiñchehi kataṃ makasabījaniṃ.
「依循已说的方式」:因为在此,导师同样把一切所述之理的各种差异归纳一处,开示道“那是什么原因?”等;所以,在那些非导向解脱的教法中,应当随念已说的方式,结合而了知。显示巴利原文
Vuttanayānusārenevāti yasmā idhāpi yathāvuttaṃ sabbampi kāraṇabhedaṃ ekato katvā dassento satthā ‘‘taṃ kissa hetū’’ntiādimāha, tasmā tattha aniyyānikasāsane vuttanayassa anussaraṇavasena yojetvā veditabbaṃ.
145 「遍知」即断遍知。「显示它们的缘」:意思是,诸取的遍知就是断遍知。所希求的是它们的毕竟灭,而这唯有通过缘的息灭才能实现,因此,为了从根本原因开始显示它们的缘。「此」:指现在要说到的,在“这些呢?”等经文中,“以何为因”等复合词的意义。「一切处」:即在“爱集”等一切之处。而且,“一切”一词也应理解为包含了“以触为因”等其他文句。那些外道连诸取的集起都不知道,更不用说它们的息灭了。然而,如来却如实了知那些以及它们诸缘之缘的集起与息灭。因此,为了将所发的狮子吼推至顶峰——“就在这里,比丘们,有沙门……其他沙门们的外道之说都是空无的”(《中部》1.139),世尊便以“比丘们,有这四种取”等方式(《中部》1.145),从缘起的门径导入教导,先显示流转,然后以“然而,从……以后”等显示还灭,最终用阿拉汉道把握教说的顶点。为了表明这层含意,才说“然而,因为世尊……”。这一点甚为易懂。显示巴利原文
145.Pariññanti pahānapariññaṃ. Tesaṃ paccayaṃ dassetunti upādānānaṃ pariññā nāma pahānapariññā. Tesaṃ accantanirodho adhippeto, so ca paccayanirodhena hotīti tesaṃ paccayaṃ mūlakāraṇato pabhuti dassetuṃ. Ayanti idāni vuccamāno ettha ‘‘ime cā’’tiādipāṭhe ‘‘kiṃ nidānā’’tiādisamāsapadānaṃ attho. Sabbapadesūti ‘‘taṇhāsamudayā’’tiādīsu sabbesu padesu. Iminā eva ca sabbaggahaṇena ‘‘phassanidānā’’tiādīnampi padānaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Ime aññatitthiyā upādānānampi samudayaṃ na jānanti, kuto nirodhaṃ, tathāgato pana tesaṃ tappaccayapaccayānampi samudayañca atthaṅgamañca yāthāvato jānāti, tasmā – ‘‘idheva, bhikkhave, samaṇo…pe… suññā parappavādā samaṇebhi aññehī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.139) yathāraddhasīhanādaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā dassento ‘‘ime ca, bhikkhave, cattāro upādānā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.145) nayena desanaṃ paṭiccasamuppādamukhena otārento vaṭṭaṃ dassetvā ‘‘yato ca kho’’tiādinā vivaṭṭaṃ dassento arahattena desanāya kūṭaṃ gaṇhi, tamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘yasmā pana bhagavā’’tiādimāha. Taṃ suviññeyyameva.
2. 大狮子吼经注疏显示巴利原文
2. Mahāsīhanādasuttavaṇṇanā
毘舍离城注释显示巴利原文
Vesālīnagaravaṇṇanā
146 「一再」:即一而再,再而三。「由于变为宽广」:因为每到一牛呼的距离,便彼此宽广地连接在一起。「在那里」:指在那宽广的情形中。「刚丢弃」:指刚刚排出。「因波浪等险难」:即因波浪、鳄鱼、漩涡和污秽等带来的危险。即使被水流冲到这里,体温也并没有消失;而这种体温,若有识才可能存在,于是他心想:“或许是个胎儿。”等等,这些都是对此事的思惟原因。因有福德,故无恶臭;因尚有余温,故未腐烂。由于孩子们凭着福德之力,从他的拇指流出了乳汁,也获得乳饭。当最后有菩萨入胎时,菩萨的母亲腹部皮肤极其清净透明,犹如没有皮肤,因此说“他们成了无皮者”。「他们」:指那两个孩子。「父母」:指养育他们的父母。众人为他们灌顶,立为国王,这是因为成就王位的业已经成熟,并且他们本就出生在未分裂的王族之中。也有人说,两位王子被福德威力所招感的诸天所摄持。显示巴利原文
146.Aparāparanti punappunaṃ. Visālībhūtatāyāti gāvutantaraṃ gāvutantaraṃ puthubhūtatāya. Tatrāti tassaṃ visālībhūtatāyaṃ. Chaḍḍitamatteti vissaṭṭhamatte. Ūmibhayādīhīti ūmikumbhīlaāvaṭṭasaṃsukābhayehi. Udakappavāhenāgatassapi ca usmā na vigacchati, usmā ca nāma īdisassa saviññāṇakatāya bhaveyyāti ‘‘siyā gabbho’’ti cintesi. Tathā hītiādi tattha kāraṇacintā. Puññavantatāya duggandhaṃ nāhosi, sausumatāya pūtikabhāvo. Dārakānaṃ puññūpanissayato aṅguṭṭhakato cassa khīraṃ nibbatti, khīrabhattañca labhi. Carimakabhave bodhisatte kucchigate bodhisattamātu viya udaracchaviyā acchavippasannatāya nicchavi viyāti katvā āha ‘‘nicchavī ahesu’’nti. Tesanti dvinnaṃ dārakānaṃ. Mātāpitaroti posakamātāpitaro. Abhisiñcitvā rājānaṃ akaṃsu rajjasampattiyā dāyakassa kammassa katattā, asambhinne eva rājakule uppannattā ca. Kumārassa puññānubhāvasañcoditā devatādhiggahitāti keci.
「城之西」:在城西约一牛呼远的地方,有一座带围墙的精舍,就像耆婆芒果园一样。「不久离去」:这里不是指前往别处,而是指从教法离去。为说明这点,注释说“还俗”等词。因此经中说“从此法、律中”。「在集会」:指在大众里,意思是处在人群中间。而进入人群之中便称为“在众中”。「人间法」:指不依靠修习作意,仅凭人们自然就能生起的法;或者指能导致获得人身的法,也就是那些并非殊胜的微细善行。这类法即使在没有佛陀出世时也存在,所以有说:“以低劣的梵行,将投生到剎帝利”。「佛我执者」:指对佛陀生起占有欲、认为“佛陀是我们的”的人。其余两句(法与僧)同理。显示巴利原文
Purassa apareti purassa aparadisāya gāvutamatte ṭhāne jīvakambavanaṃ viya sapākāramandirake. Acirapakkantoti ettha na desantarapakkamanaṃ adhippetaṃ, atha kho sāsanato apakkamananti dassento ‘‘vibbhamitvā’’tiādimāha. Tenevāha ‘‘imasmā dhammavinayā’’ti. Parisatīti parisāyaṃ, janasamūheti attho. Janasamūhagato pana ‘‘parisamajjhe’’ti vutto. Bhāvanāmanasikārena vinā pakatiyāva manussehi nibbattetabbo dhammoti manussadhammo, manussattabhāvāvaho vā dhammo manussadhammo, anuḷāraṃ parittakusalaṃ. Yaṃ asatipi buddhuppāde vattati, yañca sandhāyāha ‘‘hīnena brahmacariyena, khattiye upapajjatī’’ti. ‘‘Amhākaṃ buddho’’ti buddhe mamattakārino buddhamāmakā. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo.
超人法等的注释显示巴利原文
Uttarimanussadhammādivaṇṇanā
“圣洁”:指因具备圣者的状态,故而堪为圣者。“如实知见”:如同眼识了知、看见色处一般地了知、看见,这是指天眼。再者,对于可被普遍观察的诸法,同样了知、看见无常等三相,这也是“如实知见”,此处指观。至于涅槃或四圣谛,则通过无迷惑的通达而了知、看见,这是指圣道。而道果仅以涅槃来建立。省察智由于现量了知由道所证得的义理,故也称为“如实知见”;一切知智因无有障碍、具足周遍之眼,也称为“如实知见”。但此处实际所指乃是出世间道,因为若否定了它,一切佛功德便不可能存在。因此说:“因为他否定了世尊的那个道。”显示巴利原文
Alaṃ ariyāya ariyabhāvāyāti alamariyo, rūpāyatanaṃ jānāti cakkhuviññāṇaṃ viya passati cāti ñāṇadassanaṃ, dibbacakkhu. Sammasanupage ca pana dhamme lakkhaṇattayañca tathā jānāti passati cāti ñāṇadassanaṃ, vipassanā. Nibbānaṃ, cattāri vā saccāni asammohapaṭivedhato jānāti passati cāti ñāṇadassanaṃ, maggo. Phalaṃ pana nibbānavaseneva yojetabbaṃ. Paccavekkhaṇā maggādhigatassa atthassa paccakkhato jānanaṭṭhena ñāṇadassanaṃ, sabbaññutā anāvaraṇatāya samantacakkhutāya ca ñāṇadassanaṃ. Lokuttaramaggo adhippeto, tasmiñhi paṭisiddhe sabbesampi buddhaguṇānaṃ asambhavoti adhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘tañhi so bhagavato paṭisedhetī’’ti.
“微细的法差别”:指禅那、观等微细法门,并非经由师长传授而获得。“以推论所得”:指通过推论——“将会这样”“将会那样”——对于种种应展示的意义,仅以寻思的方式反复推敲、翻转。因此说“推论后”等。“允许世间慧”:佛陀允许世间智慧,是为那些坐在近处的听众说随顺其根性的法。因此经中说“沙门乔达摩”等。“显现”:指辩才,即“我将这样说”这般生起的想要说话的心;基于这种辩才的了知即称为“依辩才的了知”;由于不依靠传承,自己自然生起,故称为“自生辩才”。因此说:“借此他否定了对诸法有现量体验。”“善触”:指没有间隙。若未触到,语音便不能轻快发出。“齿覆”:指双唇。“舌”:因舌僵硬,语音无法轻快发出,故提到“柔软的舌”。“声”:因如杜鹃鸟鸣般美妙,故声音甜蜜。“无过失”:Ela指过失,吞下过失即是“有失语者”;无过失便不会恼怒。以上所说一切,仅为说明取悦他人的原因。显示巴利原文
Sukhumaṃ dhammantaraṃ nāma jhānavipassanādikaṃ ācariyānuggahena gahitaṃ nāma natthi. Takkapariyāhatanti ‘‘iti bhavissati, evaṃ bhavissatī’’ti taṃtaṃdassetabbamatthatakkanena vitakkanamattena parito āhataṃ parivattitaṃ katvā. Tenāha ‘‘takketvā’’tiādi. Lokiyapaññaṃ anujānāti upanisinnaparisāya anukūladhammakathanatoti adhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘samaṇo gotamo’’tiādi. Paṭibhātīti paṭibhānaṃ, ‘‘iti vakkhāmī’’ti evaṃpavattaṃ kathanacittaṃ, tato paṭibhānato jānanaṃ paṭibhānaṃ, āgamābhāvato sayameva upaṭṭhitattā sayaṃpaṭibhānaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘imināssa dhammesu paccakkhabhāvaṃ paṭibāhatī’’ti. Suphusitanti nibbivaraṃ. Aphusitatte hi sukhena vacīghoso na niccharati. Dantāvaraṇanti oṭṭhadvayaṃ. Jivhāpi thaddhatāya sukhena vacīghoso na niccharatīti āha ‘‘mudukā jivhā’’ti. Karavīkarutamañjutāya madhuro saro. Elaṃ vuccati doso, elaṃ gaḷatīti elagaḷā, na elagaḷā anelagaḷā, niddosā, na rujjhatīti attho. Sabbametaṃ rañjanasseva kāraṇaṃ dassento vadati.
“五种法”:这是就作为甚深智行所缘的蕴等,在把握、听闻、受持、熟习、如理作意方面而说的。“对于正确行道者的正确灭苦”:这里的“正确”一词应连接两处,即“正确行道者的正确灭苦”。因为唯有正确行道者,才会有正确的灭苦。而对于依前述方式行道者,其“导出”实质上即是法的导出,因此说:“那法……导出、离去。”显示巴利原文
Pañca dhammāti gambhīrañāṇacariyabhūtānaṃ khandhādīnaṃ uggahaṇa-savana-dhāraṇa-paricaya-yonisomanasikāre sandhāyāha. Takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāyāti ettha sammā-saddo ubhayatthāpi yojetabbo ‘‘sammā takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāyā’’ti. Yo hi sammā dhammaṃ paṭipajjati, tasseva sammā dukkhakkhayo hoti. Yo pana vuttanayena takkaro, tassa niyyānaṃ atthato dhammasseva niyyānanti āha ‘‘so dhammo…pe… niyyāti gacchatī’’ti.
147 「忿怒者」:指有忿怒习性的人。然而,因为善星由忿怒而变得残酷、言语粗恶,所以才说:“‘忿怒者’即是凶暴、粗言之人。”在那个自体中没有道果的近依止,意思是:在那个自体中没有能令道果生起的近依止。诸佛称这种人“愚人”,如苏定那、拉鲁达伊等。即使有近依止,若在那一刹那未生起道或果,也称作“愚人”,如陀尼耶长老、优波塞那长老等。若近依止已完全断除,更不必说。正如经中说:“愚人末迦梨,我观犹如投人胎”(增支部1.311),善星也是如此。因此注释接着说:“然而对此……”等。「他的」:此处是语法上的属格。「因忿怒」:即由于忿怒的缘故。显示巴利原文
147.Kodhanoti kujjhanasīlo. Yasmā pana sunakkhatto kodhavasena kurūro pharusavacano ca, tasmā āha ‘‘kodhanoti caṇḍo pharuso cā’’ti. Tasmiṃ attabhāve maggaphalānaṃ upanissayo natthīti tasmiṃ attabhāve uppajjanārahānaṃ maggaphalānaṃ upanissayo natthi. Taṃ buddhā ‘‘moghapuriso’’ti vadanti yathā taṃ sudinnalāḷudāyiādike. Upanissaye satipi tasmiṃ khaṇe magge vā phale vā asati ‘‘moghapuriso’’ti vadanti yathā taṃ dhaniyūpasenattherādike. Samucchinnopanissaye pana vattabbameva natthi. Yathā ‘‘makkhali moghapuriso manussakhippaṃ maññe’’ti (a. ni. 1.311) tathā sunakkhattopīti āha ‘‘imassa panā’’tiādi. Assāti etena. Kattari hidaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Kodhenāti kodhahetunā.
「对世尊」:这是与“忿怒”一词相呼应的与格。「以前」:指他还是比丘的时候。「想听声音」:据说善星以天眼看见三十三天中天神的色身时,只见嘴唇在动,却听不到声音,因此想听他们的声音,所以有了“想听声音……问”这段经文。而他在过去生中,曾掌击一位持戒比丘的耳壳,造成耳聋,因此即使他作了遍作,也无法证得天耳。正因如此,这里说“知其没有近依止,所以没有为他开示遍作”。「思惟」:指他依自己邪妄的寻思,不如理地浮想联翩。显示巴利原文
Bhagavatoti sampadānavacanaṃ kuddhapadāpekkhāya. Pubbeti bhikkhukāle. Saddaṃ sotukāmoti so kira dibbacakkhunā tāvatiṃsabhavane devatānaṃ rūpaṃ passanto oṭṭhacalanaṃ passati, na pana saddaṃ suṇāti, tasmā tāsaṃ saddaṃ sotukāmo ahosi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘saddaṃ sotukāmo…pe… pucchī’’ti. So ca atīte ekaṃ sīlavantaṃ bhikkhuṃ kaṇṇasakkhaliyaṃ paharitvā badhiramakāsi, tasmā parikammaṃ karontopi abhabbova dibbasotādhigamāya. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘upanissayo natthīti ñatvā parikammaṃ na kathesī’’ti. Cintesīti attano micchāparivitakkitena ayoniso ummujjanto cintesi.
「导出」:因其通达导出的性质,故以无差别的转用,称教法为“导出”。或者,教法中包含了应当证悟的出世间道,因此教法本身即是「导出」。接着说明:佛陀的功德不是仅凭宣称,而是通过实际成就来显示,例如随犯制立各类学处,如法随应度化众生的意向而无颠倒说法,对天人所提问题,依其意乐以恰当理由解答等。由此,世尊在一切处无碍运转的「一切知智」,便为智者所明了。同样,在各处显现双神变等时,「神通智」等也是如此。因此说:“还有我……”等。「随知」:即随顺着所领受的约定而认知、了知,所以称为“随知”。因此说“意思是随觉悟”。此处的“随约定而行”,即是指前面所说的“随犯制立各各学处”等方式。应当这样连接:如同依一切知智的连接方式那样,在每一个地方,都要以“即使这样的、名为我神通智的超人法”这样的句式来理解连接。显示巴利原文
Niyyānikattāvabodhanato abhedopacārena ‘‘desanādhammo niyyāniko’’ti vutto. Niyyāno vā ariyamaggo bodhetabbo etassa atthīti niyyāniko desanādhammo. Attani atthitaṃ dasseti kiccasiddhidassanena tattha tattha pākaṭīkatattā, na paṭiññāmattena. Tathā hi yathāparādhaṃ taṃtaṃsikkhāpadapaññattiyā yathādhammaṃ veneyyajjhāsayānurūpañca aviparītadhammadesanāya devamanussehi yathābhisaṅkhatapañhānaṃ tadajjhāsayānukūlaṃ ṭhānaso vissajjanena ca bhagavato sabbattha appaṭihatañāṇacārabhāvena sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ viññūnaṃ pākaṭaṃ, tathā tattha tattha yamakapāṭihāriyakaraṇādīsu iddhividhañāṇādīnīti. Tenāha ‘‘mayhañcā’’tiādi. Anveti yathāgahitasaṅketassa anugamanavasena eti jānātīti anvayo. Tenāha ‘‘anubujjhatīti attho’’ti. Saṅketānugamanañcettha ‘‘yathāparādhaṃ taṃtaṃsikkhāpadapaññattiyā’’tiādinā vuttanayameva. Evaṃ yojanā veditabbāti yathā sabbaññutaññāṇena yojanā katā, evaṃ ‘‘evarūpampi nāma mayhaṃ iddhividhañāṇasaṅkhātaṃ uttarimanussadhamma’’ntiādinā tattha tattha yojanā veditabbā.
「十力智」注释显示巴利原文
Dasabalañāṇavaṇṇanā
148 虽然从教导的顺序来看,因为一开始是依三神通而说,在说完他心通之后,按理应接着讲说更高的三神通;但从义理上说,三明实际上就是前面已说的三神通,因此这里才说「应说三明」。那么,为什么又说「如果说了这些,上面的十力智就不圆满」呢?难道这些智不像其余的神通那样,依据对各自所缘境的自证义,应当摄入神通之中;同时依据不可动摇义与支持义,又应当摄入力智之中,正如正念等也可摄入根、力、觉支、道支一样吗?不能如此理解。因为在那些场合,说法是为了显示诸法在种种作用上的差别;而在此处,说法则是为了彰显导师功德的殊胜,因此不能那样说,因为从义理上看并无不同。而且,某些凡夫或许会生起这样的念头:「世尊把前面说过的功德又重提一次,是不是为了显得功德更高一筹呢?」因此说得好:「上面的十力智就不圆满了。」显示巴利原文
148. Yadipi ādito abhiññāttayavasena desanāya āgatattā cetopariyañāṇānantaraṃ upari tisso abhiññā vattabbā siyunti vattabbaṃ siyā, atthato pana vijjāttayaṃ yathāvuttaabhiññāttayamevāti katvā ‘‘tisso vijjā vattabbā siyu’’nti vuttaṃ. Kasmā panettha ‘‘tāsu vuttāsu upari dasabalañāṇaṃ na paripūratī’’ti vuttaṃ, nanu imāni ñāṇāni sesābhiññā viya attano visayassa abhijānanaṭṭhaṃ upādāya abhiññāsu vattabbāni, akampiyaṭṭhaṃ pana upatthambhanaṭṭhañca upādāya balañāṇesu yathā sammāsatiādayo indriyabalabojjhaṅgamaggaṅgesūti? Nayidamevaṃ. Tattha hi dhammānaṃ dhammakiccavisesavibhāvanaparāya desanāya vuttaṃ, idha pana satthu guṇavisesavibhāvanaparāya desanāya tathā vattuṃ na sakkā atthato anaññattā, ekaccānaṃ puthujjanānaṃ evaṃ cittaṃ uppajjeyya ‘‘kimidaṃ bhagavā heṭṭhā vuttaguṇe punapi gaṇhanto guṇādhikadassanaṃ karotī’’ti. Tasmā suvuttametaṃ ‘‘upari dasabalañāṇaṃ na paripūratī’’ti.
为什么说「与其他人不共」呢?这些智不是也会在某些声闻弟子身上生起吗?的确,它们会生起,然而,像佛陀那样的处非处智等,是绝对不会在任何时候、于其他人身上生起的,所以才说「与其他人不共」。因此说「是如来之力」。正是着眼于上述这一特点,即在他处不具有,所以「不共功德」这一名称才惯用于知意乐随眠等智这一类上。当然,智力的智资粮是特殊的缘,但福德资粮也是这些力的缘;或者也可以说,因为智资粮本身也属于福德资粮,所以说「由福德积聚的成就而获得」。显示巴利原文
Aññehi asādhāraṇānīti kasmā vuttaṃ (a. ni. ṭī. 3.10.21), nanu cetāni sāvakānampi ekaccānaṃ uppajjantīti? Kāmaṃ uppajjanti, yādisāni pana buddhānaṃ ṭhānāṭṭhānañāṇādīni, na tādisāni tadaññesaṃ kadācipi uppajjantīti aññehi asādhāraṇānīti. Tenāha ‘‘tathāgatasseva balānī’’ti. Imameva hi yathāvuttalesaṃ apekkhitvā tadabhāvato āsayānusayañāṇādīsu eva asādhāraṇaguṇasamaññā niruḷhā. Kāmaṃ ñāṇabalānaṃ ñāṇasambhāro visesapaccayo, puññasambhāropi pana nesaṃ paccayo eva , ñāṇasambhārassapi vā puññasambhārabhāvato ‘‘puññussayasampattiyā āgatānī’’ti vuttaṃ.
所谓「自然象种」,指的是山行、水行、林行等行境不同、时分各异的象群,所有这些依力量而言,都称为自然象种。「十人之力」,是指十个中等体力之人的力量。拿来关联而说「一尊如来的身力」;至于说「一尊」,是因为在下文注释中出现的缘故,顺着说法的次第而说的。「那罗延那聚合力」:此处「那罗」指光线,众多且种种不同的光线由此而生起,因此称为「那罗延那」,即金刚。所以,「那罗延那聚合力」的意思就是金刚聚合力。然而,智力是在巴利经典中本来就有的,不像身力那样是依靠注释书才得以确立的——这是要表达的意思。在《分别论根本复注》中说:「在《相应部》里讲的是七十三智、七十七智。」可是,在该处的因缘品中,出现的却是七十七智和四十四智,而七十三智是见于《无碍解道》中的闻所成智等,并不在《相应部》中。其他种种智——包括在《智事分别》中依一种等方式所说的,以及在别处提到的「关于前际的智」等,还有在《梵网经》等经中所说「如来知道这些见处,如此被执取」等内容——全部包含在内。因为如实通达而自己成为不可动摇的人,又使拥有此智的圣者……显示巴利原文
Pakatihatthikulanti (saṃ. ni. 2.22) giricaranadīcaravanacarādippabhedā gocariyakālāvakanāmā sabbāpi balena pākatikā hatthijāti. Dasannaṃ purisānanti thāmamajjhimānaṃ dasannaṃ purisānaṃ. Ekassa tathāgatassa kāyabalanti ānetvā sambandho. Ekassāti ca tathā heṭṭhākathāyaṃ āgatattā desanāsotena vuttaṃ. Nārāyanasaṅghātabalanti ettha nārā vuccanti rasmiyo, tā bahū nānāvidhā ito uppajjantīti nārāyanaṃ, vajiraṃ, tasmā nārāyanasaṅghātabalanti vajirasaṅghātabalanti attho. Ñāṇabalaṃ pana pāḷiyaṃ āgatameva, na kāyabalaṃ viya aṭṭhakathāruḷhamevāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Saṃyuttake āgatāni tesattati ñāṇāni sattasattati ñāṇānī’’ti vuttaṃ (vibha. mūlaṭī. 760), tattha pana nidānavagge sattasattati āgatāni catucattārīsañca, tesattati pana paṭisambhidāmagge (paṭi. ma. 1.73 mātikā) sutamayādīni āgatāni dissanti, na saṃyuttake. Aññānipīti etena ñāṇavatthuvibhaṅge ekakādivasena vuttāni, aññattha ca ‘‘pubbante ñāṇa’’ntiādinā (dha. sa. 1076) brahmajālādīsu (dī. ni. 1.36) ca ‘‘tayidaṃ tathāgato pajānāti, imāni diṭṭhiṭṭhānāni evaṃ gahitānī’’tiādinā vuttāni anekāni ñāṇappabhedāni saṅgaṇhāti. Yāthāvapaṭivedhato sayañca akampiyaṃ puggalañca taṃsamaṅgiṃ neyyesu adhibalaṃ karotīti āha ‘‘akampiyaṭṭhena upatthambhanaṭṭhena cā’’ti.
「牛王位」即最殊胜处。过去诸佛因宣说拥有一切智,令大众趋赴,或八众前来亲近,故称「牛王」,此处即指过去诸佛。而此中所说,乃指佛位即一切智。所谓「虽立而不言」,意为:即使不言语,也如同屹立宣示一般。「前往」即是认可。显示巴利原文
Usabhassa idanti āsabhaṃ, (a. ni. ṭī. 2.4.8) seṭṭhaṃ ṭhānaṃ. Sabbaññutapaṭijānanavasena abhimukhaṃ gacchanti, aṭṭha vā parisā upasaṅkamantīti āsabhā, pubbabuddhā. Idaṃ panāti buddhānaṃ ṭhānaṃ sabbaññutameva vadati. Tiṭṭhamānovāti avadantopi (saṃ. ni. ṭī. 2.2.22) tiṭṭhamānova paṭijānāti nāmāti attho. Upagacchatīti anujānāti.
所谓「于八众中」,是依经中所说:「舍利弗,我确记得曾前往数百刹帝利众……乃至……舍利弗,我实不见任何我将生起恐惧或畏缩的迹象。」(《中部》1.151)即于此八种大众中,作无惧吼。也就是说,如后所示,与智相应,凭十力而作无怖畏之吼。此乃依《蕴品》中所说的《狮子吼经》而说。显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhasu parisāsūti ‘‘abhijānāmi kho panāhaṃ, sāriputta, anekasataṃ khattiyaparisaṃ…pe… tatra vata maṃ bhayaṃ vā sārajjaṃ vā okkamissatīti nimittametaṃ, sāriputta, na samanupassāmī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.151) vuttāsu aṭṭhasu parisāsu. Abhītanādaṃnadatīti parato dassitañāṇayogena dasabalohanti abhītanādaṃ nadati. Sīhanādasuttena khandhavagge (saṃ. ni. 3.78) āgatena.
依「天人之中有四轮转动」(《增支部》4.31)等余下经文,是为说明善士亲近等果报成就的现起,或是依止最初的善士亲近等,而后方有后后善士亲近等的成就现起。其中之「等」字,应知亦含摄「轮」字。「电轮」:形状如轮之雷电,即名电轮。于「胸轮等」中,「等」字表示「轮」字亦可用于指敕令的集合等。因于「我们将破僧,破轮」等语中,敕令被称为「轮」;而于「天轮、阿修罗轮」等语中,「轮」指集合。由于通达已达究竟,阿拉汉道智即为通达,故说「在果相生起时,名为通达」。由彼通达所得的说法智,其作用唯在令他人觉悟,故又说「在对憍陈如说法时……于果相中转起者,名为说法智」。从此以后,直至般涅槃,说法智的转起,当知即是已转法轮之安住,犹如转轮圣王已转动轮宝,其轮宝安住一般。显示巴利原文
‘‘Devamanussānaṃ catucakkaṃ vattatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.31) suttasesena sappurisūpassayādīnaṃ phalasampattipavatti, purimasappurisūpassayādiṃ upanissāya pacchimasappurisūpassayādīnaṃ sampattipavatti vā vuttāti ādi-saddena tattha ca cakka-saddassa gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Vicakkasaṇṭhānā asani eva asanivicakkaṃ. Uracakkādīsūti ādi-saddena āṇāsamūhādīsupi cakka-saddassa pavatti veditabbā. ‘‘Saṅghabhedaṃ karissāma cakkabheda’’ntiādīsu (pārā. 409; cūḷava. 343) hi āṇā ‘‘cakka’’nti vuttā, ‘‘devacakkaṃ asuracakka’’ntiādīsu (a. ni. ṭī. 2.4.8) samūhoti. Paṭivedhaniṭṭhattā arahattamaggañāṇaṃ paṭivedhoti ‘‘phalakkhaṇe uppannaṃ nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tena paṭiladdhassapi desanāñāṇassa kiccanipphatti parassa bujjhanamattena hotīti ‘‘aññātakoṇḍaññassa sotāpatti…pe… phalakkhaṇe pavattaṃ nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tato paraṃ pana yāva parinibbānā desanāñāṇappavatti tasseva pavattitassa dhammacakkassa ṭhānanti veditabbaṃ pavattitacakkassa cakkavattino cakkaratanassa ṭhānaṃ viya.
此处说“立”,难道是说像人站在地面上那样吗?并非此意,因此解释说:“这是由于依它而起的缘故。”此处的“住”,是指获取有身并维持其存续,而不是指停止流转、不再转趣,所以说道“既生起,又持续运作”。为了指出这十力智的详细内容是在何处开显的,便说“在阿毗达摩中”等等。其余各处,也依照此理来理解。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tiṭṭhatī’’ti vuttaṃ, kiṃ bhūmiyaṃ puriso viya? Noti āha ‘‘tadāyattavuttitāyā’’ti. Ṭhānanti cettha attalābho dharamānatā ca, na gatinivattīti āha ‘‘uppajjati ceva pavattati cā’’ti . Yattha panetaṃ dasabalañāṇaṃ vitthāritaṃ, taṃ dassento ‘‘abhidhamme panā’’tiādimāha. Sesesupi eseva nayo.
“所取”即是被执取的东西。而这些“所取”是执取之后所造作的,因此说“执取后所造作的业”。或者,“业”的本身就是“业之取”——这是为了表明“取”这个词并没有产生新的词义,就如“解脱”一词中的“去”字那样。“趣”指地狱等投生去处。“依”指有身。“时”指业成熟、堪能受报的时节。“加行”指作为引生果报之缘的现行造作。显示巴利原文
Samādiyantīti samādānāni, tāni pana samādiyitvā katāni hontīti āha ‘‘samādiyitvā katāna’’nti. Kammameva vā kammasamādānanti etena samādānasaddassa apubbatthābhāvaṃ dasseti muttagatasadde gatasaddassa viya. Gatīti nirayādigatiyo. Upadhīti attabhāvo. Kāloti kammassa vipaccanārahakālo. Payogoti vipākuppattiyā paccayabhūtā kiriyā.
“不行向”即不行向涅槃。因为世尊将会开示:“舍利弗,我彻知涅槃,也彻知通向涅槃的道,以及通向涅槃的修行之路。”(中部1.153)当众多人共同杀害一个有情时,虽然所有人的思心所,都以这一个有情的命根为对象,但他们各自所造的业却各不相同。其中,有人是出于恭敬、以强烈的主动性而行;有人是被他人逼迫说“你也来做”而行;另有人则是显得志趣相投,不加阻止、随顺而行。这些人当中,将有一人由于这个业而投生地狱,一人投生畜生道,一人投生鬼道。在他们造业的那一刹那,如来便已了知:“以此造作的模式,此人将投生地狱,此人将投生畜生道,此人将投生鬼道。”在正在地狱中投生时,如来也了知:“此人将投生在大地狱,此人将投生在近边地狱。”在畜生道中投生时,也了知:“此人将成为无足的,此人将成为两足的,此人将成为四足的,此人将成为多足的。”在鬼道中投生时,也了知:“此人将成为被烧渴所逼的,此人将成为常受饥渴的,此人将成为依他人施食而活的。”对于这些业,如来也了知:“此业将牵引。显示巴利原文
Agatigāmininti nibbānagāminiṃ. Vakkhati hi ‘‘nibbānañcāhaṃ, sāriputta, pajānāmi nibbānagāmiñca maggaṃ nibbānagāminiñca paṭipada’’nti (ma. ni. 1.153). Bahūsupi manussesu ekameva pāṇaṃ ghātentesu kāmaṃ sabbesaṃ cetanā tassevekassa jīvitindriyārammaṇā, taṃ pana kammaṃ tesaṃ nānākāraṃ. Tesu (vibha. aṭṭha. 811) hi eko ādarena chandajāto karoti, eko ‘‘ehi tvampi karohī’’ti parehi nippīḷito karoti, eko samānacchando viya hutvā appaṭibāhamāno vicarati. Tesu eko teneva kammena niraye nibbattati, eko tiracchānayoniyaṃ, eko pettivisaye. Taṃ tathāgato āyūhanakkhaṇe eva – ‘‘iminā nīhārena āyūhitattā esa niraye nibbattissati, esa tiracchānayoniyaṃ, esa pettivisaye’’ti jānāti. Niraye nibbattamānampi – ‘‘esa mahāniraye nibbattissati, esa ussadaniraye’’ti jānāti. Tiracchānayoniyaṃ nibbattamānampi – ‘‘esa apādako bhavissati, esa dvipādako, esa catuppado, esa bahuppado’’ti jānāti. Pettivisaye nibbattamānampi – ‘‘esa nijjhāmataṇhiko bhavissati, esa khuppipāsiko, esa paradattūpajīvī’’ti jānāti. Tesu ca kammesu – ‘‘idaṃ kammaṃ paṭisandhimākaḍḍhissati, idaṃ aññena dinnāya paṭisandhiyā upadhivepakkaṃ bhavissatī’’ti jānāti.
同样,当全村人共同布施团食时,纵然所有人的思皆以团食为所缘,但他们所造的业却各不相同。其中有人恭敬而作,其余如前所述。因此,他们中有人投生于天界,有人投生于人界。如来于他们造业的刹那即了知:‘依此造作方式,此人投生人界,彼人投生天界;于彼处,此人出生于刹帝利家,彼人出生于婆罗门家,此人出生于吠舍家,彼人出生于首陀罗家;此人投生他化自在天,彼人投生化乐天,此人投生兜率天,彼人投生夜摩天,此人投生三十三天,彼人投生四大王天,此人投生地居天。’对于各处的尊贵或卑下、身金色或貌丑陋、眷属多或少等种种差别,如来于造业刹那即完全了知。显示巴利原文
Tathā sakalagāmavāsikesu ekato piṇḍapātaṃ dadamānesu kāmaṃ sabbesampi cetanā piṇḍapātārammaṇāva, taṃ pana kammaṃ tesaṃ nānākāraṃ. Tesu hi eko ādarena karotīti sesaṃ purimasadisaṃ, tasmā tesu keci devaloke nibbattanti, keci manussaloke, taṃ tathāgato āyūhanakkhaṇeyeva jānāti – ‘‘iminā nīhārena āyūhitattā esa manussaloke nibbattissati, esa devaloke, tatthāpi esa khattiyakule, esa brāhmaṇakule, esa vessakule, esa suddakule, esa paranimmitavasavattīsu, esa nimmānaratīsu, esa tusitesu, esa yāmesu, esa tāvatiṃsesu, esa cātumahārājikesu, esa bhummadevesū’’tiādinā tattha tattha hīnapaṇītasuvaṇṇadubbaṇṇaappaparivāramahāparivāratādibhedaṃ taṃ taṃ visesaṃ āyūhanakkhaṇeyeva jānāti.
同样,当人们着手修习观时,如来即已了知:‘依此修行方式,此人将无法觉察任何法;此人唯能界定四大;此人唯停在把握色法;此人唯停在把握非色法;此人唯停在把握名色;此人唯停在把握缘;此人唯停在以诸行无常等相为所缘的观;此人唯证初果;此人证第二果;此人证第三果;此人证阿拉汉果。’对于那些正在做遍相预备行的人,如来亦了知:‘此人唯成预备行;此人得生取相;此人仅达安止定;此人将以禅那为足处,修观而证阿拉汉果。’因此,佛陀说:‘如来了知此人的思……等等。’显示巴利原文
Tathā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapentesuyeva – ‘‘iminā nīhārena esa kiñci sallakkhetuṃ na sakkhissati, esa mahābhūtamattameva vavatthapessati, esa rūpapariggaheyeva ṭhassati, esa arūpapariggaheyeva, esa nāmarūpapariggaheyeva , esa paccayapariggahe eva, esa lakkhaṇārammaṇikavipassanāya eva, esa paṭhamaphaleyeva, esa dutiyaphale eva, esa tatiyaphale eva, esa arahattaṃ pāpuṇissatī’’ti jānāti. Kasiṇaparikammaṃ karontesupi – ‘‘imassa parikammamattameva bhavissati, esa nimittaṃ uppādessati, esa appanaṃ eva pāpuṇissati, esa jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā arahattaṃ gaṇhissatī’’ti jānāti. Tenāha ‘‘imassa cetanā’’tiādi.
由可意欲、应被意欲及与欲相应故,欲即是界,故称欲界。以‘等’字,则包含嗔界、色界等。‘由相状各别’即本性各异。‘蕴、处、界世间’——如来如实了知种种界、各式各样的界,即蕴世间、处世间、界世间。如来如何了知?如来了知:‘此名色蕴……乃至……此名识蕴。其中,色蕴有单一分类乃至十一分类……受蕴有单一分类乃至多种分类……想蕴有单一分类乃至多种分类……行蕴有单一分类乃至多种分类……识蕴有单一分类乃至多种分类。’此为对蕴世间的了知。‘此名眼处……乃至……此名法处。其中,十种处属欲界范围,两种处通四地。’等等,此为对处世间的了知。‘此名眼界……乃至……此名意识界。其中,十六种界属欲界范围,两种界通四地。’等等,此为对界世间的了知。不仅于有执受的诸行世间如此,于无执受的诸行世间,如来亦如是了知:‘由此界增盛故,此树树干白色,彼树黑色;此树光滑,彼树有刺;此树树皮厚,彼树皮薄……’显示巴利原文
Kāmanato, kāmetabbato, kāmapaṭisaṃyuttato ca kāmo dhātu kāmadhātu. Ādi-saddena byāpādadhātu-rūpadhātu-ādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Vilakkhaṇatāyāti visadisasabhāvatāya. Khandhāyatanadhātulokanti anekadhātuṃ nānādhātuṃ khandhalokaṃ āyatanalokaṃ dhātulokaṃ yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti yojanā. ‘‘Ayaṃ rūpakkhandho nāma…pe… ayaṃ viññāṇakkhandho nāma. Tesupi ekavidhena rūpakkhandho, ekādasavidhena rūpakkhandho (vibha. 33). Ekavidhena vedanākkhandho, bahuvidhena vedanākkhandho (vibha. 34-61). Ekavidhena saññākkhandho, bahuvidhena saññākkhandho (vibha. 62-91). Ekavidhena saṅkhārakkhandho, bahuvidhena saṅkhārakkhandho (vibha. 92-120). Ekavidhena viññāṇakkhandho, bahuvidhena viññāṇakkhandho’’ti (vibha. 121-149) evaṃ tāva khandhalokassa, ‘‘idaṃ cakkhāyatanaṃ nāma…pe… idaṃ dhammāyatanaṃ nāma. Tattha dasāyatanā kāmāvacarā, dve cātubhūmakā’’tiādinā (vibha. 156-171) āyatanalokassa, ‘‘ayaṃ cakkhudhātu nāma…pe… ayaṃ manoviññāṇadhātu nāma, tattha soḷasa dhātuyo kāmāvacarā, dve cātubhūmakā’’tiādinā (vibha. 172-188) dhātulokassa anekasabhāvaṃ nānāsabhāvañca pajānāti. Na kevalaṃ upādinnakasaṅkhāralokasseva, atha kho anupādinnakasaṅkhāralokassapi – ‘‘imāya nāma dhātuyā ussannattā imassa rukkhassa khandho seto, imassa kāḷo, imassa maṭṭho, imassa sakaṇṭako, imassa bahalattaco, imassa tanuttaco, imassa pattaṃ vaṇṇasaṇṭhānādivasena evarūpaṃ, imassa pupphaṃ nīlaṃ pītaṃ lohitaṃ odātaṃ sugandhaṃ duggandhaṃ, imassa phalaṃ khuddakaṃ mahantaṃ dīghaṃ rassaṃ vaṭṭaṃ susaṇṭhānaṃ dussaṇṭhānaṃ mudukaṃ pharusaṃ sugandhaṃ duggandhaṃ madhuraṃ tittakaṃ kaṭukaṃ ambilaṃ kasāvaṃ, imassa kaṇṭako tikhiṇo kuṇṭho ujuko kuṭilo tambo kāḷo odāto hotī’’tiādinā pajānāti. Sabbaññubuddhādīnaṃ eva hi etaṃ balaṃ, na aññesaṃ.
「种种意乐」是指众生种种内心的倾向性。所谓「意乐」,即是意乐界、意乐的本性。虽然在经文中,仅就低劣与殊胜的共通性而列为两种,但实际上由于有低劣、殊胜等种种差别,故有多种类别,因此说「由低劣等种种意乐而有种种意乐性」。任何地方的众生,无论有何种意乐,他们便亲近、交往、侍奉与自己意乐相同的人,这是由于界类相应的缘故。譬如粪便等有其自界本性,只与粪便等相应和合;同样,具有低劣意乐的人只会与破戒者等相应和合,而戒等圆满的人只会与戒等圆满者相应和合。世尊如实了知众生的这种种意乐性。显示巴利原文
Nānādhimuttikatanti nānāajjhāsayataṃ. Adhimutti nāma ajjhāsayadhātu ajjhāsayasabhāvo. So pana hīnapaṇītatāsāmaññena pāḷiyaṃ dvidhāva vuttopi hīnapaṇītādibhedena anekavidhoti āha ‘‘hīnādīhi adhimuttīhi nānādhimuttikabhāva’’nti. Tattha tattha ye ye sattā yaṃyaṃadhimuttikā, te te taṃtadadhimuttike eva sevanti bhajanti payirupāsanti dhātusabhāgato. Yathā gūthādīnaṃ dhātusabhāvo eso, yaṃ gūthādīhi eva saṃsandanti samenti, evaṃ (puggalānaṃ ajjhāsayassevesa sabhāvo, yaṃ) (vibha. mūlaṭī. 813) hīnajjhāsayā dussīlādīhi eva saṃsandanti samenti, sampannasīlādayo ca sampannasīlādīheva. Taṃ nesaṃ nānādhimuttikataṃ bhagavā yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti.
「增长与衰退」是指由于条件的不同,从能力上来说,变得更为超胜或更为低劣。在《根上下智解说》中说“知藏、知随眠”,为什么在这里要开示知藏等呢?是为了通过知藏等,来阐明那些众生是凭借怎样的根器利钝而成为善藏、恶藏等,从而了知这些。而且,正因如此,就确立了根上下智与藏智、随眠智各自独特的不共性,也确立了根上下智与种种意乐智各自作为力的特性。其中,「藏」是指众生所栖住的地方,也就是他们的住处——即恶见,或者如实智。「随眠」是未被断除的、具有强盛力量的烦恼。然而,世尊在知众生的藏的时候,即使在那些众生的恶见、观智以及道智不活动的刹那时也能了知。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Vuddhiñca hāniñcāti paccayavisesena sāmatthiyato adhikataṃ anadhikatañca. Indriyaparopariyattañāṇaniddese (vibha. 814; paṭi. ma. 1.113) ‘‘āsayaṃ jānāti anusayaṃ jānātī’’ti āsayādijānanaṃ kasmā niddiṭṭhanti? Āsayajānanādinā yehi indriyehi paroparehi sattā kalyāṇapāpāsayādikā honti, tesaṃ jānanassa vibhāvanato. Evañca katvā indriyaparopariyattaāsayānusayañāṇānaṃ visuṃ asādhāraṇatā, indriyaparopariyattanānādhimuttikatāñāṇānaṃ visuṃ balatā ca siddhā hoti. Tattha āsayanti yattha sattā nivasanti, taṃ tesaṃ nivāsaṭṭhānaṃ diṭṭhigataṃ vā yathābhūtañāṇaṃ vā āsayo.Anusayo appahīnabhāvena thāmagato kileso. Taṃ pana bhagavā sattānaṃ āsayaṃ jānanto tesaṃ tesaṃ diṭṭhigatānaṃ, vipassanāmaggañāṇānañca appavattikkhaṇepi jānāti. Vuttaṃ hetaṃ –
世尊了知正在耽著于欲的人:‘此人以欲为重、有欲的倾向、有意乐于欲。’了知正在耽著于出离的人:‘此人以出离为重、有出离的倾向、有意乐于出离。’了知正在耽著于嗔、无嗔、惛眠、光明想的人:‘此人以惛眠为重、有惛眠的倾向、有意乐于惛眠。’显示巴利原文
‘‘Kāmaṃ sevantaṃyeva bhagavā jānāti ‘ayaṃ puggalo kāmagaruko kāmāsayo kāmādhimutto’ti. Kāmaṃ sevantaññeva jānāti ‘ayaṃ puggalo nekkhammagaruko nekkhammāsayo nekkhammādhimutto’ti. Nekkhammaṃ sevantaññeva jānāti. Byāpādaṃ, abyāpādaṃ, thinamiddhaṃ, ālokasaññaṃ sevantaṃyeva jānāti ‘ayaṃ puggalo thinamiddhagaruko thinamiddhāsayo thinamiddhādhimutto’ti’’ (paṭi. ma. 1.113).
「初禅等四种禅那」,是指色界禅那中的初禅等四种。它能烧尽对立的法,又能审察所缘,因此称为禅那。这是依四禅的判别方式而说的。「八解脱」之中,前七种解脱在入定与不入定的刹那,既能从对立诸法解脱出来,也能于所缘上胜解,故称解脱;第八种则因从一切想受中全然解脱,故称「离解脱」。在四禅分法与五禅分法中,初禅定称为「有寻有伺」;五禅分法中的第二禅定是「无寻唯伺」;在这两种分法中,更上的其余三禅定都是「无寻无伺」。就等至而言,依次前八种等至因有一心性存在,亦称为「定」与「等至」;灭尽等至则因没有那一心性,所以不称为「定」。
「退分法」是说,从尚未熟悉的初禅等出定之后,想与作意朝向欲界等。「胜分法」是说,从已经熟悉的初禅等出定之后,想与作意朝向第二禅等。因此,想与作意朝向欲界或朝向第二禅等的状态,被指明为退分法与胜分法;而这些禅那因具有如此性质,故以「法」字称呼。
「因此」一语,是以表示原因的方式回指前文所述之义。「清净」显示巴利原文
Paṭhamādīnaṃ catunnaṃ jhānānanti rūpāvacarānaṃ paṭhamādīnaṃ paccanīkajhāpanaṭṭhena ārammaṇūpanijjhānaṭṭhena ca jhānānaṃ. Catukkanayena hetaṃ vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhannaṃ vimokkhānanti ettha paṭipāṭiyā satta appitappitakkhaṇe paccanīkadhammehi vimuccanato ārammaṇe ca adhimuccanato vimokkhā nāma, aṭṭhamo pana sabbaso saññāvedayitehi vimuttattā apagamavimokkho nāma. Catukkanayapañcakanayesu paṭhamajhānasamādhi savitakkasavicāro nāma, pañcakanaye dutiyajjhānasamādhi avitakkavicāramatto, nayadvayepi upari tīsu jhānesu samādhi avitakkaavicāro, samāpattīsu paṭipāṭiyā aṭṭhannaṃ samādhītipi nāmaṃ, samāpattītipi cittekaggatāsabbhāvato, nirodhasamāpattiyā tadabhāvato na samādhīti nāmaṃ. Hānabhāgiyadhammanti appaguṇehi paṭhamajjhānādīhi vuṭṭhitassa saññāmanasikārānaṃ kāmādianupakkhandanaṃ. Visesabhāgiyadhammanti paguṇehi paṭhamajjhānādīhi vuṭṭhitassa saññāmanasikārānaṃ dutiyajjhānādipakkhandanaṃ. Iti saññāmanasikārānaṃ kāmādidutiyajjhānādipakkhandanāni hānabhāgiyavisesabhāgiyadhammāti dassitāni, tehi pana jhānānaṃ taṃsabhāvatā dhamma-saddena vuttā. Tasmāti vuttamevatthaṃ hetubhāvena paccāmasati. Vodānanti paguṇatāsaṅkhātaṃ vodānaṃ. Tañhi paṭhamajjhānādīhi vuṭṭhahitvā dutiyajjhānādiadhigamassa paccayattā ‘‘vuṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Ye (a. ni. ṭī. 3.10.21) pana ‘‘nirodhato phalasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhānanti pāḷi natthī’’ti vadanti, te ‘‘nirodhā vuṭṭhahantassa nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ phalasamāpattiyā anantarapaccayena paccayo’’ti imāya pāḷiyā (paṭṭhā. 1.1.417) paṭisedhetabbā. Yo samāpattilābhī samāno eva ‘‘na labhāmaha’’nti, kammaṭṭhānaṃ samānaṃ eva ‘‘na kammaṭṭhāna’’nti saññī hoti, so sampattiṃyeva samānaṃ ‘‘vipattī’’ti paccetīti veditabbo.
149 「结论」是指归纳、总摄。「不应那样看」,是说不能像外道所说的那样去看待。「只了知各自的作用」,是说它只了知各自分别的作用——比如了知处与非处等——唯作各自之事,意思是只通达各自的领域。「那也」,是说连那些也应被十力智所了知。「只了知业的差别与异熟的差别」,是说只了知业与异熟的种种差别,也就是取与思相应或不与思相应的、从地狱乃至导向涅槃之道等范围内的业,而仅说为「只了知业的划分」。在「界种种,以及界种种的因」等句中,「界种种的因」这一句应视为有部分省略。因为那种智也同样了知此二者,正如注释中以「由某界增盛」等方式所解释的那样。「只了知谛的划分」,是指仅以遍知、现观等方式来划分四圣谛。「不能入定」,是说不能像第八力、第九力那样入定,也不能像与其相似的如意通智那样显现神通变化。这是为了遮除将其视为与他力相似。或者说,不能像禅那等智那样入定和变化。虽然说到「观察禅那等的智为第七力」时,曾提及它具有有寻有伺的性质,但应显示巴利原文
149.Appananti nigamanaṃ. Na tathā daṭṭhabbanti yathā paravādinā vuttaṃ, tathā na daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sakasakakiccameva jānātīti ṭhānāṭṭhānajānanādiṃ sakaṃ sakaṃyeva kiccaṃ kātuṃ jānāti, yathāsakameva visayaṃ paṭivijjhatīti attho. Tampīti tehi dasabalañāṇehi jānitabbampi. Kammantaravipākantaramevāti kammantarassavipākantarameva jānāti, cetanācetanāsampayuttadhamme nirayādinibbānagāminipaṭipadābhūte kammanti gahetvā āha ‘‘kammaparicchedamevā’’ti. Dhātunānattañca dhātunānattakāraṇañca dhātunānattakāraṇanti ekadesasarūpekaseso daṭṭhabbo. Tañhi ñāṇaṃ tadubhayampi jānāti, ‘‘imāya nāma dhātuyā ussannattā’’tiādinā (vibha. aṭṭha. 812) tathā ceva saṃvaṇṇitaṃ. Saccaparicchedamevāti pariññābhisamayādivasena saccānaṃ paricchindanameva. Appetuṃ na sakkoti aṭṭhamanavamabalāni viya taṃsadisaṃ iddhividhañāṇaṃ viya vikubbituṃ. Etenassa balasadisatañca nivāreti. Jhānādiñāṇaṃ viya vā appetuṃ vikubbituñca. Yadipi hi ‘‘jhānādipaccavekkhaṇāñāṇaṃ sattamabala’’nti tassa savitakkasavicāratā vuttā, tathāpi ‘‘jhānādīhi vinā paccavekkhaṇā natthī’’ti jhānādisahagataṃ ñāṇaṃ tadantogadhaṃ katvā evaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Atha vā sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ jhānādikiccaṃ viya na sabbaṃ balakiccaṃ kātuṃ sakkotīti dassetuṃ ‘‘jhānaṃ hutvā appetuṃ na sakkoti iddhi hutvā vikubbituṃ na sakkotī’’ti vuttaṃ, na pana kassaci balassa jhānaiddhibhāvatoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evaṃ kiccavisesavasenapi dasabalañāṇasabbaññutaññāṇānaṃ visesaṃ dassetvā idāni vitakkattikabhūmantaravasenapi taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Paṭipāṭiyātiādito paṭṭhāya paṭipāṭiyā.
「做完逐词注释之后应当了知」,这是与上下文的关联。「烦恼障」是指决定性的邪见。烦恼障不存在,即是证得漏尽的「处」;烦恼障存在,即是「非处」。而对不能证得漏尽来说,此二者则依次成为非处与处。为了说明其中理由,故说:「世间正见……见故」。其中,安住于世间正见,便是证得漏尽之「处」,因为它是烦恼障不存在的因。世间正见存在时,烦恼障便不存在;世间正见不存在时,烦恼障便存在。因此,不安住于世间正见,自然就是「非处」性,这已不言自明。「对于他们这些应度的众生」,「因见到界的差别」,是指因见到欲界等界在转起上的分类差别。自从见到界的差别之后,也就了知了诸行的差别。或者说,「因见到界的差别」,是指因见到法界的差别,因为一切诸行都包含在法界之中。即使不刻意努力,也能了知,就如大官散提等人那样。「藉由天眼智的威神力而得」这句话中,诸声闻为了了知他人当下现起的心,会先以天眼观察对方心所依处的血液颜色,作为预备修习,而且这只是针对初学者而言。因此,藉由天眼智的威神力,他心智得以证得。显示巴利原文
Anupadavaṇṇanaṃ katvā veditabbānīti sambandho. Kilesāvaraṇaṃ niyatamicchādiṭṭhi, kilesāvaraṇassa abhāvo āsavakkhayādhigamassa ṭhānaṃ, tabbhāvo aṭṭhānaṃ, anadhigamassa pana tadubhayaṃ yathākkamaṃ aṭṭhānañca ṭhānañcāti tattha kāraṇaṃ dassento ‘‘lokiya…pe… dassanato cā’’ti āha. Tattha lokiyasammādiṭṭhiyā ṭhiti āsavakkhayādhigamassa ṭhānaṃ kilesāvaraṇābhāvassa kāraṇattā. Sā hi tasmiṃ sati na hoti, asati ca hoti. Etena tassā aṭṭhitiyā tassa aṭṭhānatā vuttā eva. Nesaṃ veneyyasattānaṃ. Dhātuvemattadassanatoti kāmadhātuādīnaṃ pavattibhedadassanato. Yadaggena dhātuvemattaṃ jānāti, tadaggena cariyāvisesampi jānāti. Dhātuvemattadassanatoti vā dhammadhātuvemattadassanato. Sabbāpi hi cariyā dhammadhātupariyāpannā evāti. Payogaṃ anādiyitvāpi santatimahāmattādīnaṃ (dha. pa. 142) viya. Dibbacakkhuñāṇānubhāvato pattabbenāti ettha dibbacakkhunā parassa hadayavatthusannissayalohitavaṇṇadassanamukhena tadā pavattamānacittajānanatthaṃ parikammakaraṇaṃ nāma sāvakānaṃ, tañca kho ādikammikānaṃ, yato dibbacakkhuānubhāvato cetopariyañāṇassa pattabbatā siyā, buddhānaṃ pana yadipi āsavakkhayañāṇādhigamato pageva dibbacakkhuñāṇādhigamo, tathāpi tathā parikammakaraṇaṃ natthi vijjāttayasiddhiyā sijjhanato. Sesābhiññāttaye cetopariyañāṇaṃ dibbacakkhuñāṇādhigamena pattanti ca vattabbataṃ labhatīti tathā vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“我将不再说这样的话”——当这样的心生起时,即称为舍断那些话。不过,由于那个意思要通过言语表达出来才明显,所以也说“正在说时”。“我将不执取邪见”,这是对执取邪见的遮止。因为不让邪见生起本身就是舍断,所以说“正在舍断时”。那个诽谤圣者的人,既已必定堕入地狱,他投生地狱便不会有任何障碍;这就是决定性的道理,也是此处所要表达的意义。显示巴利原文
Puna evarūpiṃ vācaṃ na vakkhāmīti cittaṃ uppādento taṃ vācaṃ pajahati nāma. Vācāya pana so attho pākaṭo hotīti ‘‘vadanto’’ti vuttaṃ. Diṭṭhiṃ na gaṇhissāmīti diṭṭhiggāhapaṭikkhepo. Diṭṭhiyā anuppādanaṃ pajahanamevāti āha ‘‘pajahanto’’ti. So ariyūpavādī niraye ṭhapitoyeva, nāssa nirayūpapattiyā koci vibandho ekaṃsiko ayamatthoti adhippāyo.
“其”指决定性如此。“学”指戒、定、慧,以及为成就这些而修的观。由于离开这些就不可能成就其他,所以在说了“应知世间和出世间的戒、定、慧”之后,又指出更切近的戒等,说“也可以仅就出世间的角度来遮止”。因此,应知这里是指最上道所含摄的戒等。因为证得最上道的人,于现法中决定性地成就了知;其他人则不一定。“具足”即成就,意思是圆满。因此,“如是具足”是指具有如此决不错谬的成果。所以又说“这个理由”等。“理由”在这里指道理。于此提取出这样一个道理:“诽谤圣者而堕地狱的人,正因为没有正确的执取,如同邪见者一般。”而且,这里用“不舍彼语”等文句来显示:如果不舍离那种执取,诽谤圣者就会成为障碍,带来无义;若能发露过失、请求原谅并舍断,就不会成为障碍,反而带来利益,犹如出罪与如法悔过一般。显示巴利原文
Assāti ekaṃsikabhāvassa. Sikkhāhi sīlasamādhipaññāhi, tadatthāya vipassanāya ca vinā aññārādhanassa asambhavato ‘‘lokiyalokuttarā sīlasamādhipaññā veditabbā’’ti vatvā puna āsannatare sīlādike dassento ‘‘lokuttaravaseneva vinivattetumpi vaṭṭatī’’ti āha, tasmā aggamaggapariyāpannā sīlādayo veditabbā. Aggamaggaṭṭhassa hi diṭṭheva dhamme ekaṃsikā aññārādhanā, itaresaṃ anekaṃsikāti. Sampajjanaṃ sampadā, nipphattīti attho, tasmā evaṃsampadanti evaṃavirajjhanakanipphattikanti vuttaṃ hoti. Tenāha ‘‘imampi kāraṇa’’ntiādi. Tattha kāraṇanti yutti. Tatrāyaṃ yuttiniddhāraṇā ‘‘nirayūpago ariyūpavādī tadādāyassa avijjamānato seyyathāpi micchādiṭṭhī’’ti. Ettha ca ‘‘taṃ vācaṃ appahāyā’’tiādivacanena tadādāyassa appahānena ca ariyūpavādo antarāyiko anatthāvaho ca, pahānena pana accayaṃ desetvā khamāpanena anantarāyiko atthāvaho ca yathā taṃ vuṭṭhitā desitā ca āpattīti dasseti.
四自信智的解释。显示巴利原文
Catuvesārajjañāṇavaṇṇanā
150 “无碍(visārada)”:由于痴迷与怖畏,寻求皈依即是执著,称为“有怖畏者(sārado)”;痴迷与怖畏即是怖畏。已离此怖畏者,为“无碍”;其状态即“无碍性(vesārajja)”。而此无碍,实为依止于智成就、断成就、说法殊胜成就与安隐成就而生起的四种省察智。因此说“于四处”等。“于所示诸法中”,即于所说诸法中。那仅是言说而已,并非现见,因为如此性质的事物并不存在。或者,依据他人转述的世尊所说“这些法是我未正觉的”等,而称为“所示诸法中”。此处“法”字,如同在“法无碍解”等中,是“因”的同义词,故说“与法俱者”即“与因俱者”。而“因”应知为令再生的因,并非造作者之因或令到达之因。“无量”即无譬喻。因为譬喻由随顺与遮遣而成为量,故称为“量”。“相”即招致呵责的因。其中,呵责者作呵责,此为因;依此而对其作呵责,此亦为因。故说“补特伽罗亦”等。“安稳”即因不被任何事物所障碍而无恼害的状态。显示巴利原文
150. Byāmohabhayavasena (a. ni. ṭī. 2.4.8) saraṇapariyesanaṃ sārajjanaṃ sārado, byāmohabhayaṃ, vigato sārado etassāti visārado, tassa bhāvo vesārajjaṃ. Taṃ pana ñāṇasampadaṃ pahānasampadaṃ desanāvisesasampadaṃ khemaṃ nissāya pavattaṃ catubbidhaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘catūsu ṭhānesū’’tiādi. Dassitadhammesūti vuttadhammesu. Vacanamattameva hi tesaṃ, na pana dassanaṃ tādisasseva dhammassa abhāvato. Bhagavatā eva vā ‘‘ime dhammā anabhisambuddhā’’ti parassa vacanavasena dassitadhammesu. ‘‘Dhammapaṭisambhidā’’tiādīsu (vibha. 718) viya dhamma-saddo hetupariyāyoti āha ‘‘sahadhammenāti sahetunā’’ti. Hetūti ca upapattisādhanahetu veditabbo, na kārako sampāpako ca. Appamāṇanti anidassanaṃ. Nidassanañhi anvayato byatirekato pamāṇaṅgatāya ‘‘pamāṇa’’nti vuccati. Nimittanti codanāya kāraṇaṃ. Tattha codako codanaṃ karotīti kāraṇaṃ, dhammo codanaṃ karoti etenāti kāraṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘puggalopī’’tiādi. Khemanti kenaci appaṭibandhiyabhāvena anupaddutataṃ.
「障碍法」:这些法中存在着障碍,或者它们本身即是障碍,因此称为障碍法。因为它们如此性质,实为能作障碍者,所以说“能作障碍,故名障碍法”。非故意的违犯,罪过并非那般严重,因此说“故意违犯者”。七犯聚等仅是举例;其余四种被称为障碍法的法,如果存在,同样也是如此,没有例外。但此处专指淫欲法,这是依据事由而说,如同阿利吒学处(《波逸提》417-422)。因为若在那时见到诸欲的过患而离染,则会获得殊胜,并非贪著于欲,所以说“淫欲……是障碍”。其中,“任何人”不仅指出家者,而是任何人。正如所说:“耽著淫欲者,确实忘失教法。”“于彼非导出法”,即对于他人所构想的非导出法相;这里的“于彼”是处格,表示相的意思。显示巴利原文
Antarāyo etesaṃ atthi, antarāyevā yuttāti antarāyikā. Evaṃbhūtā pana te yasmā antarāyakarā nāma honti, tasmā āha ‘‘antarāyaṃ karontīti antarāyikā’’ti. Asañcicca vītikkamo na tathā sāvajjoti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘sañcicca vītikkantā’’ti. Satta āpattikkhandhātiādi nidassanamattaṃ itaresampi catunnaṃ ‘‘antarāyikā’’ti vuttadhammānaṃ tabbhāve byabhicārābhāvato. Idha pana methunadhammo adhippetoti idaṃ aṭṭhuppattivasena vuttaṃ ariṭṭhasikkhāpadaṃ (pāci. 417-422) viya. Yasmā taṅkhaṇampi kāmesu (a. ni. ṭī. 2.4.8) ādīnavaṃ disvā viratto (a. ni. ṭī. 2.4.8) hoti ce, visesaṃ adhigacchati, na kāmesu āsatto, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘methunaṃ…pe… antarāyo hotī’’ti. Tattha yassa kassacīti na kevalaṃ pabbajitasseva, atha kho yassa kassaci. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘methunamanuyuttassa, mussatevāpi sāsana’’nti. Tasmiṃ aniyyānikadhammeti tasmiṃ parena parikappitaaniyyānikadhammanimittaṃ. Nimittatthe hi idaṃ kammasaṃyoge bhummaṃ.
八众的解释显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhaparisavaṇṇanā
151 为了显示无碍智的威力是在智者众中,所以说“为显示无碍智之力”。人的勇猛,要在战场上才显现,而非安坐家中之时;同样地,无碍智的威力,也需在智者众中才显示出来。“集会而坐之处”,是以处所为标志,实际上是指聚集的刹帝利众。其余各处也是同样的道理。为了说明通过类推所显示的意义,而说“魔身天众”等,因为类推是以相似所缘为范围。正如“刹帝利的集合即刹帝利众”这一意义可得,而“魔众”一词则不是这样,此处指的是“魔罗的部众即魔众”。所以说“魔身天众……非魔罗”。魔身天众,即属于魔一方者。“以见可怖处故”,即依见到可怖畏之处,意指大刹帝利依于自己福德力。“婆罗门于三吠陀中”,是为了显示其他种姓不具备这一领域而说。因为即使是诵习吠陀的刹帝利与吠舍,大多也不能审察其义。然而,为何此处未包括乐变化天等众?因为他们极度贪著于欲,缺乏如理作意。乐变化天等受用着极其微妙的欲乐,深深贪著,自然不生起想闻法的心;但是大菩萨与诸佛以威力摄受,他们有时也会在大法会中前来亲近、侍奉等。正因如此,《天宫事》的开示也大多不以他们为缘。这八种众是依于人而说的。显示巴利原文
151. Purisassa sūratarabhāvo nāma saṅgāme pākaṭo hoti, na gehe nisinnakāle, evaṃ vesārajjañāṇassa ānubhāvo paṇḍitaparisāsu yattha katthacīti dassento ‘‘vesārajjañāṇassa baladassanattha’’nti āha. Sannipatitvā nisinnaṭṭhānanti ṭhānasīsena sannipatitakhattiyaparisameva dasseti. Eseva nayo sabbatthāti atidesena āvibhāvitamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘mārakāyikāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ sadisatthavisayattā atidesassa. Yathā hi khattiyānaṃ samūho khattiyaparisāti ayamattho labbhati, na evaṃ ‘‘māraparisā’’ti ettha, mārassa parisāti pana māraparisāti ayamattho adhippeto. Tenāha ‘‘mārakāyikānaṃ…pe… na mārāna’’nti. Mārakāyikānanti mārapakkhiyānaṃ. Uggaṭṭhānadassanavasenāti sārajjitabbaṭṭhānadassanavasena, evaṃ uggā khattiyā attano puññatejenāti adhippāyo. Brāhmaṇā tīsu vedesūti idaṃ itaresaṃ avisayadassanavasena vuttaṃ. Vede sajjhāyantāpi hi khattiyā vessā ca tadatthavicāraṇāya yebhuyyena asamatthā evāti. Kasmā panettha yāmādiparisā na gahitāti? Bhusaṃ kāmābhigiddhatāya yonisomanasikāravirahato. Yāmādayo hi uḷāruḷāre kāme paṭisevantā tatthābhigiddhatāya dhammassavanāya sabhāvena cittampi na uppādenti, mahābodhisattānaṃ pana buddhānañca ānubhāvena ākaḍḍhiyamānā kadāci tesaṃ payirupāsanādīni karonti tādise mahāsamaye. Teneva hi vimānavatthudesanāpi tannimittā bahulā nāhosi. Manussānaṃ vasenāyaṃ katā.
问:「其他轮围世界中,人无殊胜证得,世尊是否亦去其他轮围世界?」对方为显示虽他们无圣法证得,但为随眠习气,世尊仍去彼处说法,而答:「他去。」臂环(Keyūra)为镶嵌种种宝石、编织金网之上臂装饰。手镯(Aṅgada)为以种种香薰制,或纯金所成之臂环。断声(chinnassarā)即分裂之声;怒吼声(gaggarassarā)即如喉音般发出粗涩之声。他方语言,指他们之语言。为展开「生起审察」之略说,而有「此为所说者」等说明。显示巴利原文
Paracakkavāḷesu ca manussānaṃ visesādhigamo natthīti pucchati ‘‘kiṃ pana bhagavā aññāni cakkavāḷānipi gacchatī’’ti. Itaro yadipi tesaṃ ariyadhammādhigamo natthi, vāsanāya pana tattha gantvā dhammaṃ desetīti dassento ‘‘āmagacchatī’’ti āha. Keyūraṃ nānāvidharatanaparisibbitasuvaṇṇajālavinaddhaṃ bhujābharaṇaṃ. Aṅgadaṃ nānāgandhagandhitaṃ, kevalaṃ vā suvaṇṇamayaṃ bāhuvalayaṃ. Chinnassarāti dvidhābhūtassarā (dī. ni. ṭī. 2.172) gaggarassarāti gaggarikāya viya gaggarāyamānakharassarā (dī. ni. ṭī. 2.172; a. ni. ṭī. 3.8.69). Bhāsantaranti tesaṃ bhāsaṃ (dī. ni. ṭī. 2.172; a. ni. ṭī. 3.8.69) sandhāyāha. ‘‘Vīmaṃsāuppajjatī’’ti saṅkhepato vuttaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘idaṃ vuttaṃ hotī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
"集会"(Saṅgamma)指聚集。"初说"(ālāpa)指初始之言;以相互言语、问答对谈而平等交谈,称为"等语"(sallāpa)。正确之说或共许之说,称为"共论"(saṃkathā);共论即是议论(sākacchā)。显示巴利原文
Saṅgammāti samāgantvā. Ādito lāpo ālāpo, vacanapaṭivacanavasena samaṃ lāpo sallāpo. Sammā, samaññā vā kathā saṃkathā, saṃkathāva sākacchā.
四种生的解释显示巴利原文
Catuyonivaṇṇanā
152 所谓「yoni」(生),是指那些众生虽不混杂,却因同一种类而显得像是混杂在一起,故称为「生」。从义理上说,它是依卵等出生处所而区分的、诸蕴部分转起的特殊方式,因此说「蕴的一部分,名为生」。其中,「卵生」是依初生而说的;若依第二生,则是指在卵中、或在卵破裂时出生,应这样理解。因此才说:「破壳而出」。「无有」是指没有这些卵等外部条件。「如跃出者」是指依生起的方式,如同跃出一般;或者说,正是由于不依赖外部条件,在化生中能完善化生者为化生,这里便称之为「化生」。句中的「等」字,统括了在粪秽处出生的莲华色大士童子等。那些被火焚毁的渴饿鬼,由于常受痛苦逼恼,没有欲乐的享受,所以他们不是胎生者;又因为其母体形同网状,胎无法在腹中安住,所以他们只是化生,也不可能以湿生的状态存在。「如地狱生者」,这是以举例的方式显示他们也是化生。「其余」是指除被火焚毁的渴饿鬼与地狱生者之外,其余堕入恶趣者。当夜叉属于四天王天而处于化生状态时,为了遮止此义,才说「夜叉也是如此」等。这是因为他们既不是地居天,也不是堕恶趣者。显示巴利原文
152. Yavanti tāya sattā amissitāpi samānajātitāya missitā viya hontīti yoni. Sā pana atthato aṇḍādiuppattiṭṭhānavisiṭṭho khandhānaṃ bhāgaso pavattivisesoti āha ‘‘khandhakoṭṭhāso yoni nāmā’’ti. Aṇḍe jātāti paṭhamāya jātiyā vasena vuttaṃ, dutiyāya pana aṇḍato, aṇḍe vā bhijjamāne jātāti evamattho veditabbo. Tenāha ‘‘abhinibbhijja jāyantī’’ti. Vināti etehi aṇḍādīhi bāhirapaccayehi vinā. Uppatitvā viyāti uppajjanavasena patitvā viya. Bāhirapaccayanirapekkhattāyeva vā upapatane sādhukārino upapātikā, te eva idha opapātikāti vuttā. Ādi-saddena gabbhamale nibbattamahāpadumakumārādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Nijjhāmataṇhikapetānaṃ niccaṃ dukkhāturatāya kāmasevanā natthi , tasmā te gabbhaseyyakā na honti, jālavantatāya na tāsaṃ kucchiyaṃ gabbho saṇṭhāti, tasmā te opapātikāyeva saṃsedajattāyapi asambhavato. Nerayikā viyāti nidassanāpadesena tesampi opapātikattaṃ dīpeti. Avasesāti nijjhāmataṇhikanerayike ṭhapetvā avasesā vinipātikā. Yakkhānaṃ cātumahārājikatāya opapātikabhāve eva āpanne taṃ nivattetuṃ ‘‘evaṃ yakkhāpī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathā hi te na bhummadevā na ca vinipātikāti.
五趣解释显示巴利原文
Pañcagativaṇṇanā
153 「Gantabbā」(应去)的意思是「应往生」(upapajjitabbā)。就如同「业有」(kammabhava),从究竟义上说,即使没有造作者,也依缘的聚合而成就,却被具有相续特征的有情说为「由他所做」;同样地,具有「往生有」(upapattibhava)特征的诸趣(gatiyo),从究竟义上说,即使没有去者,也依种种业力——若那些业属于谁,那些趣就被称为「应由他们去」。这样,从词义上显示了「趣」之后,为了再以提取义理的方式来显示它,便说「再说(apicā)」等。在那些地狱等分类的往生有中,「趣」(gati)这个词是通行的;但在其他地方也有「gati」这个词的使用,于是为了用一个「gati」字作出区别,而说「gati(趣)与gatī(归趣)」,正如说「苦之苦」「色之色」那样。由生起的状态而前往,由于亲近,故说为「往生趣」(nibbattigatī)。「Gati」指心之趣,因此说「名为意乐之趣」,意思是意乐的转起。而在其注释书中则说「趣」的含义是「成就」,因为这是《梵天邀请经》中的语句。「Juti」指神力。「Vibhava」指灭尽,因为是离去的意思,所以也是「趣」。因此说:「阿拉汉的趣即是无余涅槃,阿拉汉的趣是离去、是灭尽」,因为词根有多义。由此说「只有两种趣」,意思是只有两种成就,从而说「这名为成就趣」。显示巴利原文
153.Gantabbāti upapajjitabbā. Yathā hi kammabhavo paramatthato asatipi kārake paccayasāmaggiyā siddho taṃsamaṅginā santānalakkhaṇena sattena katoti voharīyati, tathā upapattibhavalakkhaṇā gatiyo paramatthato asatipi gamake taṃtaṃkammavasena yesaṃ tāni kammāni, tehi gantabbāti voharīyantīti. Evaṃ saddatthato gatiṃ dassetvā atthuddhāranayenapi taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yesu nirayādibhedesu upapattibhavesu gati-saddo nirūḷho, tato aññatthāpi gatisaddappavatti atthi, taṃ ekena gati-saddena visesetvā āha ‘‘gatigatī’’ti yathā ‘‘dukkhadukkhaṃ, (saṃ. ni. 4.327) rūparūpa’’nti (visuddhi. 2.449) ca. Uppādāvatthāya gamanaṃ upagamananti ‘‘nibbattigatī’’ti vuttā. Gatinti cittagatiṃ. Tenāha ‘‘ajjhāsayagati nāmā’’ti, ajjhāsayappavattīti attho. Tadaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.503) pana ‘‘gatinti nipphatti’’nti attho vutto. Brahmanimantanasutte (ma. ni. 1.503) hi ayaṃ pāḷīti. Jutinti ānubhāvaṃ. Vibhavoti vināso. So hi vigamoti atthena gati. Teneva nibbānaṃ arahato gatīti (pari. 339) anupādisesanibbānaṃ arahato gati vigamo vibhavoti anekatthattā dhātūnaṃ. Dveyeva gatiyoti dveva nipphattiyoti atthoti āha ‘‘ayaṃ nipphattigati nāmā’’ti.
令生起者,当其增长时便生起快乐,所以名为“ayo”(铁);而这里没有这种快乐,故为“niraya”(地狱)。由此,为了显示在那里没有可喜乐的、可享受的,而说“以无乐之义、无味之义,为地狱”。“横向延展”的意思是:不像天、人等那样向上而长,而是横向地增长。“显然离乐趣向死后状态”:到达这种死后状态者的境界,故称为“鬼生”(饿鬼界)。由于心的增盛,即由于具有念、勇健、梵行堪能等功德,依增上的心而具有显著的心质,故称为“人”。然而,从直截的意义上讲,应当依赡部洲的居民来理解。正如世尊所说:“比丘们,赡部洲人以三种特质超胜于郁单越人及三十三天。哪三种?勇敢、具念、于此修梵行。”但是因为形态相同等,连同小洲的居民,其他大洲的居民也同样被视为“人”。世间人则说:“因为是摩奴的后代,所以称为manussā(人)。”这是此处的略说,详细内容则应依《胜义灯·天宫事注释》中所说的方法来把握。“以诸神力”:即依称为天神力的种种神变殊胜。其中,欲界诸天依五欲功德及神变殊胜而游戏、闪耀、放光,其余诸天显示巴利原文
Yassa uppajjati, taṃ brūhento eva uppajjatīti ayo, sukhaṃ. Natthi ettha ayoti nirayo. Tato eva ramitabbaṃ assādetabbaṃ tattha natthīti dassento āha ‘‘niratiatthena nirassādaṭṭhena nirayo’’ti. Tiriyaṃ añcitāti devamanussādayo viya uddhaṃ dīghā ahutvā tiriyaṃ dīghābhi attho. Pakaṭṭhato sukhato ayanaṃ apagamo peccabhāvo, taṃ peccabhāvaṃ pattānaṃ visayoti petayonimeva vadati. Manaso ussannattāti satisūrabhāvabrahmacariyayogyatādiguṇavasena upacitamānasatāya ukkaṭṭhaguṇacittatāyāti atto. Ayaṃ panattho nippariyāyato jambudīpavāsīvasena veditabbo. Yathāha – ‘‘tīhi, bhikkhave, ṭhānehi jambudīpikā manussā uttarakuruke manusse adhiggaṇhanti deve ca tāvatiṃse. Katamehi tīhi? Sūrā satimanto idha brahmacariyavāso’’ti (a. ni. 9.21). Tehi pana samānarūpāditāya saddhiṃ parittadīpavāsīhi itaramahādīpavāsinopi manussāteva paññāyiṃsu. Lokiyā pana ‘‘manuno apaccabhāvena manussā’’ti vadanti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana paramatthadīpaniyaṃ vimānavatthusaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ (vi. va. aṭṭha. 3) vuttanayena gahetabbo. Ānubhāvehīti devānubhāvasaṅkhātehi iddhivisesehi. Tattha kāmā devā kāmaguṇehi ceva iddhivisesehi ca itare iddhiviseseheva dibbanti kīḷanti jotanti, saraṇanti vā gammanti, abhitthaviyantīti vā devāti.
在“畜生道”等之中:这里,以“畜生道”、“饿鬼界”等词来摄持时,实际上只是摄持诸蕴,因为并不存在一个被限定为它们固定场所的空间。或者,也可以依那些众生常住的森林、大海、山岳等处所来摄持空间。应被地狱生者等众生所寻求的道路,以及应修行的行道,因此都是指那样的种种业,故说“以二者”等。而“如已行道者”这句,是表示该业已造作、已积集的状态。应当知道,这里先以共通的方面说了地狱导向的道和地狱导向的行道,即指能导致地狱的业;然后又为了显示它依各个相续而落下的不共性,才说了“如已行道者”等。“堕落”的意思为:无力地,或以畸邪的形态陷落。若有人问:“在这里,世尊开示了辨别五趣的智慧之后,为什么又说‘涅槃也……’呢?”为答复此疑问,而说了“然而这里”等。因为世尊在显示自己是佛陀、是善觉者的时候,说法不会留下任何未说完的部分。显示巴利原文
Tiracchānayoniñcātiādīsūti ettha tiracchānayonipettivisayaggahaṇena khandhānaṃ eva gahaṇaṃ tesaṃ tādisassa paricchinnassa okāsassa abhāvato. Yattha vā te araññasamuddapabbatādike nibaddhavāsaṃ vasanti, tādisassa ṭhānassa vasena okāsopi gahetabbo. Nirayūpagādīhi sattehi maggitabbato maggo paṭipajjitabbā paṭipadā cāti taṃ taṃ kammameva vuttanti āha ‘‘ubhayenapī’’tiādi. Yathā ca paṭipannoti iminā tassa kammassa katūpacitākāramāha. Ettha ca nirayagāmiñca maggaṃ nirayagāminiñca paṭipadanti iminā sādhāraṇato nirayasaṃvattaniyaṃ kammaṃ vatvā puna taṃ taṃ santānapatitatāya asādhāraṇataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yathāpaṭipanno’’tiādi vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vinipatantīti vivasā, virūpaṃ vā nipatanti. Kasmā panettha pañcagatiparicchedakañāṇaṃ dassento bhagavā ‘‘nibbānañcāha’’ntiādimāhāti anuyogaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘idaṃ panā’’tiādi. Na hi bhagavā attano buddhasubuddhataṃ vibhāvento sāvasesaṃ katvā desanaṃ deseti.
智转起行相的解释显示巴利原文
Ñāṇapavattākāravaṇṇanā
154 “智之转起行相”:指智的生起方式,或者智的表现方式。“纯一苦”:指纯然的苦,彻底的苦。为了说明他们任何时候都是苦,连丝毫乐的感受都没有掺杂,所以又说“恒常苦”、“无间断的苦”。“深重”:指不轻微,意思是广大。或者“剧烈”:形容尖锐猛烈。“粗硬”:即粗糙。“辛辣”:即不可意。“挖掘”:意思是挖掘,所以称作“坑”;“积聚”:意思是积聚,所以称作“堆”。“抖散”:指用两手把火炭抛起,顺着风抖散,因此他们全身都被烧遍,所以称为“肢体被烧遍”。“人量”:指一个人的高度。“唯一条道”:指只有一条道路。“不能踏越的”:指无法跨过去、无法越过的。显示巴利原文
154.Ñāṇappavattākāranti ñāṇassa pavattiākāraṃ, ñāṇassa vā pavattipakāraṃ. Ekantadukkhāti ekantena dukkhā accantadukkhā. Tā pana sabbakālaṃ dukkhā sukhālayenapi asammissāti dassento āha ‘‘niccadukkhā nirantaradukkhā’’ti. Bahalāti atanukā, mahantāti attho . Tibbāti vā tikhiṇā. Kharāti kakkhaḷā. Kaṭukāti vā aniṭṭhā. Kassati khaṇīyatīti kāsu, āvāṭo. Kasīyati cīyatīti kāsu, rāsi. Phunantīti dvīhi hatthehi aṅgārāni ukkhipitvā paṭivātaṃ ophunanti, tena tesaṃ sakalasarīraṃ ḍayhati. Tenāha ‘‘paridaḍḍhagattā’’ti. Purisappamāṇaṃ porisaṃ. Ekapathenevāti ekamaggabhūteneva. Anukkamanīyenāti ukkamituṃ apakkamituṃ asakkuṇeyyena.
天眼智是以现前的颜色为所缘。或许有人会问:既然如此,它又如何能辨认出那个投生在地狱、形态不同的众生,并说“这就是他”呢?为了回应这一诘难,故说“虽然在那里”等。他依据“随业往生智”加以确认“这就是他”。而那是借由天眼的威能才得以达到的,因此说“这称为天眼力”。显示巴利原文
Nanu ca dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ paccuppannavaṇṇārammaṇaṃ, tena kathaṃ rūpantarasamaṅgiṃ niraye nibbattasattaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ so’’ti jānātīti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘tattha kiñcāpī’’tiādi. Yathākammūpagañāṇena ‘‘ayaṃ so’’ti sallakkheti, tassa pana dibbacakkhuānubhāvena pattabbattā ‘‘dibbacakkhubalaṃ nāma etanti vuttaṃ.
“依前分所说的方法”即如“畜生道应视如粪坑”等,在火坑譬喻中所说的那样。这些处所苦受居多,故称“苦多”。“叶枝繁密”指树叶茂密而不稀疏,叶片宽大而繁盛。为了显示那座具有广大乐受用的殿堂,说为“长殿堂”,因为方形等殿堂较为狭小。“羊毛织成的敷具”即用羊毛与丝线织成的铺敷物。“遮蔽上方的部分,故名上覆”即指天篷。而这里特指红色的天篷,所以说“以红色天篷”。显示巴利原文
Purimanayenevāti ‘‘gūthakūpo viya tiracchānayoni daṭṭhabbā’’tiādinā aṅgārakāsupamāyaṃ vuttanayeneva. Dukkhā vedanā bahulā etāsūti dukkhabahulā. Bahalapattapalāsoti aviraḷatanuvipulapaṇṇo. Sukhaparibhogaṃ mahāpāsādaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘dīghapāsādo’’ti vuttaṃ caturassapāsādādīnaṃ khuddakattā. Uṇṇāmayaattharaṇenāti uṇṇāmayalohitaattharaṇena. Uttaraṃ uparibhāgaṃ chādetīti uttaracchado, vitānaṃ. Taṃ pana lohitavitānaṃ idhādhippetanti ‘‘rattavitānenā’’ti vuttaṃ.
“后分的连接”指经文中“于后时”所说的那部分后文的衔接。然而,当前面部分已大致讲明之后,这部分便容易理解了,故说“如同那位”等。“已登道者”仅指刚进入道而已。显示巴利原文
Aparabhāgayojanāti pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘aparena samayenā’’ti vuttassa aparabhāgassa yojanā. Sā pana ekadesena purimabhāge vutte eva suviññeyyā hotīti ‘‘yathā so’’tiādimāha. Maggāruḷhamevāti maggaṃ upagatamattameva.
因无确定性故:意思是,「以天眼看见」并无确定。「也将以天眼见」——这并非因为无上乐受是天眼的行境而说,而是对于未来,乃藉由作为天眼助力的「未来分智」而见,因此是依因由的转借而宣说。然而在经文中,则直接说「以心彻知心」。为详细解释简要所说的「然而在意义上有所不同」此句,先举「天界之乐」等,且通过所举的譬喻,此义也同样明显,故说「即使在譬喻中」等。从「种姓智」生起,见到「灭」之后,由于省察已生起的道与果,进而进入果等至,圣弟子便如安卧于灭中一般,以其依止于此而转起,故说「卧于最殊胜的灭定之榻」。因此说:「见涅槃……」。显示巴利原文
Niyamābhāvāti ‘‘dibbacakkhunāva passatī’’ti niyamassa abhāvā. ‘‘Dibbacakkhunāpi passissatī’’ti idaṃ na anuttarasukhānubhavanassa dibbacakkhugocarattā vuttaṃ, anāgatassa pana tassa dibbacakkhuparibhaṇḍabhūtena anāgataṃsañāṇena dassanamevāti kāraṇūpacārena vuttaṃ. Pāḷiyaṃ pana ‘‘cetasā ceto paricca pajānāmi’’cceva vuttaṃ. ‘‘Atthato pana nānā hotī’’ti saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘devalokasukhaṃ hī’’tiādiṃ vatvā yathādassitaupamāhipi ayamattho pākaṭo evāti dassento ‘‘upamāyampī’’tiādimāha. Gotrabhuñāṇuppādato paṭṭhāya nirodhaṃ passitvā uppannamaggaphalapaccavekkhaṇavasena ceva parato phalasamāpattisamāpajjanavasena ca ariyasāvako nirodhe sayito viya hoti tadapassayeneva pavattanatoti āha ‘‘nirodhasayanavaragata’’nti. Tenāha ‘‘nibbānā…pe… passatī’’ti.
苦行等清净的解释显示巴利原文
Dukkarakārikādisuddhivaṇṇanā
155 因与「问连结」等三种连结不同,故说「依各别连结」。并非只是执持「由苦行而有清净」这一见解的人,为了显示他对苦行者怀有净信,故说「而且」等。「四肢蜷行者」:以两脚和两手四肢蜷曲行走者。「撒地者」:撒在地上的东西。「食物」:所吃的食物。显示巴利原文
155. Pucchānusandhiādianusandhittayato aññattā ‘‘pāṭiyekkaṃ anusandhivasenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Na kevalaṃ ‘‘dukkarakārikāya suddhi hotī’’ti evaṃladdhiko eva, atha kho dukkaracārīsu abhippasannoti dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Catukuṇḍikoti dvīhi pādehi hatthehīti catūhi aṅgehi kuṇḍanako āhiṇḍanako. Chamānikiṇṇanti bhūmiyaṃ khittaṃ. Bhakkhasanti āhāraṃ.
「梵行」:由远离悭吝垢等恶法,并增长慈等功德,为最胜清净之行,故称梵行,此处指布施。正如世尊所说,此为智者所施设。其余各处也应如此适当地抉择出梵行的同义语。「如何」:是什么样子。「行」:受持的戒行。「善行」:善行圆满的福德。「威德」:威力。「光耀」:衣服与装饰品的光彩辉映而闪耀的身光。「获得强力与精进」:兼具身力与精进。显示巴利原文
Macchariyamalādipāpadhammavigamanato mettādiguṇānubrūhanato ca brahmaṃ seṭṭhaṃ cariyanti brahmacariyaṃ, dānaṃ. Tathā hi taṃ bhagavatā paṇḍitapaññattaṃ vuttaṃ. Evaṃ sesesupi yathārahaṃ brahmacariyapariyāyo niddhāretvā vattabbo. Kinti kīdisaṃ. Vatanti samādinnavataṃ. Suciṇṇassāti suṭṭhu ciṇṇassa puññassa. Iddhīti ānubhāvo. Jutīti vatthābharaṇobhāsasamujjalā sarīrappabhā. Balavīriyūpapattīti kāyabalena ceva ussāhena ca samannāgamo.
「由此手能满愿」:因为过去曾向那些前来的旅人伸出手,为无上者指示布施场所,藉此福德,如今我的手就像如意树一般,能满一切愿,予取予求;在满愿的同时,更如流出蜜汁那样,施予令人喜爱之物。「由此我的梵行」:即是如前所述,我以身体侍奉之业,这种最殊胜的梵行。「福德」:指福德的果报。此果报因具可尊敬的性质,故称福德;又或如「如是此福德增长」等句中,省略了后面之词,故而得名。显示巴利原文
Tena pāṇi kāmadadoti tena addhikānaṃ upagacchantānaṃ hatthaṃ pasāretvā asayhaseṭṭhino dānaṭṭhānadassanamayena puññena idāni mayhaṃ hattho kapparukkho viya kāmadado icchiticchitadāyī, kāmadado honto ca madhussavo iṭṭhavatthuvissajjanako jāto. Tena me brahmacariyenāti tena mama yathāvuttakāyaveyyāvaṭiyakammasaṅkhātena seṭṭhacariyena. Puññanti puññaphalaṃ. Tampi hi pujjasabhāvato, uttarapadalopena vā ‘‘evamidaṃ puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.80) ‘‘puñña’’nti vuccati.
「五学处」:是将五条学处合在一处而说,如同说「三有」「三车」一样。「于梵行中」:是指在说法之中。因为这种说法能为所调伏者带来清净殊胜的境界,是最高尚的行持;或者因为这是梵天或世尊的语行,所以称为「梵行」。显示巴利原文
Pañca sikkhāpadāni samāhaṭāni pañcasikkhāpadaṃ yathā ‘‘tibhavaṃ, tisakaṭa’’nti ca. Brahmacariyasminti dhammadesanāya. Sā hi vineyyānaṃ brahmabhāvāvahanato brahmaṃ seṭṭhaṃ cariyaṃ, brahmuno vā bhagavato vācasikaṃ cariyanti ‘‘brahmacariya’’nti vuccati.
「千之舍离死亡者」:约有一千人,因证得阿拉汉而超越死亡的境界,成为弃舍死亡者。「我将成为梵行者」:在此处,他们是由于何种梵行而被称为梵行者的呢?在抉择出那种梵行后,说道:「离淫欲被称为梵行。」显示巴利原文
Sahassaṃ maccuhāyinanti sahassamattā arahattasamadhigamena maccuvisayātikkamena maccupahāyino jātā. Brahmacārī bhavissāmāti ettha yena brahmacariyena te brahmacārinoti vuccanti, taṃ brahmacariyaṃ niddhāretvā āha ‘‘methunavirati brahmacariyanti vuttā’’ti.
「不违越」:即不超越,即使在不可前往之处或其他方面,也不违犯。因此说:“除这些之外,我行梵行”。「我等」:即我们。显示巴利原文
Nātikkamāmāti na aticarāma agamanīyaṭṭhānepi itaratthāpi na vītikkamāma. Tenāha ‘‘aññatra tāhi brahmacariyaṃ carāmā’’ti. Amhanti amhākaṃ.
「以自我调伏之力」:即依所承诺,效仿阿拉汉而生起的调伏心之力,也就是调伏含意根在内的六根。由于达到最胜行的顶点,圣道便是「梵行」。「梵行」:清净即最上,依此而行,故称梵行,也就是导师的教法。显示巴利原文
Attadamanavasenāti yathāpaṭiññaṃ arahantānaṃ anukaraṇākārena pavattacittadamanavasena, manacchaṭṭhānaṃ indriyānaṃ damanenāti attho. Sikhāppattaseṭṭhacariyatāya ariyamaggo brahmacariyaṃ. Brahmaṃ seṭṭhaṃ carati etenāti brahmacariyaṃ, satthusāsanaṃ.
「不匆忙」:即不慌慌张张,观察教法的时机与场合。「仅期望就会成就」:即使是极难获得的果报,只要以正确的精进为条件,期望也必定会成就。「我已圆满梵行」:即已殊胜地完成,具备了殊胜的志向,圆满实现了崇高的心愿。他正是因为具备了最殊胜的意行,才以梵行的同义语被称说。显示巴利原文
Ataramānānanti na taramānānaṃ desakālaṃ udikkhantānaṃ. Phalāsāva samijjhatīti sudullabhaphalepi āsā sammāpayogamanvāya samijjhati eva. Vipakkabrahmacariyosmīti visesena nipphannapaṇītajjhāsayo paripuṇṇauḷāramanoratho. So hi seṭṭhamanosamācāratāya brahmacariyapariyāyena vutto.
「此即该经句出现之处」:意思是,在整个三藏佛语中,这句“精进即梵行”的经文所出现之处。这里将精进称为梵行,是因为在那个领域中,精进是最上、最极致的,同时也是成就那种修行的原因。「四支具足」:指通过完成四种难行之事,并具备四种行相,而称为四支具足。显示巴利原文
Idameva suttaṃ āgataṭṭhānanti adhippāyo tepiṭake buddhavacane idameva suttapadaṃ ‘‘vīriyaṃ brahmacariya’’nti āgataṭṭhānanti attho. Vīriyañhi tasmiṃ visaye uttamaṃ paramukkaṃsagataṃ tādisacariyāhetu cāti brahmacariyanti idha vuttaṃ. Caturaṅgasamannāgatanti catubbidhadukkarakiriyāya sādhakassa catubbidhassa attano pavattiākārassa vasena caturaṅgasamannāgataṃ.
或许有人想:穿着破碎布片,又没有缝制完整的衣服,岂非应当称为“裸形者”?为遣除这种说法,他说“裸形者”。他的意思是:“我如此行持,便不会对众生造成任何逼迫。”正如在乞食方面,为显示最严格的头陀行而说“我不接受被恭敬地端来的食物”等,此处也应理解为:他不因听到“来吧,尊者!”之类恭敬的话语便接受食物。「成为男人交会之处的」:指女人在靠近男人之处所给予的食物。「编集」:指众人依此聚集而做的事情,即村民等集体所为。此处特指为施食而作的集体准备,故说“于集众而作之饭食中”。「布施物」:他们凭此而行布施。间隔一日,即隔天供食,称为「间日食」。其余词句亦依此理而释。「以一日一次的规则」:即依照隔日进食的规定。为了进一步说明这正是依照前述的方式次第而行,故再次提及“间日食”等。由此,才说了“如是等类”这些话。显示巴利原文
Koci chinnabhinnapaṭapilotikadharo dasantayuttassa vatthassa abhāvato nicceloti vattabbataṃ labheyyāti taṃ nivattento āha ‘‘naggo’’ti. Evaṃ akāsiṃ, evampi sattapīḷā mā ahosīti adhippāyo. Yathā ‘‘abhihaṭaṃ na sādiyāmī’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.155) bhikkhāpariyesane ukkaṭṭhacāritādassanaṃ, evaṃ ‘‘naehi bhaddantikādibhāvopī’’ti gahetabbaṃ. Purisantaragatāyāti purisasamīpagatāya. Saṃkittīyanti etāyāti saṃkitti, gāmavāsiādīhi samudāyavasena kariyamānakiriyā. Idha pana bhattasaṃkitti adhippetāti āha ‘‘saṃkittetvā katabhattesū’’ti. Dadanti tāyāti datti. Ekāhaṃ antarabhūtaṃ etassa atthīti ekāhikaṃ. Esa nayo sesapadesupi. Ekāhavārenāti ekāhikavārena. ‘‘Ekāhika’’ntiādinā vuttavidhimeva paṭipāṭiyā pavattabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ puna vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘iti evarūpa’’ntiādi.
「枳草等」:指用枳草等编结而成的衣服及裹尸布,总之是下劣的衣服。「张线织成者」:指将纱线张拉织成的帐幔。「自然力的刺」:即如木签等刺。显示巴利原文
Erakatiṇādīni vāti erakatiṇādīni ganthitvā katanivāsanāni chavadussāni, nihīnadussānīti attho. Tantāvutānanti tantaṃ pasāretvā vītānaṃ. Pakatikaṇṭaketi salākakaṇṭake.
156 「多年积聚的」:指历经多年集合而生起的。然而前文刚说过“他致力于傍晚和夜半时分三次入水沐浴的勤行”,紧接着又说“身上积聚了许多年的尘垢”,这两件事在同一个人身上如何可能并存?因此回答说:“这是针对他最初受持那以尘垢修苦行的禁戒之时而说的。”由此可知,他声称“我是裸形者”这样一种对裸形身份的承诺,与“我穿麻衣”等有衣遮蔽的承诺,乃至其间穿麻衣、裹尸布等下劣衣的承诺,看似彼此矛盾,实则并无矛盾,应理解为他在各个不同时期,就是那样如实去行的。「他们」:指那些裸形者。「完全杀戮」:即杀尽一切,所以才说“杀戮”。他们认为根本不存在所谓的持戒者,因为他们持这样的见解:“即使并非故意造作,也同样属恶业。”「决意于戒」:这是针对他忏悔的行为而说的。显示巴利原文
156.Nekavassagaṇasañjātanti anekavassasamūhasañjātaṃ. Nanu ca idāneva ‘‘sāyatatiyakampi udakorohanānuyogamanuyutto’’ti vuttaṃ, ‘‘nekavassagaṇikaṃ rajojallaṃ kāye sannicita’’nti ca, tadubhayaṃ ekasmiṃ kathaṃ sambhavatīti āha ‘‘idaṃ attano rajojallakavatasamādānakālaṃ sandhāya vadatī’’ti. Eteneva ‘‘acelako homī’’ti vuttaacelakapaṭiññā, ‘‘sāṇānipi dhāremī’’tiādinā vuttachannakapaṭiññā, tatthāpi sāṇa-masāṇa-chavadussādi-nivattha-paṭiññā ca aviruddhāti daṭṭhabbā tasmiṃ tasmiṃ kāle tathā tathā paṭipannattā. Teti acelakā. Saṅghātanti sabbaso ghātaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘vadha’’nti. Sīlavā nāma natthi ‘‘anabhisandhikampi pāpaṃ hotī’’ti evaṃ laddhikattā. Sīlaṃ adhiṭṭhāyāti idaṃ paṭikkamanakiriyaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.
「为了摄受外道」:意思是为了审察外道之中哪些无有实质、哪些确有实质。「那出家」:指的是成为邪命外道的出家。「于畸异食物」:即畸异的、不寻常的食物。因此才说:“于非通常的食物”。显示巴利原文
Pāsaṇḍapariggahaṇatthāyāti pāsaṇḍesu asārasārabhāvavīmaṃsanatthāya. Taṃ pabbajjanti ājīvakapabbajjaṃ. Vikaṭabhojaneti vikatabhojane virūpabhojane. Tenāha ‘‘apakatibhojane’’ti.
157 「在恐怖的所作中」:此词兼具状态与行为完成的意义,故解释说:“在恐怖的所作中,即是指在恐怖的行动中”。本来应写成 'bhiṃsanakattasmiṃ'(在恐怖的行为者中),此处应视为省略了一个 'ta' 音。此外,“大多数”一词的理解,也应联系“多毛者”这类情形来运用,而不仅仅着眼于单根“毛”本身,所以才会有“或于大部分……”的说明。显示巴利原文
157.Bhiṃsanakatasminti bhāvasādhanabhāvī idaṃ padanti āha ‘‘bhiṃsanakatasmiṃ bhiṃsanakakiriyāyā’’ti. ‘‘Bhiṃsanakattasmi’’nti vattabbe ekassa ta-kārassa lopo daṭṭhabbo. Yebhuyyaggahaṇaṃ lomavantavasenapi yojetabbaṃ, na lomavasenāti āha ‘‘bahutarānaṃ vā’’tiādi.
在巴利语中,因音变规则,前缀“su”(善)中的“u”音变为“o”音,故圣典中写作“sotatto”。为阐明其义,说为“sutatto”(善热恼)。或者,“sotatto”也可解作“妥善地未被热恼”。对于“sosinno”(善干燥)一词,也依此同解。“为了清净住立”:指为寻求轮回中的清净。显示巴利原文
Su-sadde u-kārassa o-kāraṃ katvā pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘sotatto’’ti vuttanti tadatthaṃ vivaranto ‘‘sutatto’’ti āha. Suṭṭhu avatattoti vā sotatto. Sosinnoti etthāpi eseva nayo. Suddhivasanatthāyāti saṃsārasuddhigavesanatthāya.
“于精舍”:此词是表示处所的处格,故说:“精舍本身即以‘于精舍’这样的处格来表达。”“由此故”:即由于这种格的倒置。“此意义”:应知,这是由于性的倒置而有此意义。“遭苦者”:须与上文连接理解。“于一切处”:指于苦乐、得失等一切处。“如秤”:意为如秤一般平衡不偏。显示巴利原文
Vihārasminti paccatte bhummavacananti āha ‘‘vihāro eva hi ‘vihārasmi’nti vutto’’ti. Teneva cāti teneva vibhattivipallāsavasena. Evaṃ atthoti ayaṃ evaṃ liṅgavipallāsavasena attho veditabbo. Dukkhappattoti ānetvā sambandho. Sabbatthāti sukhadukkhe lābhālābhādike ca. Tulitoti tulāsadiso.
食事清净注释显示巴利原文
Āhārasuddhivaṇṇanā
158 158.“已清净”:指从轮回中得以清净。显示巴利原文
158.Sujjhitunti saṃsārato sujjhituṃ.
159 「八十节骨」:指八十节脊椎骨,也有人说“黑节骨”。是指节骨的中间部分。「凹凸不平」:肌肉干瘪时,两处关节之间的血管网络因风而肿胀,变得高高隆起,因此说“隆起”。「臀部」:指臀部的位置。「坐处」:用尘土或沙堆积而成的坐处。「以箭柄」:用箭的柄部,或说以箭柄为通道。「踏处」:踩踏过的地方。「类似酪浆团」:指类似酪浆团的东西,或是为摩擦身体而制作的粗石圆串,如同串起的食物。「从脊柱」:从背脊。「圆环」:墙脚顶上放置的圆环,用头顶住它。「肋骨并非如此」:正如前面所说的椽子那样倾斜叠放,菩萨的肋骨并非那样倾斜叠放安立。显示巴利原文
159.Āsītikapabbānīti āsītikapiṭṭhipabbāni, ‘‘kāḷapabbānī’’ti vadanti. Pabbānaṃ majjhe. Unnatunnatānīti maṃse milāte dvinnaṃ sandhīnaṃ antare vātenuddhumātadhamanījālatāya unnatāni unnatānīti. Ānisadanti ānisadaṭṭhānaṃ. Nisinnaṭṭhānanti paṃsūhi, vālikāhi vā nicitaṃ nisinnaṭṭhānaṃ. Sarapoṅkhenāti sarassa poṅkhappadesena, sarapoṅkhasaññitena vā maggena. Akkantanti akkantaṭṭhānaṃ. Takkagoḷikasadisānaṃ, sarīraghaṃsanatthaṃ kata kuruvindagoḷakānaṃ vā āvaḷi vaṭṭanāhāro. Vaṃsatoti piṭṭhivaṃsato. Maṇḍaleti bhittipādānaṃ matthake ṭhapitamaṇḍalake sīsaggena patiṭṭhahanti. Na evaṃ phāsuḷiyoti yathā yathā vuttagopānasiyo papatā tiṭṭhanti, na evaṃ bodhisattassa phāsukāpi papatā ṭhitā.
「凹陷」:指下陷,变得低下而显现。「如此样貌」:如前面所说的样貌,意指更加凹陷。「乃至贴着背脊」:指我的腹部皮肤一直贴到背脊,因为腹部皮肤触及背脊而固定住;这是由于胃中物完全耗尽,肠等极度干缩的缘故。「更沉重」:就是更重。这里将腹部皮肤与背脊相连、背脊与腹部皮肤相连结合起来理解。「绝不排出」:根本不排泄,因为依赖食物的水界完全干涸了。「腐根」:由于滋养毛根的肌肉和血液都已耗尽,那些毛根干枯,从原本的位置脱落,由于没有了,所以说“腐根”。因此说“而彼……”等。显示巴利原文
Okkhāyikāti avakkhāyikā, heṭṭhā hutvā ninnabhāvena paññāyamānā. Evarūpāti yathāvuttarūpā, ninnatarāti attho. Yāva piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṃallīnāhotīti mayhaṃ udaracchavi yāva piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṃ, tāva taṃ āhacca ṭhitattā allīnā hoti udariyassa parikkhayena antānañca suṭṭhumilātatāya. Bhāriyabhāriyāti garutarā. Sahaudaracchaviṃ piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṃ, sahapiṭṭhikaṇṭakaṃ udaracchavinti yojanā. Neva nikkhamati āhārasannissayaāpodhātuyā sabbaso visukkhattā. Pūtimūlānīti lomamūlānaṃ paribrūhanake maṃse lohite ca parikkhīṇe tāni sukkhāni ṭhānato bhaṭṭhāni abhāveneva ‘‘pūtimūlānī’’ti vuttāni. Tenāha ‘‘tassa panā’’tiādi.
「已证得」:指现已证得。以“如现在由观慧所证得”这句话显示:虽然诸大菩萨智慧成熟,为了自在掌握禅那与神通而修观的前方便,但他们在最后生中的修观方式,并非当时那样。「即此」:即由那个所说过的事理,在此文句中恰好适用,因为前后文没有矛盾。「否则」:如果依照比丘们所说的方式,就可能不相应了,因为这里所说的“此”是不同的。显示巴利原文
Adhigatāti idāni adhigatā. Yathā etarahi vipassanāpaññāya adhigatattāti iminā kiñcāpi mahābodhisattā paripākagatañāṇā vasībhūtajjhānābhiññā vipassanāya parikammaṃ karonti, yathā ca nesaṃ carimabhave vipassanācāro, na tathā tadāti dasseti. Etadevāti yaṃ yena vuttaṃ atthajātaṃ, etadeva ettha etasmiṃ pāṭhapadese yuttaṃ pubbenāparaṃ avirujjhanato. Itarathāti bhikkhūhi vuttappakārena ananurūpo siyā ‘‘imissā’’ti vuttāya aññatte.
关于轮回清净等的注释显示巴利原文
Saṃsārasuddhiādivaṇṇanā
160 “轮回”:指在诸有中,不断地死去又再生,如此流转。对此,曾这样说:显示巴利原文
160.Saṃsārenāti aparāparaṃ cavanupapajjanavasena bhavesu saṃsaraṇena. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ –
“诸蕴的次第,以及界与处;
它们持续不断地进行着,因此称为‘轮回’。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Khandhānañca paṭipāṭi, dhātuāyatanāna ca; Abbocchinnaṃ vattamānā, saṃsāroti pavuccatī’’ti. (visuddhi. 2.619; dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.95; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.2.60; a. ni. aṭṭha. 2.4.199; dha. sa. aṭṭha. nidānakathā; vibha. aṭṭha. 226; su. ni. aṭṭha. 2.523; udā. aṭṭha. 39; itivu. aṭṭha. 14, 58; theragā. aṭṭha. 1.67, 99; bu. vaṃ. aṭṭha. 58; cūḷani. aṭṭha. 6; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.1.117; visuddhi. mahāṭī. 1.127; a. ni. ṭī. 2.4.9; sārattha. ṭī. 1.1);
「Bahukaṃ」指长时间、多次地。「Upapajjitvā」指在处处诸有中结生之后。「Āvāsena」指在种种有情居处的居住,即结生之后的生活。此处说为「蕴」,是因为以种种同义语宣说了彼蕴流转方式的差别。「Bahuyāge」指在羊、猪、牛、豺狼等多种大祭祀中。「Bahuaggī」指通过语祭等,乃至熟食祭等,侍奉众多的火。显示巴利原文
Bahukanti bahukālaṃ bahukkhattuṃ. Upapajjitvāti tattha tattha bhave nibbattitvā. Āvāsenāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ sattāvāse āvasanena nibbattitvā jīvanena. Khandhāyeva vuttā tesaṃyeva pavattivisesassa tena tena pariyāyena vuttattā. Bahuyāgeti ajasūkaragomāyvādike bahuvidhe mahāyaññe. Bahuaggīti vācāpeyyādivasena antamaso pākayaññādivasena ca bahukepi aggī paricaraṇena.
161 「青年」:由于连幼儿也被称为“年轻”,所以为了区别而说“青年”。超过初龄的众生自然会是头发花白的,为了显示处在初龄的状态,所以说“有极黑的头发”。「Jarājiṇṇa」指因衰老而衰坏,并不是被非时的老所制伏。因已达极度的成熟而称为「长老」。因此说“已成长而安住肢节”,意思是在身高和体围方面已没有增长。「Jātimahallaka」指生来即是年长者,并非因为财富、眷属等而年长。「Addhagata」:这里的“addha”一词是长时间的意思,所以解释为“经历了许多长时”。这是省略了“龄”等词的说法,所以说“后龄”。能于百句乃至千句,即当它进入耳门时,便能领会、把握。这是慧的作用,因为只是领受。所谓“彼”,即百句与千句。依持是以不散落的方式持于心。系缚是为了不致忘失,而一再地加以系缚。这则是念的作用,可以了知。经文中又说“以极度的慧、念与精进”,后面又说“如是增上慧行者”。“堪能精进名为策励”,为了显示殊胜的所缘而说明它结合了前述的念。“彼”是指由于如前所述的慧、念、策励,对善巧于诸界与词显示巴利原文
161. Bāladārakopi ‘‘daharo’’ti vuccatīti tato visesanatthaṃ ‘‘yuvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Atikkantapaṭhamavayā sattā sabhāvena palitasirā hontīti paṭhamavaye ṭhitabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘susukāḷakeso’’ti vuttaṃ. Jarājiṇṇoti jarāya jiṇṇo, na akālikena jarāya abhibhūto. Ukkaṃsagatabuddhatāya vuddho. Tenāha ‘‘vaḍḍhitvā ṭhitaaṅgapaccaṅgo’’ti, ārohapariṇāhavasena vuddhirahitoti attho. Jātimahallakoti jātiyā mahallako, na bhogaparivārādīhīti attho. Addhagatoti ettha addha-saddo dīghakālavācīti āha ‘‘bahuaddhānaṃ gato’’ti. Vayotiādipadalopenāyaṃ niddesoti āha ‘‘pacchimavaya’’nti. Padasatampi…pe… samatthatāti padasatampi padasahassampi sotapathamāgacchantameva uggahaṇasamatthatā pariggahetuṃ samatthatā. Ayañca gatiyā byāpāroti sakkā viññātuṃ gahaṇamattabhāvato. Tadevāti padasatampi padasahassampi. Ādhāraṇaṃ apilāpanavasena hadaye dhāraṇaṃ. Upanibandhanaṃ yathā na pamuṭṭhaṃ hoti, tathā upecca aparāparaṃ nibandhanaṃ. Ayaṃ pana satiyā byāpāroti sakkā viññātuṃ. Pāḷiyañca ‘‘paramāya gatiyā ca satiyā ca dhitiyā cā’’ti vuttaṃ, parato ca ‘‘evaṃ adhimattagatimanto’’ti vuttaṃ. Samatthavīriyaṃ dhiti nāmāti visiṭṭhavisayaṃ dassento yathāvuttasatisamāyogaṃ tassa dīpeti. Tassāti yathāvuttagatisatidhitīhi subhadhātavacīparicitassa pariyattidhammassa āgamavasena atthadassanasamatthatā yuttivasena kāraṇadassanasamatthatā.
「Daḷhadhanvā」指持有坚固弓的人,他在这里被称为「有坚法者」。「持弓者」是为了击破敌人而持弓,他正是射箭者,即把箭射出,所以说“持弓而立的射箭者”。能承载两千巴力的铁等重荷,名为「两千力」。因此说“名为两千力的弓”等。「弓臂」指弓身。「箭许」指从长度上与箭等长的那段弓臂,一旦抬起,弓弦便被装上,而且那重荷从地面解脱,如此应知这是「名为两千力的弓」。「学得技艺」指学成了弓术。「熟练手」指于诸目标极为坚定而不失误的射艺。如是于其中自在者名为熟练手,所以说「已熟习自在状态」。因于王宫等处近侍而坐而名为「近侍而坐者」,故说「于王宫等处已示现技艺者」。「如是所作」指如实以内腔中空等方式,做成轻便的。显示巴利原文
Daḷhaṃ (a. ni. ṭī. 3.9.38) thiraṃ dhanu etassāti daḷhadhanvā, so eva idha ‘‘daḷhadhammā’’ti vutto. Paṭisattuvidhamanatthaṃ dhanuṃ gaṇhātīti dhanuggaho, so eva usuṃ saraṃ asati khipatīti issāsoti āha ‘‘dhanuṃ gahetvā ṭhito issāso’’ti. Dvisahassapalaṃ lohādibhāraṃ vahituṃ samatthaṃ dvisahassathāmaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘dvisahassathāmaṃ nāmā’’tiādi. Daṇḍeti dhanudaṇḍe. Yāva kaṇḍappamāṇāti dīghato yattakaṃ kaṇḍassa pamāṇaṃ, tattake dhanudaṇḍe ukkhittamatte āropito ceva hoti jiyādaṇḍo, so ca bhāro pathavito muccati, evaṃ idaṃ ‘‘dvisahassathāmaṃ nāma dhanūti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Uggahitasippoti uggahitadhanusippo. Katahatthoti thirataraṃ lakkhesu avirajjhanasarakkhepo. Īdiso pana tattha vasībhūto katahattho nāma hotīti āha ‘‘ciṇṇavasībhāvo’’ti. Kataṃ rājakulādīsu upecca asanaṃ etena so katūpāsanoti āha ‘‘rājakulādīsu dassitasippo’’ti. Evaṃ katanti evaṃ antosusirakaraṇādinā sallahukaṃ kataṃ.
“Oloketi”意为注视。虽然如此,他们的提问次序依然可被了知:智者们能由微细的间隔,分辨出这些比丘中“此位先问,此位第二”等的发问顺序。然而,诸佛的顺序,在此类场合中唯有诸佛自己能知,他人无法了知。如今,为了适当说明这种了知的情形,便说“一拃四指影”等语。因为在一弹指的刹那,便有百千万亿心识生起,所以先说“在影超过一拃四指之前,世尊……便说”,随后为显示世尊说法更为神速,又说“暂且安住这些”等。现在为说明其中缘由,而说“为何”等。讲说十六句,正是为了显示:在凡夫人说一句的刹那,世尊已说一千六百句。现在为说明这一缘由,又说“为何”等。显示巴利原文
Oloketīti udikkhati. Evaṃ santepi tesaṃ vāro paññāyatīti tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ paṭhamaṃ pucchati, ayaṃ dutiya’’ntiādinā pucchanavāro tādisassa paññavato paññāyati sukhumassa antarassa labbhanato. Buddhānaṃ pana vāroti īdise ṭhāne buddhānaṃ desanāvāro aññesaṃ napaññāyanato buddhānaṃyeva paññāyati. Idāni tameva paññāyanataṃ yuttito dassento ‘‘vidatthicaturaṅgulachāya’’ntiādimāha. Accharāsaṅghāṭamatte khaṇe aneka-koṭisahassa-cittapavattisambhavato ‘‘vidatthicaturaṅgulachāyaṃ atikkamanato puretaraṃyeva bhagavā…pe… kathetī’’ti vatvā tato lahutarāpi satthu desanāpavatti atthevāti dassento ‘‘tiṭṭhantu vā tāva ete’’tiādimāha. Idāni tattha kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Soḷasa padāni kathetīti etena lokiyajanassa ekapaduccāraṇakkhaṇe bhagavā aṭṭhavīsasatapadāni kathetīti dasseti. Idāni tassapi kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
“法”指圣典。由它而通达义,故为“句”,即句所诠的义。“文”是能显义的字母。因为当圣典被依词、句、字母等分析时,便能标明并开显种种义。因此说,“法句文”即圣典中的句与文,是能显明彼彼义的字母。以此显示:如来以相续不断的句与文说法,纵经极长时劫,也绝无穷尽。“问答”是依此而解答问题,即如是生起的辩才。诸佛世尊确实有无尽的辩才,故说“说法无有退减”。因此说“以此显示什么”等。如是,即使在临近般涅槃时,世尊的说法也与平时无二无别。所以说,初佛语、中佛语、后佛语皆悉相同。从八十岁开始为第五个寿量段。显示巴利原文
Dhammoti pāḷi. Pajjati attho etenāti padaṃ, tadattho. Atthaṃ byañjetīti byañjanaṃ, akkharaṃ. Tañhi padavākyakkharabhāvehi paricchijjamānaṃ taṃ taṃ atthaṃ byañjeti pakāseti. Tenāha ‘‘dhammapadabyañjananti pāḷiyā padabyañjanaṃ, tassa tassa atthassa byañjanakaṃ akkhara’’nti. Etena aparāparehi padabyañjanehi sucirampi kālaṃ kathentassa tathāgatassa na kadāci tesaṃ pariyādānaṃ atthīti dasseti. Pañhaṃ byākaronti etenāti pañhabyākaraṇaṃ, tathāpavattapaṭibhānaṃ. Aparikkhayapaṭibhānā hi buddhā bhagavanto, yato vuttaṃ ‘‘natthi dhammadesanāya hānī’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 3.141, 305; vibha. mūlaṭī. 1.suttantabhājanīyavaṇṇanā). Tenāha ‘‘iminā kiṃ dassetī’’tiādi. Tathā āsannaparinibbānassapi bhagavato desanāya itarāya ca visesātāvoti paṭhamabuddhavacanampi majjhimabuddhavacanampi pacchimabuddhavacanampi sadisameva. Āsītikavassato paraṃ pañcamo āyukoṭṭhāso.
162 在此,世尊虽借由宣说那伽娑摩罗长老的稀有、未曾有事,表明了自己身毛竖立的情形,故得名“身毛竖立篇章”;然而,由于此经是以显示一切知智等不共之智的威力等十六种方式,发出狮子吼而敷演的,因此应理解为:结集的大长老们将其定名为“大狮子吼”。显示巴利原文
162. Kāmañcettha bhagavatā nāgasamālattherassa acchariyaabbhutapavedanamukhena attano lomānaṃ haṭṭhabhāvassa paveditattā ‘‘lomahaṃsanapariyāyo’’ti nāmaṃ gahitaṃ, tathāpi sabbaññutaññāṇādi-anaññasādhāraṇañāṇānubhāva-vibhāvanādivasena soḷasasamūhato sīhanādassa nadanena desanāya pavattitattā ‘‘mahāsīhanādo’’tveva saṅgītikāramahātherehi nāmaṃ ṭhapitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
3. 《大苦蕴经》注释显示巴利原文
3. Mahādukkhakkhandhasuttavaṇṇanā
163 “从此以后(tatoparaṃ)”:因为在三人之上,僧团依四众所作等羯磨,成为应别住者。“去了村庄(gāmaṃ gato)”是指以村庄为目的地的出离,因此被称为“去了村庄”。同样地,为进入舍卫城而从寺院出发者,被称为“进入了”。“遍知(pariññaṃ)”是指断遍知,唯有此才是超越,而非其他遍知。于色、受等中也是如此。虽然一切外道皆无能安立遍知欲等之因缘,但凡自以为有者,便依这些被称为“知自宗义者”。他们即是那些人,纵使不能依“比丘远离诸欲……进入并安住于初禅,此即遍知于欲”而具体说明初禅,却仅以“永断”之想,于说示初禅时安立了遍知欲。何以故?因他们没有那样的教法及证得。于色遍知、受遍知亦然。“vuccetha”意为可能会被说。第二句亦同,乃是在“教诫或应教诫”之语中。据说那些比丘……显示巴利原文
163.Tatoparanti tiṇṇaṃ janānaṃ upari saṅgho catuvaggakaraṇīyādikammehi paṭikammappattattā. Gāmaṃ gatoti vuccati gāmaṃ uddissa gatattā, evaṃ sāvatthiṃ pavisituṃ vihārato nikkhantā ‘‘pavisiṃsū’’ti vuttā. Pariññanti pahānapariññaṃ. Sā hi samatikkamo, na itarā. Rūpavedanāsupīti ‘‘rūpānaṃ pariññaṃ, vedanānaṃ pariñña’’nti etthāpi. Kāmaṃ sabbesaṃ titthiyānaṃ kāmādipariññāpaññāpanahetubhūto samayo natthi, yesaṃ pana atthi, te upādāya ‘‘sakasamayaṃ jānantā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Yato yato kho bho ayaṃ bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi…pe… paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati, ettāvatā kho bho kāmānaṃ pariññā hotī’’ti evaṃ sarūpato paṭhamajjhānaṃ vibhāvetuṃ asakkontāpi kevalaṃ accantappahānasaññāya kāmānaṃ pariññaṃ paññapeyyuṃ paṭhamajjhānaṃ vadamānā. Taṃ kissa hetu? Tādisassa āgamādhigamassābhāvato. Rūpavedanāpariññāsupi eseva nayo. Vuccethāti vucceyya. Dutiyapadepīti ‘‘anusāsaniyā vā anusāsani’’nti evaṃ vuttavākyepi. Te kira bhikkhū.
165 “不会正确地领会(naceva sampāyissantīti)”:意即不能正确地、完全地以种种方式引导与令知。因此他说:“即便圆满通达之后,也不能说法。”因为所问的问题不在他们的范畴内,所以会“陷入困扰”,这是理趣。“含天神的(sadevaka)”:这里是指取无色界天而言,因为这些天在世间诸天中,以长寿等而最为殊胜。“含天魔的(samāraka)”:是指取欲界天而言。“含梵天的(sabrahmaka)”:是指取色界梵天而言。“含沙门与婆罗门的世间(sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiyā)”:在此,以“沙门”的取义来涵括出家者,以“婆罗门”的取义来涵括种姓上的婆罗门,再以“诸天”的取义来涵括假名之天,以“人”的取义来涵括其余的人界。此外,以“世间世代”的取义,注释书中已有说明其意趣。“别的称心是无从谈起的(aññathā ārādhanaṃ nāma natthi)”:这句话指出,正是如此,对外道而言,如实现见欲、色、受中的乐味、过患等是根本不存在的,更何况去宣扬呢?显示巴利原文
165.Naceva sampāyissantīti na ceva sammadeva pakārehi gamessanti ñāpessanti. Tenāha ‘‘sampādetvā kathetuṃ na sakkhissantī’’ti. Yasmā avisaye pañho pucchito hoti, tasmā āpajjissantīti yojanā. Sadevaketi arūpadevaggahaṇaṃ. Te hi lokiyadevehi dīghāyukatādinā ukkaṭṭhā. Samāraketi kāmāvacaradevaggahaṇaṃ. Sabrahmaketi rūpāvacarabrahmaggahaṇaṃ. Sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiyāti ettha samaṇaggahaṇena pabbajite, brāhmaṇaggahaṇena jātibrāhmaṇe, puna devaggahaṇena sammutideve, manussaggahaṇena avasiṭṭhamanussakāyaṃ pariyādiyati. Lokapajāggahaṇena pana payojanaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ dassitameva. Aññathā ārādhanaṃ nāma natthīti iminā kāmarūpavedanāsu assādādīnaṃ yāthāvato avabodho eva ito bāhirakānaṃ natthi, kuto pavedanāti dasseti.
166 “心之欢悦(cittārādhana)”:是指通过如实的宣说,令他人心生满足。“功德、品质(guṇā)”以“束缚”为含义:因为作为欲贪结的缘,即使对于事物也说明了其有“束缚”的含义;或者应将“功德、品质”视为“部分”的含义。“匆忙奔走(tarayantīti)”:意思是急急忙忙地行走。过去等分的初分等年龄段,正是心被系缚的状态,以积聚的样态而被执取为“年龄的功德、品质(vayoguṇā)”,因此他说:“‘积聚’的含义即是‘功德、品质’的含义”。“眼所识(cakkhuviññeyyā)”等,意为通过眼识等根门之识而被了知的。于“耳识所知”等的解释中,也是同样的道理。“成为可爱所缘(iṭṭhārammaṇabhūtā)”:意思是本质上即是可爱的所缘类,或者已成为可爱的所缘。“可意欲的(kamanīyā)”:就是应被欲求的。“令心增长(manavaḍḍhanakā)”:就是愉悦迷人的。以此也含括了臆想中可爱的一面。“生起怜爱性(piyajātikā)”:意即具有应被怜爱的性质。显示巴利原文
166.Cittārādhananti yāthāvapavedanena paresaṃ cittassa paritosanaṃ. Bandhanaṭṭhena guṇāti kāmarāgasaṃyojanassa paccayabhāvena vatthukāmesupi bandhanaṭṭho vutto, koṭṭhāsaṭṭho vā guṇaṭṭho daṭṭhabbo. Tarayantīti taramānā yanti gacchanti. Atītādibhinnapaṭhamādivayā eva cittatā rāsibhāvena vayoguṇāti gahitāti āha ‘‘rāsaṭṭho guṇaṭṭho’’ti. Cakkhuviññeyyāti vā cakkhuviññāṇataṃdvārikaviññāṇehi vijānitabbā. Sotaviññeyyātiādīsupi eseva nayo. Iṭṭhārammaṇabhūtāti sabhāveneva iṭṭhārammaṇajātikā, iṭṭhārammaṇabhāvaṃ vā pattā. Kamanīyāti kāmetabbā. Manavaḍḍhanakāti manoharā. Etena parikappanatopi iṭṭhabhāvaṃ gaṇhāti. Piyajātikāti piyāyitabbasabhāvā. Kāmūpasaṃhitāti kāmarāgena upecca sandhāniyā sambaddhā (a. ni. ṭī. 3.6.63) kātabbāti āha ‘‘ārammaṇaṃ katvā’’ti.
167 “置想于一旁”(saññaṃ ṭhapetvā),即作了“在此指节等所取处为百,在此所取处为千”等想之后进行计算。“无间计算”(acchiddagaṇanā),即依“一、二”乃至以九为终的方法,相续不断进行计算。“总合计算”(piṇḍagaṇanā),即通过累计、合和等方式总合进行计算。因此他说:“观察田地之后”等。“耕作为农”(kasanaṃ kasī),此处以“农”一词统摄一切与农相关的生计,故他说:“农作即耕作之事”。“徒步商”(jaṅghavaṇijjā),指以徒步商队行商;“陆路商”(thalavaṇijjā),指以车队行商。以“等”字还包括了以船舶贩卖等形式的买卖。“商道”(vaṇippatho),即商贾之道,以接受施舍为业,说的正是此义。“箭术”(issatta),即射箭的工艺,以弓箭技艺为生;此处“箭术”是举其一端,实指一切以武器谋生的方式,因此他说:“手持武器承事之事”。“辅相与大臣的事务等王家事”(porohiccāmaccakammādi rājakam显示巴利原文
167.Saññaṃ ṭhapetvāti ‘‘imasmiṃ aṅgulikādipabbe gahite sataṃ hoti, imasmiṃ sahassa’’ntiādinā saññāṇaṃ katvā gaṇanā. Acchiddagaṇanāti ‘‘ekaṃ dve’’tiādinā navantavidhinā nirantaragaṇanā. Piṇḍagaṇanāti saṅkalanapaṭuppādanādinā piṇḍitvā gaṇanā. Tenāha ‘‘khettaṃ oloketvā’’tiādi. Kasanaṃ kasīti kasiggahaṇena sabbo kasipaṭibaddho jīvikūpāyo gahitoti āha ‘‘kasīti kasikamma’’nti. Jaṅghavaṇijjāti jaṅghasatthavasena vaṇijjaṃ āha, thalavaṇijjāti sakaṭasatthavasena. Ādi-saddena nāvāpaṇādivasena vohāraṃ. Vaṇippathoti vaṇijamaggo, dānaggahaṇavasena saṃvohāroti attho. Usūnaṃ asanakammaṃ issattaṃ, dhanusippena jīvikā, idha pana issattaṃ viyāti issattaṃ, sabbaāvudhajīvikāti āha ‘‘āvudhaṃ gahetvā upaṭṭhānakamma’’nti. Porohiccāmaccakammādi rājakammaṃ.Ādi-saddena rathasippakhattavijjāsippādi-vuttāvasesaṃ mahāsippaṃ khuddakasippañca saṅgaṇhāti. Sītassa purakkhatoti sītassa purato kato. Yo hi sītakāle jīvikāhetu sītalapadesaṃ pakkhandati, so vāḷamigādīhi viya sītena paripātiyamāno tena purato kato viya hoti. Tenāha ‘‘sītena bādhiyamāno’’ti. Uṇhassa purakkhatoti etthāpi eseva nayo. Saritvāti saṃsappitvā. Ghaṭṭiyamānoti hiṃsiyamāno bādhiyamāno. Ābādhanaṃ ābādho, pīḷāti attho. Kāmahetunti vā bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso yathā ‘‘visamaṃ candimasūriyā parivattantī’’ti (a. ni. 4.70). Tathā sesapadadvayepi. Tenevāha ‘‘kāmānameva hetū’’ti. Kāmānaṃ hetūti ettha purimapadāvadhāraṇamayuttaṃ tadaññapaccayapaṭikkhepāpattito, tathā uttarapadāvadhāraṇaṃ kāmānaṃ kadāci ahetubhāvassapi sambhavato, tasmā ‘‘uppajjatiyevā’’ti vuttaṃ.
“他已奋起”(uṭṭhahato),以此说奋起精进,故他说:“以发起活命的精进”。那“精进”即是发起活命的精进。“对前后之间精勤努力的人”(pubbenāparaṃ ghaṭentassa),即从初始直至其后,令精进持续不断生起的人。“因心中生起的强猛忧而忧愁”(citte uppannabalavasokena socati),即因心的热恼而内在地忧戚。“因身上生起的痛苦”(kāye uppannadukkhena),即由彼忧之力所引生的身上之苦。或者,依忧的表现而作种种悲叹,即“哭泣”(paridevati)。“捶击胸膛”(uraṃ tāḷetvā),即击打胸口部位。“空无……”(mogha)等语,是哭泣时相状的开示,也是陷入痴惑时相状的开示。先言“我的”(me),后又说“不是”,以种种语表明自身可被双方所称说,或是因忧所生起的迷乱之语。显示巴利原文
Uṭṭhahatoti iminā uṭṭhānavīriyaṃ vuttanti āha ‘‘ājīvasamuṭṭhāpakavīriyenā’’ti. Taṃ vīriyanti ājīvikasamuṭṭhāpakavīriyaṃ. Pubbenāparaṃ ghaṭentassāti ārambhato paṭṭhāya nirantaraṃ pavattentassa. Citte uppannabalavasokena socatīti cittasantāpena anto nijjhāyati. Kāye uppannadukkhenāti tasseva sokassa vasena kāye uppannadukkhena. Sokuddesena taṃ taṃ vippalapento vā paridevati. Uraṃ tāḷetvāti vakkhappadesaṃ paharitvā. ‘‘Mogha’’ntiādi paridevanākāradassanañceva sammohāpajjanākāradassanañca. Meti vatvā puna noti puthuvacanaṃ attano ubhayathāpi voharitabbato, byāmūḷhavacanaṃ vā sokavasena.
168 此处以“欲”一词,特别是指所缘欲,故作“欲”等执取;然而,由他们无间而起,烦恼欲亦一同被取。“刀与皮革盾”(asicammanti)中,这里以“皮革盾”的执取,并非仅限于皮革所制成或仅以皮革所覆之物,而是概指一切防御武器的器具,故他说:“皮革盾、板状盾等”。以“等”字包括箭等物。“将弓箭束整理好”(dhanukalāpaṃ sannayhitvā),即整理好弓与装满箭的箭囊,也包括将弓弦装到弓身上的行为等,这便是“弓的整备”。“两军列阵而战”(dvinnaṃ senānaṃ byūhasaṃvidhānena vā ubhatobyūḷhaṃ),即通过编排两军阵势,形成两阵对峙。“在那些闪耀辉动者之中”(vijjotalantesu),即在那因经受锻打而锐利、带有光泽,从而闪耀挥动的刀剑之中。显示巴利原文
168. Idha kāmaggahaṇena visesato vatthukāmā gahitāti kāmādiggahaṇaṃ kataṃ, nānantariyatāya pana kilesakāmopi gahito eva. Asicammanti ettha cammaggahaṇena na kevalaṃ cammamayassa, cammaparisibbitasseva vā gahaṇaṃ, atha kho sabbassapi āvudhabādhakassa gahaṇanti dassento ‘‘kheṭakaphalakādīnī’’ti āha. Ādi-saddena sarādisaṅgaho. Dhanukalāpaṃ sannayhitvāti dhanuñceva khurappatūṇiñca sannayhitvā, dhanudaṇḍassa jiyāya tathābhāvakaraṇādipi (a. ni. ṭī. 3.5.76) dhanuno sannayhananti. Dvinnaṃ senānaṃ byūhasaṃvidhānena vā ubhatobyūḷhaṃ. Vijjotalantesūti nisitapītaphalatāya vijjotanavasena parivattamānesu.
靠近城墙而设置,故称“城墙之足”,即堡寨(upakāriyo),也就是所谓的“加强工事”(uddāpā)。“百齿刑具”(Satadanteti),即具有数百利齿的刑具,其底部有数百枚锋利的齿。此刑具极其沉重,十人、二十人也无法举起,须借助器械(yanta)举升、绑定而后安置。因此他说:“以八枚齿的状态”等。“他们压服”(Omaddantīti),即令其屈服卧倒。显示巴利原文
Pākārasamīpātisaṅkhāratāya pākārapādā upakāriyo, yā ‘‘uddāpā’’ti vuccanti. Satadantenāti anekasatadantakena, yassa tikhiṇadantāni anekasatāni mūlāni honti. Atibhāratāya dasavīsamattāpi janā ukkhipituṃ na sakkonti, yantavasena pana ukkhipitvā bandhitvā ṭhapenti. Tenāha ‘‘aṭṭhadantākārenā’’tiādi. Omaddantīti oṭṭhapenti.
169 “他们破坏门闩”(Sandhimpi chindanti),指以偷盗为生之人。“掠夺无余”(Nillopanti),指无余的掠夺,即包围一座小村庄,将其中一切可取之物丝毫不留地强行带走。因此他说“大掠夺”。“路上劫掠的勾当”(Panthaduhanakammaṃ),即在旷野、险道上站立,劫掠行人。“为了打击方便”(Pahārasādhanatthaṃ),即为了使棒杖击打容易得手。“由酸粥所生的酸粥水”(Kañjito nibbattaṃ kañjiyaṃ),即酸粥汁,也称为“碱水”(bilaṅga)。将它注入的地方,即“酸粥汁槽”(kañjiyaukkhalikā)。做成类似碱水罐之物,即“碱水罐行刑”(bilaṅgathāliyaṃ)。“打开头盖骨后”(Sīsakapālaṃ uppāṭetvāti),即弄开一个可让铁球进入的洞孔之后。“螺形剃头之刑罚”(Saṅkhamuṇḍakammakāraṇanti),即类似海螺形状的刑罚。显示巴利原文
169.Sandhimpi chindanti corikāya jīvitukāmā. Nillopanti nissesavilopaṃ, ekaṃ parittaṃ gāmaṃ parivāretvā tattha kiñcipi gayhūpagaṃ asesetvā karamaraggahaṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘mahāvilopa’’nti. Panthaduhanakammaṃ aṭavimagge ṭhatvā addhikānaṃ vilumpanaṃ. Pahārasādhanatthaṃ (a. ni. ṭī. 2.2.1) daṇḍappahārassa sukhasiddhiatthaṃ. Kañjito nibbattaṃ kañjiyaṃ, āranālaṃ. Yaṃ ‘‘bilaṅga’’ntipi vuccati, taṃ yattha siñcati, sā kañjiyaukkhalikā. Bilaṅgathālikasadisakaraṇaṃ bilaṅgathāliyaṃ. Sīsakapālaṃ uppāṭetvāti ayoguḷapavesanappamāṇaṃ chiddaṃ katvā. Saṅkhamuṇḍakammakāraṇanti saṅkhaṃ viya muṇḍakammakāraṇaṃ.
「罗睺面刑罚」:即类似进入罗睺口中时的太阳那样的刑罚。「火鬘刑罚」:即带有火鬘的刑罚。「手灯刑罚」:即手执灯火般的刑罚。「撕裂草席刑罚」:即类似撕裂草席那样,将身上缠绑之物扯开的刑罚。「穿着树皮衣刑罚」:即令被从身上扯开的树皮条穿着于身的刑罚。施行此刑时,如同从颈部开始割断绑缚物而仅令留在腰间一般,也如同从脚踝开始割断而仅令留在腰间一般。而在注释书中则说:「从腰开始割断,使之留在脚踝上」。「羚羊刑罚」:即类似羚羊的刑罚。「给与铁圈之后」:即戴上铁圈之后。「打入铁桩」:即于肘、膝尖端钉入铁桩。以上是对于「如此所作的刑罚」所说。显示巴利原文
Rāhumukhakammakāraṇanti rāhumukhagata-sūriyasadisa-kammakāraṇaṃ. Jotimālikanti jotimālavantaṃ kammakāraṇaṃ. Hatthapajjotikanti hatthapajjotanakammakāraṇaṃ. Erakavattakammakāraṇanti erakavattasadise sarīrato baddhe uppāṭanakammakāraṇaṃ. Cīrakavāsikakammakāraṇanti sarīrato uppāṭitabaddhacīrakāhi nivāsāpanakammakāraṇaṃ. Taṃ karontā yathā gīvato paṭṭhāya baddhe kantitvā kaṭiyameva ṭhapenti, evaṃ gopphakato paṭṭhāya kantitvā kaṭiyameva ṭhapenti. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘kaṭito paṭṭhāya kantitvā gopphakesu ṭhapentī’’ti vuttaṃ. Eṇeyyakakammakāraṇanti eṇīmigasadisakammakāraṇaṃ . Ayavalayāni datvāti ayavalayāni paṭimuñcitvā. Ayasūlāni koṭṭentīti kapparajaṇṇukakoṭīsu ayasūlāni pavesenti. Nti taṃ tathākatakammakāraṇaṃ sattaṃ.
“钩肉刑罚”:以钩撕扯人肉的刑罚。“钱币式刑罚”:将人切剁成钱币大小的刑罚。“敲打”即切割。“碱水浇皮刑罚”:剥皮后浇淋碱水的刑罚。“门闂翻转刑罚”:如同翻动门闩那样翻转人的刑罚。他们以铁桩钉入,使身体固结一处。“草坐刑罚”:如同草坐垫那样将身体卷缠起来的刑罚。“行刑人”即执行杀害的人。“如同将草束做成式样之后”:如同制作草坐垫时,先做成草束,再以卷缠的方式系缚,这是它的含义。“被饥饿的”:被极度饥饿的、家族驯养的狗。这些狗强壮、善跑且凶猛。“由于业而流转于彼处”:即“后世”,也就是他世;生于彼处即是“属于后世的”。显示巴利原文
Baḷisamaṃsikanti baḷisehi maṃsuppāṭanakammakāraṇaṃ. Kahāpaṇikanti kahāpaṇamattaso chindanakammakāraṇaṃ. Koṭṭentīti chindanti. Khārāpatacchikanti tacchetvā khārāvasiñcanakammakāraṇaṃ. Palighaparivattikanti palighassa viya parivattanakammakāraṇaṃ. Ekābaddhaṃ karonti ayasūlassa koṭṭanena. Palālapīṭhakanti palālapīṭhassa viya sarīrassa saṃvellanakammakāraṇaṃ. Kāraṇikāti ghātanakārakā. Palālavaṭṭiṃ viya katvāti yathā palālapīṭhaṃ karontā palālavaṭṭiṃ katvā saṃvellanavasena naṃ (a. ni. ṭī. 2.2.1) veṭhenti, evaṃ karontīti attho. Chātakehīti bubhukkhitehi koleyyakasunakhehi. Balavanto hi te javayoggā sūrā ca honti. Kammavasena sampareti etthāti samparāyo, paraloko. Tattha bhavoti samparāyiko.
170 “欲贪于此中被调伏并舍断”:即涅槃,既是欲贪的调伏,也是欲贪的舍断。因此他说:“那正是涅槃。”“依于此”:这是就调伏、舍断欲贪之人的所缘而说的。“以三种遍知”:这是说,以知遍知与度遍知而遍知——这是不可能的,断遍知就更不必说了。“成为彼之状态故”:即是为了达到遍知的状态。显示巴利原文
170. Chandarāgo vinīyati ceva pahīyati ca etthāti nibbānaṃ chandarāgavinayo chandarāgappahānañcāti. Tenāha ‘‘nibbānañhī’’ti. Tattha āgammāti idaṃ yo chandarāgaṃ vineti pajahati, tassa ārammaṇaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tīhi pariññāhīti iminā ñātatīraṇapariññāhi parijānissantīti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjati. Ko pana vādo pahānapariññāyāti dasseti? Tathabhāvāyāti parijānanakabhāvāya.
171 “Aparittena”:不狭小,意为无减损。“Vipulena”:广大,意为大。如果是为了显示容色成就,为什么不取容色十处呢?回答说:“因为对于女人”等等。为了表明即使缺乏食物等成就,也说了“生于悲惨家庭的人”。容色处逐渐变得清净,由于肉的增长,乳房肉增长、产生。“Vaṇṇeti”:如同显现进入内心的状态,故称为容色。这容色本身因和谐受用等而显明,故称为“nibhā”。因此说:“vaṇṇanibhā就是容色本身。”显示巴利原文
171.Aparittenāti ahīnena. Vipulenāti mahatā. Yadi vaṇṇasampattidassanatthaṃ, vaṇṇadasakaṃ kasmā na gahitanti āha ‘‘mātugāmassa hī’’tiādi. Bhojanasampadādīnaṃ alābhepīti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘duggatakule nibbattassapī’’ti vuttaṃ. Thokaṃ thokaṃ vaṇṇāyatanaṃ pasīdati maṃsassa paribrūhanato thanamaṃsāni vaḍḍhanti jāyanti. Vaṇṇeti hadayaṅgatabhāvaṃ pakāsento viya hotīti vaṇṇo. So eva sāmaggopabhogādinā nibhātīti nibhā. Tenāha ‘‘vaṇṇanibhāti vaṇṇoyevā’’ti.
「Bhogganti」:因为极度弯曲,故称弯曲。那样的身体犹如被破坏一般,所以称为「bhagga」。因此说:「这也只是显示了他的弯曲性。」牙齿被斩断破坏,且部分脱落,故为「牙齿残缺」。头发变白,故为白发,因此说「白头发」。头发适度脱落称为「秃头」,但大面积脱落,故指向「大秃头」。于百岁时出现的斑点,指向「被斑点毁坏的身体」。那些有些白、有些黑,因此说「以白黑斑点」。「Byādhikaṃ」:有变化的病。「Bāḷhagilānaṃ」:濒死之病,因临终的病而病重。显示巴利原文
Bhogganti ativiya vaṅkatāya bhoggaṃ. Tādisaṃ pana sarīraṃ bhaggaṃ viya hotīti āha ‘‘bhagga’’nti. Tenāha ‘‘imināpissa vaṅkabhāvameva dīpetī’’ti. Dantānaṃ chinnabhinnatāya ekaccānaṃ patanena ca khaṇḍitadantaṃ. Kesānaṃ setavaṇṇatāya palitanti āha ‘‘paṇḍarakesa’’nti. Kesānaṃ mattaso siyane khallāṭavohāroti bahuso siyanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘mahākhallāṭasīsa’’nti. Vassasatikakāle uppajjanatilakāni sandhāyāha ‘‘tilakāhatagatta’’nti. Tāni pana kānici setāni honti kānici kāḷānīti āha ‘‘setakāḷatilakehī’’ti. Byādhikanti sañcātabyādhiṃ. Bāḷhagilānanti māraṇanti kagelaññena gilānaṃ.
173 「Tasmiṃ samaye」:指在进入并安住于禅那的那个时候。「Na ceteti」:不意图、不导向。以破坏为义,故称为「破坏」;所谓破坏,即是所破坏,没有这种所破坏的就是「无破坏」,也就是没有苦。因此说「无苦的」。显示巴利原文
173.Tasmiṃ samayeti tasmiṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharaṇasamaye. Na cetetīti na abhisandahati. Byābādhanaṭṭhena byābādho, byābādhova byābajjhaṃ, natthi ettha byābajjhanti abyābajjhaṃ, dukkharahitaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘niddukkhamevā’’ti.
174 「Aniccādiākāro」:指无常行相、苦行相、变易行相及动摇等行相。显示巴利原文
174.Aniccādiākāroti aniccākāro dukkhākāro vipariṇāmākāro calādiākāro ca.
4. 《小苦蕴经》注疏显示巴利原文
4. Cūḷadukkhakkhandhasuttavaṇṇanā
175 关于“Sakkesu”(于释迦族中):此处应说明的内容,可依《念处经》义注中所说的方法了知。为了显示其中一部分,而说“因为他是……”等。其中,那些王子被称为释迦族,由于那里是他们的住处,那个地方也因此如此称呼,这应当说明。故他说:“释迦族的起源在《阿摩昼经》中已有说明。”“迦毗罗卫”是依过去的名称而说。显示巴利原文
175.Sakkesūti ettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ satipaṭṭhānasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbanti taṃ ekadesena dassento ‘‘so hī’’ti āha. Tattha yena rājakumārā sakyā nāma jātā, yato tesaṃ nivāsaṭṭhānatāya janapado tathā vuccati, taṃ vattabbanti āha ‘‘sakyānaṃ pana uppatti ambaṭṭhasutte āgatāvā’’ti. Kapilavatthūti vuttaṃ purimasaññāvasena.
“种种”:他说“诸贪法”,这个复数形式是显示种种贪的相。因为贪依种种不同的状态和活动方式的差别,而有“欲、贪、渴爱、执著、期待”等多种分类;但以贪求为特征,就只称为“贪”。因此他说:“种种的贪”。同样,对于嗔和痴的种种性,也以“嗔、害、怒、怨恨、对立”等,以及“迷乱、不正伺察、不审察、愚昧、愚蠢”等来说明,因此说:“其余两者也是如此。”“遍取”:完全、周遍地拿取。“执取”:这是此处的意思,因此说“在执取上”。“遍取”:已经完全消尽,因为声明家说“dī”的音表示“尽”的意思。显示巴利原文
Nānappakārakanti ‘‘lobhadhammā’’ti bahuvacanassa nimittaṃ vadati. Lobho hi tena tena avatthāvisesena pavattiākārabhedena ‘‘chando rāgotaṇhā āsatti apekkhā’’tiādinā anekappabhedo, lubbhanalakkhaṇena pana ‘‘lobho’’tveva vuccati. Tenāha ‘‘nānappakārakaṃ lobhaṃyevā’’ti. Tathā ‘‘doso paṭigho kodho upanāho virodho’’tiādinā, ‘‘muyhanaṃ asamapekkhanaṃ apaccavekkhaṇā dummejjhaṃ bālya’’ntiādinā (dha. sa. 390) ca dosamohānaṃ nānappakārataṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘itaresupi dvīsu eseva nayo’’ti. Pariyādiyitvāti parito sabbaso ādāya. Gahetvāti ayamettha atthoti āha ‘‘gahaṇe āgata’’nti. Pariyādiyatīti parikkhīṇoti. Dī-saddañhi saddavidū khayatthaṃ vadanti.
“一时”:是通过省略感叹词而说出的,故解释为“在每一个时候”。“贪嗔痴”:是指由初道所断除之后残余的贪嗔痴。如果说它们被无余断除,那第二道还有什么作用呢?这是言下之意。但是当他看到现行的(烦恼)时,他也知道“我还有未断除的”。这样,他怎么会有无余断除的想法呢?因此说:“对于未断除的……他有想。”一个只是由初道断除了疑惑的人,怎么还会生起“我内部还有什么法未被断除呢?”这样的疑惑?提出这个问题后,他说明了原因:“由于不精通教法”。正如对律不善巧一样,因为不精通教法,圣者们有时也会生起一些疑惑,如同对律的悔恨一般,因为他们还有迷乱未被彻底断除。为了说明:对于不在自己范围内的东西,不了知,这与精通教法有何关系?仅凭省察就能成就此事。因此说:“难道他没有省察吗?”对方回答:“不能说没有”,于是说“有”,并显示其中存在的区分,说“然而那个省察……”等等。其中,“sā”指省察。“Sabbesaṃ”:一切圣者。并不是完全没有,但也不是完全具备,因此说“然而在这些……”等等。显示巴利原文
Ekadāti āmeḍitalopena niddesoti āha ‘‘ekekasmiṃ kāle’’ti. Lobhadosamohāti paṭhamamaggena pahīnāvasesā lobhadosamohā. Niravasesā pahīyanti, aññathā dutiyamaggena kiṃ kataṃ siyāti adhippāyo. Samudācārappattaṃ pana disvā ‘‘appahīnaṃ me atthī’’tipi jānāti. Evaṃ kathaṃ niravasesappahānasaññāti āha ‘‘appahīnakaṃ…pe… saññī hotī’’ti. Evaṃ paṭhamamaggeneva samucchinnasaṃsayassa ‘‘ko su nāma me dhammo ajjhattaṃ appahīnoti evaṃ sandheho kathaṃ uppajjatī’’ti vatvā ‘‘paṇṇattiyā akovidattā’’ti kāraṇamāha. Vinayakukkuccaṃ viya hi paṇṇattiyaṃ akusalatāya ariyānampi katthaci vimatimattaṃ uppajjati yathā taṃ sabbaso appahīnasammohānanti. Attano avisaye anabhijānanaṃ paṇṇattikosallena kimettha payojanaṃ, paccavekkhaṇāmattena ayamattho sijjhatīti dassento ‘‘kiṃ tassa paccavekkhaṇā natthī’’ti āha. Itaro ‘‘natthī’’ti na sakkā vattunti katvā ‘‘atthī’’ti vatvā tattha labbhamānavibhāgaṃ dassento ‘‘sā panā’’tiādimāha. Tattha sāti paccavekkhaṇā. Sabbesanti sabbesaṃ ariyānaṃ. Yathā paripuṇṇā na hoti, na evaṃ sabbaso na hotīti āha ‘‘imāsu panā’’tiādi.
176 「内部」:指自身的内部,故说「在你的相续中」。「未断除」:指未能究竟、无余地断除。「两种」:即事欲与烦恼欲两种。因为烦恼欲从被喜乐的那一刻起,便已被受用了。显示巴利原文
176.Ajjhattanti niyakajjhattaṃ adhippetanti āha ‘‘tava santāne’’ti. Appahīnoti anavasesato appahīno. Duvidheti vatthukāmakilesakāme. Kilesakāmopi hi yadaggena assādīyati, tadaggena paribhuñjīyati.
177 「被享受故」:即「味」,指乐受。因为这些欲中的味极少,故称「少味」。因此他说「乐少」。「苦多」:因有寻求等苦,现世由恶行所生之苦,来世之苦亦多,故于诸欲中,有众多苦。「愁恼多」:即众多杂染。而这些杂染,如将在下文所说的道理,于现世利益中亦多,故他说「现法利益……多」。又因这些杂染对于拥有它们的人,会在现世与来世障碍其利益的修行,并成为产生过患的因缘,故说「现法利益……多」。「若如是」:应以「诸欲少味」等这样的方式来了知。「由理」:依据法理。「由因」:依据合理的推论。『善见』与此相关。「由观慧」:指圣道慧。此慧能殊胜地观照四圣谛,故称为「观」。因此他说「意指下分双道智」。「喜乐」:指带有喜乐的二禅那。「双道」:指下分道。若人不再有退转与弯曲的习性,则称为「不退转」,他的欲贪之欲完全未被断除。因此他提出「为何」等问难。如同堕入内院者那般舍弃的智慧:此即指「过患随观智」。显示巴利原文
177. Assādīyatīti assādo, sukhaṃ. Appo appamattako assādo etesūti appassādā. Tenāha ‘‘parittasukhā’’ti. Pariyesanadukkhādihetukaṃ diṭṭhadhammikaṃ tattha duccaritacaraṇena samparāyikañca dukkhamettha kāmesu bahukanti bahudukkhā. Bahupāyāsāti bahuparikkilesā. Te pana parikkilesā vakkhamānanayena bahūyevettha diṭṭhadhammikāpīti āha ‘‘diṭṭhadhammika…pe… bahū’’ti. Te ca parikkilesā yasmā taṃsamaṅgino hitapaṭipattiyā antarāyakarā idha ceva paraloke ca ādīnavakāraṇañca pavattanti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘diṭṭhadhammika…pe… bahū’’ti. Evaṃ cepīti evaṃ ‘‘appassādā kāmā’’tiādinā ākārena. Nayenāti dhammena. Kāraṇenāti yuttiyā. Suṭṭhu diṭṭhaṃ hotīti sambandho. Vipassanāpaññāyāti ariyamaggapaññāya. Sā cattāripi saccāni visesato passatīti vipassanāti adhippetā. Tenāha ‘‘heṭṭhāmaggadvayañāṇenāti attho’’ti. Pītisukhanti pītisukhavantaṃ jhānadvayaṃ. Dve maggeti heṭṭhāmagge. Āvaṭṭanasīlo ābhujanasīlo na hotīti anāvaṭṭī neva hoti sabbaso appahīnakāmarāgachando. Tenāha ‘‘kasmā’’tiādi. Orodhanāṭakā pajahanapaññāti ādīnavānupassanāñāṇamāha.
179 关于「味」也已经说明,也就是以「是少味」(appassādā)这句话,将诸欲中所有的味,毫无遗漏地全部概括起来,并显示了它的微小性。关于「过患」也已经在简略中说明了,因为显示了其余过患的缘故。所谓「宣说彼」(Taṃ kathetunti),就是以「独一乐受者」(ekantasukhapaṭisaṃvedī)这句话来宣说出离(nissaraṇa)。所谓「以此二端」(Imehi antehīti),就是先以「摩诃男!有此五种欲功德」(pañcime, mahānāma, kāmaguṇā)等说法,开示欲功德的相状,以说明耽着欲乐的行为;再以「他们常站立,拒绝座位」(ubbhaṭṭhakā honti āsanapaṭikkhittā)等说法,开示自我折磨的行为。开示了这两端之后,便说我的教法是脱离这两端的。因为以果等至为究竟,所以为了显示教法的成就,说:「以上果等至为顶点,显示整个教法」。如同「枝叶与大地」(sākapatthivo)这个例子一样(《波你尼经》2.1.60),这是省略了中间成分的复合词,比如「鹫峰」(gijjhakūṭo):意思是形似秃鹫的山峰。其次,在此处的另一种解释是,因为有秃鹫栖息,此山有秃鹫在峰上,所以叫「鹫峰」(gijjhakūṭo)。指那些只站立的人,从坐的地方起来之后,就只站在一个地方。因此他说:「不坐」(anisinnā)。「尼干陀」(Nigaṇṭhassāti)指的是若提子。这里没有残余,所以是「无残余」。这仅仅是对「有」(saṅkhā)这种说法的言词而已,因此他说:「所谓无残余」。「恒常」(niccaṭṭhena)的意思,应当用「恒时」(satata)这个词来显明其反复现行,所以说为「已止息」(samita)。用这个来显示它不间断地现行,应该这样来理解此处的含义。显示巴利原文
179.Assādopi kathito, ‘‘appassādā’’ti hi iminā yāvatako kāmesu assādo, taṃ sabbaṃ anavasesato pariggahetvā cassa parittabhāvo dassitoti ādīnavopi kathito saṅkhepeneva sesassaādīnavassa dassitattā. Taṃ kathetunti taṃ nissaraṇaṃ ‘‘ekantasukhapaṭisaṃvedī’’ti iminā kathetuṃ. Imehi antehīti ‘‘pañcime, mahānāma, kāmaguṇā’’tiādinā kāmaguṇadassanamukhena kāmasukhallikānuyogaṃ ‘‘ubbhaṭṭhakā honti āsanapaṭikkhittā’’tiādinā attakilamathānuyogañca dassetvā imehi dvīhi antehi muttaṃ mama sāsananti, phalasamāpattipariyosānattā sāsanasampattiyā ‘‘upariphalasamāpattisīsena sakalasāsanaṃ dassetu’’nti āha. Gijjhasadiso kūṭoti majjhepadalopīsamāso yathā ‘‘sākapatthivo’’ti (pāṇini. 2.1.60). Dutiye panettha gijjhavantatāya gijjhā kūṭe etassāti gijjhakūṭo. Uddhaṃyeva tiṭṭhanakā nisajjāya vuṭṭhitakālato paṭṭhāya ekaṭṭhāneneva tiṭṭhanakā. Tenāha ‘‘anisinnā’’ti. Nigaṇṭhassāti nāṭaputtassa. Natthi etassa parisesanti aparisesaṃ. Evaṃ saṅkhābhavacanamattamassāti āha ‘‘aparisesasaṅkhāta’’nti. Niccaṭṭhena satata-saddena abhiṇhappavatti jotitā siyāti ‘‘samita’’nti vuttaṃ. Tena nirantarappavattiṃ dassetīti evaṃ vā ettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
180 “凡有所作,他都知道”(Yaṃ karoti, taṃ jānātīti):了知苦的消尽,是智者的职责,智者对于已做与未做之事,都应当了知。因此,你们在令旧业灭尽的过程中,首先应了知“旧业有这么多”,然后再依“在这么长的时间里,经由苦行,已有这么多旧业被灭尽,现在还有这么多要灭”的方法,像世间人那样,自行划分所应做的事。他在指示这一点,所以说:“你们也应该这样了知”(tumhehipi tathā ñātabbaṃ siyā)。“净分”(Suddhantanti):指清净的部分,即未来无需依赖便能成就的业尽,或由此所致的苦尽。这就是它的意思。通过问“有达到净分的人吗?”(Suddhantaṃ patto atthīti)这句话,显示出在尼乾陀的教义中,完全没有断除不善、修习善法这回事,因为丝毫没有清净的修习。如此,哪里还有苦尽的可能呢?显示巴利原文
180.Yaṃ karoti, taṃ jānātīti dukkhassa nijjaraṇakhepanaṃ nāma viññūnaṃ kiccaṃ, viññunā ca purisena katākataṃ jānitabbaṃ, tasmā tumhehi purāṇānaṃ kammānaṃ byantibhāvaṃ karontehi paṭhamaṃ tāva ettakāni purāṇāni kammānīti jānitabbāni, tato ‘‘ettakaṃ kālaṃ katena tapasā ettakāni tāni byantikatāni, idāni ettakāni kātabbānī’’tiādinā ayaṃ vidhi purisena viya attanā kātabbakiccaṃ paricchinditabbanti dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘tumhehipi tathā ñātabbaṃ siyā’’ti. Suddhantanti suddhakoṭṭhāsaṃ, āyatiṃ anavassavasiddhaṃ kammakkhayaṃ, tato vā dukkhakkhayanti attho. Suddhantaṃ patto atthīti pucchatīti iminā akusalānaṃ pahānaṃ, kusalānaṃ bhāvanā ca sabbena sabbaṃ nigaṇṭhasamaye natthi sabbaso visuddhibhāvanāya abhāvato, tasmā kuto dukkhakkhayassa sambhavoti dasseti.
“若是处于不了知的状态”(Evaṃ ajānanabhāve satīti):当有如“我们过去曾存在”(ahuvamheva maya)等说法所描述的那种不了知时,那便是你们所以为的了知。就是这个意思。“暴恶”(Luddāti):即可怖畏。因为他们通过身、语造作卑劣之事,所以称为“行为暴恶的人”(luddācārā)。因为从事那样的行为,便被称作“血手”(lohitapāṇī)。捕鹿人、渔夫、盗贼、刽子手等,便是捕鹿人这一类。“粗猛业者”(Kakkhaḷakammāti):指行为粗暴的人。他们在尼乾陀中出家。这是在显示:正因为过去造了能招感极大痛苦的业,你们现在才遭受如此大的痛苦。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ ajānanabhāve satīti ‘‘ahuvamheva maya’’ntiādinā vuttappakārassa ajānane sati, tasmiṃ tumhehi aññāyamāneti attho. Luddāti ghorā. Te pana yasmā kāyavācāhi nihīnameva karonti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘luddācārā’’ti. Lohitapāṇitveva vuccati tajjākiriyācaraṇato. Māgavikakevaṭṭacoraghātakādayo māgavikādayo. Kakkhaḷakammāti pharusakammā. Te nigaṇṭhesu pabbajantīti pubbe mahādukkhasaṃvattaniyakammassa katattā hi tumhe etarahi īdisaṃ mahādukkhaṃ paccanubhavathāti dasseti.
“教说”(Vādeti):指在教义中所说的,与“教义”(samaye)同义。“以乐得乐”(Sukhena sukhanti):这里的“以乐”(sukhenāti)是指以安乐的修行方式,即安乐的行道。“乐”(Sukhanti)则指解脱乐。在这个世间,人们获得快乐,正是通过农耕、经商等辛苦的行道才得到的,解脱乐也是如此。这是其内在含义。由于身体肢节的圆满,犹如频婆果的核心,因此称为“频婆娑罗”。那些尼乾陀如此说,然而他们并不知道世尊所证悟的,正是那种极寂静、最殊胜的涅槃乐。“率尔”(Sahasāti):指轻率行事。“不思择”(Appaṭisaṅkhāti):不加以审虑、简择。因此他说:“作了轻率之举”(sāhasaṃ katvā)等。显示巴利原文
Vādeti diṭṭhiyaṃ, samayeti attho. Sukhena sukhanti ettha sukhenāti paṭipattisukhena, sukhāya paṭipattiyāti attho. Sukhanti vimokkhasukhaṃ, idha loke sukhaṃ adhigacchantā kasivaṇijjādidukkhapaṭipattiyāva adhigacchanti, evaṃ mokkhasukhampīti adhippāyo. Sarīrāvayavasampattiyāpi bimbino sāroti bimbisāro. Te nigaṇṭhā…pe… sandhāya vadanti, na pana bhagavato accantasantapaṇītaṃ nibbānasukhapaṭivedanaṃ jānanti. Sahasāti ravā. Appaṭisaṅkhāti na paṭisaṅkhāya avicāretvā. Tenāha ‘‘sāhasaṃ katvā’’tiādi.
不与其他感受相杂、唯一而纯粹的乐,即是「独一乐」。领受此乐者,便是「独一乐受者」。因此说「无间断乐受者」。「所谓为安立论说」:即是为了将「独一乐受者」这发起之说加以安立。在「王问」这一章中,这是对国王的说法。「令乐成为可问」:如「若不能胜任七日夜,那么能胜任六日夜吗?」这样,使提问变得容易。由「我」等引出的「净章」,是因为它纯是从果报而得的果等至乐。对于一个能连续七日夜入定的人来说,一日一夜又有何可说的呢?所以这是「寻常之事」。显示巴利原文
Aññāhi vedanāhi avomissaṃ ekantaṃ sukhaṃ ekantasukhaṃ, tassa paṭisaṃvedī. Tenāha ‘‘nirantarasukhapaṭisaṃvedī’’ti. Kathāpatiṭṭhāpanatthanti ‘‘ekantasukhapaṭisaṃvedī’’ti evaṃ āraddhakathāya patiṭṭhāpanatthaṃ. Rājavāreti rājānaṃ uddissa āgatadesanāvāre. Sukhaṃ pucchituṃ hotīti ‘‘yadi satta rattindivāni nappahoti, kiṃ cha rattindivāni pahotī’’tiādinā pucchanasukhaṃ hoti. ‘‘Ahaṃ kho’’tiādinā pavatto suddhavāro suddhanissandassa phalasamāpattisukhassa vasena āgatattā. Anacchariyaṃ hoti, satta rattindivāni pahontassa ekasmiṃ rattindive kiṃ vattabbanti. Uttānatthameva vuttanayattā suviññeyyattā.
5. 《阿努摩经注释》显示巴利原文
5. Anumānasuttavaṇṇanā
181 「随所说」:如「于俱卢国,于释迦族」等,依循所说之理,对于「跋伽,即名为地方人的王子」等词义,应以此类推而了知。「于取地等之日」:指为了建造城市,选址师测定城址的日子。「之后」:即在那之后,当城市无碍地被建立起来时,他们以那座苏苏马罗山作为吉祥相,为它取名「苏苏马罗山」。有人说:因形似鳄鱼,有一座山名为鳄鱼山,该山就在这座城附近;因此,由于此城拥有那座鳄鱼山,便被称作「有鳄鱼山」。「畏舍迦罗」:指一种名为热疹丛的植物,有人说是「白树」。因那种树在那里极为繁茂,那片树林便被称作「畏舍迦罗林」。又有人说:有一个名为「畏舍」的夜叉行不如法事,由于他从那里消失,那片树林便得名「畏舍消失林」。在施无畏之处生起、增长、繁茂,这是其含义。显示巴利原文
181.Vuttānusārenāti ‘‘kurūsu, sakkesū’’ti ca ettha vuttanayānusārena, ‘‘bhaggā nāma jānapadino rājakumārā’’tiādinā nayena vacanattho veditabboti attho. Vatthupariggahadivaseti nagaramāpanatthaṃ vatthuvijjācariyena nagaraṭṭhānassa pariggaṇhanadivase. Athāti pacchā. Nagare nimmiteti tattha anantarāyena nagare māpite. Tameva susumāragiraṇaṃ subhanimittaṃ katvā ‘‘susumāragiri’’tvevassa nāmaṃ akaṃsu. Susumārasaṇṭhānattā susumāro nāma eko giri, so tassa nagarassa samīpe, tasmā taṃ susumāragiri etassa atthīti ‘‘susumāragirī’’ti vuccatīti keci. Bhesakaḷāti vuccati ghammaṇḍagacchaṃ, keci ‘‘setarukkha’’nti vadanti, tesaṃ bahulatāya pana taṃ vanaṃ bhesakaḷāvananteva paññāyittha. Bheso nāma eko yakkho ayuttakārī, tassa tato gaḷitaṭṭhānatāya taṃ vanaṃ bhesagaḷāvanaṃ nāma jātanti keci. Abhayadinnaṭṭhāne jātaṃ virūḷhaṃ, saṃvaddhanti attho.
「令生欲」:即让同梵行者生起想要述说任何应被指责之事的意愿;为此目的,他将自己奉献给他们,这是其含义。最先给予的利益教导是「教诫」,此后一再给予的是「教授」。或者说,涉及现在与过去内容的是教诫,涉及未来内容的是教授。有具体事缘而生起的是教诫,无具体事缘的是教授。「那位如此自恣的比丘」。「恶言者」:对于一个心怀反感、故意作对、不具恭敬心的人来说,言语是苦的,因此他被称为「恶言者」。由此,他被说为「难以说示」。「后来者」:即如「他是恶欲者」等(《中部》1.181)所说的十六种恶法。以种种方式带来,向右旋转即是「右绕」;由此,有从右方受持的习惯者,即称为「从右受持者」;不是这样的,则称为「不顺从右受持者」。从左边,即与所说相反,这是其意图。显示巴利原文
Icchāpetīti yaṃ kiñci attani garahitabbaṃ vattuṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ icchaṃ uppādeti, tadatthāya tesaṃ attānaṃ vissajjetīti attho. Paṭhamaṃ dinno hitūpadeso ovādo, aparāparaṃ dinno anusāsanī. Paccuppannātītavisayo vā ovādo, anāgatavisayo anusāsanī. Otiṇṇavatthuko ovādo, itaro anusāsanī. So cāti evaṃ pavāretā so bhikkhu. Dukkhaṃ vaco etasmiṃ vippaṭikūlaggāhe vipaccanīkasāte anādare puggaleti dubbaco. Tenāha ‘‘dukkhena vattabbo’’ti. Upari āgatehīti ‘‘pāpiccho hotī’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.181) āgatehi soḷasahi pāpadhammehi. Pakārehi āvahaṃ padakkhiṇaṃ, tato padakkhiṇato gahaṇasīlo padakkhiṇaggāhī, na padakkhiṇaggāhī appadakkhiṇaggāhī. Vāmatoti apasabyato, vuttavipariyāyatoti adhippāyo.
“期望以不实功德受崇敬”:即对那些不存在、不真实的功德,生起想要被尊崇的渴望。其中,“Paṭi-”这一前缀,是“敌对”的同义词;而此处“散播”或“努力”是指“如此对立而住”,故说“他反击”,意为:他成为敌对者、反对者而安住。“呵斥”:即驱逐、威吓。而处于这种状态的人,实际上就是在触恼、侵扰他人,所以说“他烦扰”。“反扣帽子”:指当别人以某种方式指责他时,他便把与那指责相应的过失,反过来安在指责者头上。显示巴利原文
Asantasambhāvanapatthanānanti asantehi avijjamānehi guṇehi sambhāvanassa patthanābhūtānaṃ. Paṭi-saddo paccattikapariyāyo, pharaṇaṃ vāyamanaṃ idha tathāvaṭṭhānanti āha ‘‘paṭippharatīti paṭiviruddho paccanīko hutvā tiṭṭhatī’’ti. Apasādetīti khipeti tajjeti. Tathābhūto ca paraṃ ghaṭṭento nāma hotīti āha ‘‘ghaṭṭetī’’ti. Paṭiāropetīti yādisena vutto, tassa paṭibhāgabhūtaṃ dosaṃ codakassa upari āropeti.
“以隐藏的方式行事”(《增支部》复注 2.3.68):即以掩盖的方式而行、而转起;又由于“carati”一词词根有多种含义,故说“他隐藏”。“以他事他物”:为了显示掩盖的相状,而说“用别的理由”等。其中,“别的理由或话语”,是指指责者为揭露被指责者的过失所说的理据或言辞,被指责者却不用这些,而是用全然不同的理由或话语来掩盖。所谓“用理由”,即用能表明指责无根据的理据;所谓“用话语”,即用能表达该意思的言词。不正面回应“谁有犯?”等问难,反而发起扰乱,这便是显示了“以他事他物而行隐藏”的方式。至于“把话题引向外面,敷衍了事”,则是这两者的具体差别所在,因此说“某某人”等。显示巴利原文
Paṭicaratīti (a. ni. ṭī. 2.3.68) paṭicchādanavasena carati pavattati, paṭicchādanattho eva vā carati-saddo anekatthattā dhātūnanti āha ‘‘paṭicchādetī’’ti. Aññenaññanti paṭicchādanākāradassananti āha ‘‘aññena kāraṇenā’’tiādi. Tattha aññaṃ kāraṇaṃ vacanaṃ vāti yaṃ codakena cuditakassa dosavibhāvanaṃ kāraṇaṃ, vacanaṃ vā vuttaṃ, tato aññeneva kāraṇena, vacanena vā paṭicchādeti. Kāraṇenāti codanāya amūlikabhāvadīpaniyā yuttiyā. Vacanenāti tadatthabodhanena. Ko āpannotiādinā codanaṃ avissajjetvā vikkhepāpajjanaṃ aññenaññaṃ paṭicaraṇanti dasseti, bahiddhā kathāapanāmanaṃ vissajjetvāti ayameva tesaṃ viseso. Tenāha ‘‘itthannāma’’ntiādi.
“apadāna”(事迹):众生以此能保护过失,或能斩断、切割过失,故称为“事迹”;又或者,是指众生或正或邪发起的种种行为。(《增支部》复注 2.3.2)因此,注释书说:“对于自己的行为……”。显示巴利原文
Apadīyanti dosā etena rakkhīyanti, lūyanti, chijjantīti vā apadānaṃ, (a. ni. ṭī. 2.3.2) sattānaṃ sammā, micchā vā pavattapayogo. Tenāha ‘‘attano cariyāyā’’ti.
183 「应当逐一推度」:即应反复、一再地衡量与了知。「应当自我推度」:此句用的是反身的业格。因此注释书解释道:「应当被衡量、被称量、被审决。」或者说,「应当自我推度」是指在自身中发起自我推度智。这里有一种推度的方法:于我身上生起的恶欲,因其本身即是恶欲,必然招致令人厌恶的果报,正如于他人身上生起的恶欲一样。这一道理也适用于其余诸法。另一种推度方法是:想要获得同梵行者喜爱的人,必须断除恶欲,因为这是戒清净的根本因,犹如必须断除自赞毁他等一样。对于其余诸法,也同样依此方法类推。显示巴利原文
183.Anuminitabbanti anu anu minitabbo jānitabbo. Attānaṃ anuminitabbanti ca idaṃ paccatte upayogavacanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘anuminitabbo tuletabbo tīretabbo’’ti. Attānaṃ anuminitabbanti vā attani anumānañāṇaṃ pavattetabbaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ nayo – appiyabhāvāvahā mayi pavattā pāpicchatā pāpicchābhāvato parasmiṃ pavattapāpicchatā viya. Esa nayo sesadhammesupi. Aparo nayo – sabrahmacārīnaṃ piyabhāvaṃ icchantena pāpicchatā pahātabbā sīlavisuddhihetubhāvato attukkaṃsanādippahānaṃ viya. Sesadhammesupi eseva nayo.
184 「应当省察」:即应如「我将不成为恶欲者,也不顺从于恶欲的驱使」这般,在一天当中至少三次,以智慧之眼反复观察,也就是要发起智慧,这是其含义。应当为断除恶欲等而进行省察。而且,此义应从「应当被……」(tabba)这一词缀所表示的「存在、应有」层面来理解;但在注释书中,则从「应作」的层面,并将「自己」作为反身的业格来加以说明。「对于正在修学的人」:即正在修学三学的人。因此注释书说:「意味着对于诸善法而言」。显示巴利原文
184.Paccavekkhitabboti ‘‘na pāpiccho bhavissāmi, na pāpikānaṃ icchānaṃ vasaṃ gato’’tiādinā pati pati divasassa tikkhattuṃ vā ñāṇacakkhunā avekkhitabbaṃ, ñāṇaṃ pavattetabbanti attho. Pāpicchatādīnaṃ pahānaṃ pati avekkhitabbaṃ, ayañca attho tabba-saddassa bhāvatthatāvasena veditabbo, kammatthatāvasena pana aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘attāna’’nti paccatte upayogavacanaṃ katvā vuttaṃ. Sikkhantenāti tissopi sikkhā sikkhantena. Tenāha ‘‘kusalesu dhammesū’’ti.
「污点」:指如同黑芝麻、白芝麻等那样的瑕疵。「一切种类的断除」:指断除一切种类的(烦恼)。「于果到达时」:指当果生起时。「于涅槃到达时」:指因已证得涅槃。「比丘巴帝摩卡」:是指那些被称为「他是沙门,他是比丘」的比丘们的巴帝摩卡,不应视为只属于具足戒者,或只属于出家者。正因为这是比丘巴帝摩卡,所以才说:「在一天之中,应当三次……」等。不可不省察,因为它是令自己清净的绝对唯一之因。显示巴利原文
Tilakanti kāḷatilasetatilāditilakaṃ. Sabbappahānanti sabbappakārappahānaṃ. Phale āgateti phale uppanne. Nibbāne āgateti nibbānassa adhigatattā. Bhikkhupātimokkhanti ‘‘so samaṇo, sa bhikkhū’’ti evaṃ vuttabhikkhūnaṃ pātimokkhaṃ, na upasampannānaṃ eva na pabbajitānaṃ evāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yasmā cidaṃ bhikkhupātimokkhaṃ, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘idaṃ divasassa tikkhattu’’ntiādi. Apaccavekkhituṃ na vaṭṭati attavisuddhiyā ekantahetubhāvato.
《自推度经》释义中,对隐晦义理的阐明,已全部圆满结束。显示巴利原文
Anumānasuttavaṇṇanāya līnatthappakāsanā samattā.
六、《心荒芜经》释义显示巴利原文
6. Cetokhilasuttavaṇṇanā
185 「心荒芜」:心因为这些而变得荒芜、僵滞,因此说「由于心的僵硬状态」。因为当这些生起时,心就变得像不净、令人不悦的田地,又像布满树桩、难以收获丰饶果实的田地,所以说「犹如垃圾,犹如树桩」。此处应连带「心的」一词来连结。「束缚了心」:由于贪爱运作的状态,通过遮断善行的机缘,如同将心抓住、禁锢一般,所以说「好像攥紧拳头一样地抓住」。从词义上说,心被它们以颠倒的方式系缚、抑制,所以它们名为「心的系缚」。若有人具足四种极清净的戒,戒不穿缺等,成就清净,由具足殊胜素质,能轻易引生道果,就像大僧护长老那样,他便能凭依此戒,于此正法、律中获得增长,所以说「以戒而得增长」。若人在圣道生起时,如一棵根基深厚、安稳扎根的树,便于教法中得入增长,所以说「以道而得增广」。若有人已完全证入一切烦恼的般涅槃,成为阿拉汉,由于戒等诸法蕴的圆满而获得广大的正念,所以说「由涅槃而得圆满究竟」。对于第二种解释方式,应当根据上文来了知。显示巴利原文
185. Ceto tehi khilayati thaddhabhāvaṃ āpajjatīti cetokhilā. Tenāha ‘‘cittassa thaddhabhāvā’’ti. Yasmā tehi uppannehi cittaṃ uklāpījātaṃ ṭhānaṃ viya amanuññaṃ khettaṃ viya ca khāṇukanicitaṃ amahapphalaṃ hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘kacavarabhāvā khāṇukabhāvā’’ti. ‘‘Cittassā’’ti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Cittaṃ bandhitvāti taṇhāpavattibhāvato kusalacārassa avasaracajanavasena cittaṃ baddhaṃ viya samorodhetvā. Tenāha ‘‘muṭṭhiyaṃ katvā viya gaṇhantī’’ti. Saddatthato pana ceto virūpaṃ nibandhīyati saṃyamīyati etehīti cetaso vinibandhā yassa catubbidhaṃ sīlaṃ akhaṇḍādibhāvappattiyā suparisuddhaṃ visesabhāgiyattā appakasireneva maggaphalāvahaṃ mahāsaṅgharakkhitattherassa viya, so tādisena sīlena imasmiṃ dhammavinaye vuddhiṃ āpajjissatīti āha ‘‘sīlena vuddhi’’nti. Yassa pana ariyamaggo uppajjanto virūḷhamūlo viya pādapo suppatiṭṭhito, so sāsane virūḷhiṃ āpannoti āha ‘‘maggena virūḷhi’’nti. Yo sabbaso kilesanibbānappatto, so arahā sīlādidhammakkhandhapāripūriyā sativepullappatto hotīti āha ‘‘nibbānena vepulla’’nti. Dutiyavikappe attho vuttanayānusārena veditabbo.
对于诸佛来说,如同法身一样,色身也因不共通于他人,且为无上功德的所依处,对于未能现见者,确实成为生疑之处。因此说:「于色身或功德疑惑」。在此,正如大人相必然含摄随形好等色身功德,以不相离故,故仅说「以三十二种殊胜大人相所庄严」;同样,由无碍智亦必然含摄无量无边、种种差别不可限量的法身功德,因此仅举一切知智便已足够。当知于此并无遗漏任何差别。「他疑惑」:指以「啊,但愿这些功德不存在!」或「但愿这些功德存在!」的希求方式而起疑。前一种是有颠倒意乐之人,后一种是有如实智意乐之人。「正在推寻者」:他想以择法慧去分析那些功德,由于缺乏智慧,便陷入困苦;而困苦的产生,正是由于他不能决断,所以说「他不能决断」。「已消除犹豫」:即「疑」已除遣。「不能获得胜解」:无法以「正是如此」的确信方式,于功德上作出决断。「进入之后」:指以智慧深入观察之后。「净信」:为能生起「世尊由清净圆满的色身功德与法身功德所庄严」之净信。其心浑浊、黑暗,不能清净。此处显示巴利原文
Buddhānaṃ dhammakāyo viya rūpakāyopi anaññasādhāraṇatāya anuttaraguṇādhiṭṭhānatāya ca apaccakkhakārīnaṃ saṃsayavatthu hotiyevāti ‘‘sarīre vā guṇe vā kaṅkhatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha yathā mahāpurisalakkhaṇena anubyañjanādayo rūpakāyaguṇā gahitā eva honti avinābhāvatoti ‘‘dvattiṃsavaralakkhaṇappaṭimaṇḍita’’micceva vuttaṃ, evaṃ anāvaraṇañāṇena sabbepi anantāparimeyyabhedā dhammakāyaguṇā gahitā eva hontīti sabbaññutaññāṇaggahaṇameva kataṃ nānantariyabhāvatoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kaṅkhahīti ‘‘aho vata te guṇā na bhaveyyuṃ, bhaveyyuṃ vā’’ti patthanuppādanavasena kaṅkhati. Purimo hi viparītajjhāsayo, itaro yathābhūtañāṇajjhāsayo. Vicinantoti vicayabhūtāya paññāya te vivecetukāmo tadabhāvato kicchaṃ dukkhaṃ āpajjati, kicchappatti ca tattha nicchetuṃ asamatthatāyevāti āha ‘‘vinicchetuṃ na sakkotī’’ti. Vigatā cikicchāti vicikicchā. Adhimokkhaṃ na paṭilabhatīti ‘‘evameta’’nti okappanavasena guṇesu vinicchayaṃ nādhigacchati. Otaritvāti ñāṇena anupavisitvā. Pasīditunti ‘‘pasannarūpadhammakāyaguṇehi bhagavā’’ti pasīdituṃ. Anāvilo akālusso hotuṃ na sakkoti. ‘‘Kaṅkhatī’’ti iminā dubbalā vimati vuttā, ‘‘vicikicchatī’’ti iminā majjhimā, ‘‘nādhimuccatī’’ti iminā balavatī, ‘‘na sampasīdatī’’ti iminā tividhāyapi vimatiyā vasena uppannacittakālussiyaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
「为了热勤」:从最初即以精进折磨、烧灼烦恼,故名「热勤」,即发勤界,为此目的。「为了修习」:为令杂染法无有机缘生起,如是不断、持续致力于灭除它们,即名「修习」,即出离界,为此目的。故说「为再三致力于善法」。「为了持续」:为能渐次证得更高的殊胜境界,使此精进修行相续不断、无有间断而运转,此状态即是「持续」,即胜勤界,为此目的。「为了精勤」:平正而由这三种界所增强、具摧毁一切烦恼能力的精进,即名「精勤」,为此目的。在此,为了显示:因心中有前述之疑,心尚且不会倾向于热勤,更何况修习等更深义理,故经中才采用此四个词;或谓这是为了毫无遗漏地显示一切殊胜差别。然而也有注释师说:「修习等词实即热勤的同义词」。至此,世尊开示了:由于对导师之疑,心变得僵硬,如垃圾、如树桩,从而招致不善等状态,此即「心荒芜」的状态。对其余几种心荒芜,义理亦同。显示巴利原文
Ātappāyātiādito tapati santapati kileseti ātappaṃ, ārambhadhātu, tadatthāya. Anuyogāyāti yathā saṃkilesadhammānaṃ avasaro na hoti, evaṃ anu anu yuñjanaṃ anuyogo, nikkamadhātu, tadatthāya. Tenāha ‘‘punappunaṃ yogāyā’’ti. Sātaccāyāti yathā uparūpari visesādhigamo hoti, tathā satatassa nirantarapavattassa anuyogassa bhāvo sātaccaṃ, parakkamadhātu, tadatthāya. Padhānāyāti santamevaṃ tividhadhātusaṃvaḍḍhitānubhāvaṃ sabbakilesaviddhaṃsanasamatthaṃ padhānasaṅkhātaṃ vīriyaṃ, tadatthāya. Ettha ca ātappāya cittaṃ na namati yathāvuttakaṅkhāvasena, pageva anuyogādiatthanti dassetuṃ cattāripi padāni gahitāni, anavasesavisesadassanatthaṃ vā. Keci pana ‘‘ātappavevacanāneva anuyogādipadānī’’ti vadanti. Ettāvatā bhagavā satthari kaṅkhāya cittassa thaddhakacavarakhāṇukabhāvena akusalabhāvādiāpādanato cetokhilabhāvaṃ dasseti. Sesesupi eseva nayo.
由于“学”一词兼摄了行道正法,故注释说:“于教法及于证法”。为显疑于教法何处生起,才说“八万四千法蕴”等。须知这仅是举例,因也有人以教法辗转能引生证悟等为理由,而对教法生疑。并且,正如对证法所说的疑那样,应知此疑在证得法上同样会生起。确实,有人说“修习遍禅等,禅那能成就”,“遍禅的果报是无色界定,慈等的果报是第四梵住”,他们便以此方式处于疑中。于此,应知疑唯在九种出世间法的施设概念上生起,因为出世间法并非杂染法。显示巴利原文
Sikkhāggahaṇena paṭipattisaddhammassa gahitattā vuttaṃ ‘‘pariyattidhamme ca paṭivedhadhamme cā’’ti. Pariyattidhamme yattha kaṅkhāya sambhavo, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘caturāsīti dhammakkhandhasahassānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tayidaṃ nidassanamattaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ paramparāya paṭivedhāvahabhāvādivasenapi ekaccānaṃ tattha saṃsayuppattito. Yathā ca paṭivedhe kaṅkhā vuttā, evaṃ adhigamadhammepi pavattatīti veditabbā. Tathā hi ekacce ‘‘kasiṇādibhāvanāya jhānāni ijjhantī’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Kasiṇanissando āruppāti, mettādinissando catutthabrahmavihāro’’ti evamādinā kaṅkhatiyevāti. Ettha ca navalokuttaresu paññattiyaṃyeva kaṅkhāpavatti veditabbā asaṃkilesikattā lokuttaradhammānaṃ.
“如是”:即那种正确的行道,也就是所谓的善行道、正直行道、真实行道、正当行道。应知,增上戒学等是出世间法的随顺法。正因如此,它们与道果诸学之间的差别才得以确立。正如注释所说:“由于‘学’一词摄取了行道正法。”于此,疑因对三种所依事及学的功德不能信解、不能净信,处于不修行的状态,心便僵硬;又因寻求、徘徊,心变得如秽物、如树桩。同样地,应知:由于对同梵行者的怨恨、粗暴等,心会变得僵硬;由于伤害、对立等,心会变得如秽物、如树桩。涉及圣僧团的疑,并不存在任何针对个人的疑,故唯取涉及僧团的疑。而且,此心荒芜的教导是就教法而说,因此亦只取涉及同梵行者的愤怒。显示巴利原文
Evarūpanti edisaṃ suppaṭipatti-ujuppaṭipatti-ñāyappaṭipatti-sāmīcippaṭipatti-saṅkhātaṃ sammāpaṭipadaṃ. Adhisīlasikkhādayo lokuttaradhammassa anudhammabhūtā veditabbā. Evañhi maggaphalasikkhāhi imāsaṃ viseso siddho hoti. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘sikkhāggahaṇena paṭipattisaddhammassa gahitattā’’ti. Ettha ca yathā vicikicchā vatthuttayassa sikkhāya ca guṇesu anadhimuccanaasampasīdanavasena appaṭipattibhāvato cittassa thaddhabhāvo āsappanaparisappanavasena pavattiyā kacavarakhāṇukabhāvo ca, evaṃ sabrahmacārīsu āghātacaṇḍikkādivasena cittassa thaddhabhāvo ca upahananavirujjhanādivasena kacavarakhāṇukabhāvo ca veditabbo. Ariyasaṅghavisayā vicikicchā, puggalavisayā kāci natthīti saṅghavisayāva gahitā, sāsanikavasena cāyaṃ cetokhiladesanāti sabrahmacārīvisayova kopo gahito.
186 如同所依欲,烦恼欲也是可味著、可喜爱的,故注释说:“于烦恼欲亦然”。因此世尊说:“色爱于世,是可爱相、可乐相,此爱即于此中生,即于此中住”等。在对欲的解说中,一切三界诸法因可欲求的义理都称为“欲”,但此处的“欲”一词,唯取作为强力欲贪基础的那些事物。由于这些事物具有可系缚的所缘性质,如同对自己身体的单独执取一般,对于外在其他人的种种色法,亦以“聚集”的义理而执取,故注释师说:“‘于色’是指外部的色法”。因为,正如对五种欲功德的染着会导致系缚,障碍禅那等殊胜证得;对自己身体的贪恋,以及对外在资具、亲眷、朋友等的贪恋,也是如此。然而,有部分注释师却在此处增益说:“‘于色’是指在色界禅那中”等等。此不合理,因为经文是以“心的系缚”的状态,来执取那些系缚禅那证得、以及令戒染污的事物。显示巴利原文
186. Yathā vatthukāmo, evaṃ kilesakāmopi assādanīyo evāti ‘‘kilesakāmepī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘rūpataṇhā loke piyarūpaṃ sātarūpaṃ, etthesā taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjati, ettha nivisamānā nivisatī’’tiādi (dī. ni. 2.400; ma. ni. 1.133; vibha. 203). Kāmaniddese (mahāni. 1) sabbepi tebhūmakā dhammā kāmanīyaṭṭhena ‘‘kāmā’’ti vuttā, balavakāmarāgavatthubhūtāyevettha kāmaggahaṇena gahitāti. Vinibaddhavatthubhāvena yathā visuṃ attano kāyo gahito, tathā paresaṃ tathārūpā rūpadhammā samūhaṭṭhenāti āha ‘‘rūpeti bahiddhārūpe’’ti. Yathā hi pañcakāmaguṇiko rāgo jhānādivisesādhigamassa vinibaddhāya saṃvattati, evaṃ attano kāye apekkhā bahiddhā ca sakaparikkhārañātimittādīsu apekkhāti. Keci panettha ‘‘rūpeti rūpajjhāne’’tiādinā papañcenti. Tadayuttaṃ jhānādhigamavinibaddhānaṃ sīlassa ca saṃkilesabhūtānaṃ cetovinibaddhabhāvena gahitattā.
‘足量’:指渴望多少,就取用多少。因此说:‘想要多少,便取用那么多。’‘足量’即是指吃饱肚子为止的进食。一者,因为这样不会(因未消化而)吐出;二者,因为填满了(腹部)。‘床座乐’:指依靠床座而产生的快乐。‘躺卧乐’:指通过翻身侧卧而产生的快乐。‘睡眠乐’:指由睡眠产生的快乐。显示巴利原文
Yāvadatthanti yāva attheti abhikaṅkhati, tāva. Tenāha ‘‘yattakaṃ icchati, tattaka’’nti. Nti yāvadatthaṃ udarapūraṃ bhuttaṃ. Avadehanato pūraṇato. Seyyasukhanti seyyaṃ paṭicca uppajjanakasukhaṃ. Passasukhanti passānaṃ samparivattanena uppajjanakasukhaṃ. Niddāsukhanti niddāyanena uppajjanakasukhaṃ.
‘以戒……’等语句,显示了内心希求的方式。‘受持头陀支等誓愿’:即实践头陀支等誓愿。‘苦行’:指精进的发起。因为这种精进能折磨烦恼、抑制烦恼,故称为苦行。显示巴利原文
Sīlenātiādi patthanākāradassanaṃ. Vatasamādānanti dhutaṅgādivatānuṭṭhānaṃ. Tapoti vīriyārambho. So hi kilesānaṃ tapanaṭṭhena niggaṇhanaṭṭhena tapacaraṇanti vuttaṃ.
189 「依止于欲」:即以欲为重心,以欲为最胜,以欲为先导而发起运作,如此名为依止于欲。由最胜之义,它成为精勤的基础,或说达到精勤的状态,故称为「精勤之足」。「那些法」:指依止于欲而生起的定,以及被称为「精勤行」的精进。「具足」:即与这些法相应。由于有成就之义,故名为「成就」;或由于完成、获得之义,这便是该词的含义。而这成就的基础即是「足」,指它的根基、作为近依之处。或者也可以这样理解:通过它,人们得以成就、增长、达到殊胜,所以称为成就;而此成就本身又是更上殊胜法的依止处,故称为足。因此(注释师)说:「‘成就所成之足’,或者‘成就本身就是足’,所以称为成就足。」对于其余(的成就足)也应如此理解。这里的「它」这个词,即指成就足。「意义被阐明」:是指这样解释乃为使其意义明晰,因此在《清净道论大复注》中,应当采纳对该意义的审察。由于成就足以定和精勤为主导,所以说:「(这里)说明的是镇伏断。」对于那些尚未生起的善法,为了促使它生起;对于那些已经生起的善法,为了让它……显示巴利原文
189.Chandaṃ nissāyāti chandaṃ dhuraṃ, chandaṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ, chandaṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ katvā pavattivasena chandaṃ nissāya. Jeṭṭhakaṭṭhena padhānabhūtā, padhānabhāvaṃ vā pattāti padhānabhūtā. Tehi dhammehīti chandanissayena pavattasamādhinā ceva ‘‘padhānasaṅkhāro’’ti vuttavīriyena ca. Upetanti sampayuttaṃ. Ijjhanaṭṭhena iddhi, nipphattiatthena paṭilābhaṭṭhena cāti attho, tassā iddhiyā pādaṃ pādakaṃ padaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ. Atha vā ijjhanti tāya iddhā vuddhā ukkaṃsagatā hontīti iddhi, sāva uparivisesānaṃ adhiṭṭhānabhāvato pādo. Tenāha ‘‘iddhibhūtaṃ vā pādanti iddhipāda’’nti. Sesesupīti vīriyiddhipādādīsupi. Assāti iddhipādassa. Attho dīpitoti dīpanatthaṃ kataṃ, tasmā visuddhimaggasaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ (visuddhi. mahāṭī. 2.369) tassa atthavicāro gahetabbo. Iddhipādānaṃ samādhipadhānattā vuttaṃ ‘‘vikkhambhanappahānaṃ kathita’’nti. Tesaṃ tesaṃ kusaladhammānaṃ anuppannānaṃ uppādanakiriyāya uppannānaṃ paribrūhanakiriyāya ussahanato ussoḷhī, thāmappattā parakkamadhātu. Sā pana catunnaṃ iddhipādānaṃ visesapaccayabhūtā te upādāya ‘‘pañcamī’’ti vuttā, sā ca yasmā samathavipassanābhāvanāsu tattha caādimajjhapariyosānesu sādhetabbaṃ vīriyaṃ, tasmā āha ‘‘ussoḷhīti sabbattha kattabbavīriyaṃ dassetī’’ti. Pubbabhāgiyasamathavipassanāsādhanaṃ pahātabbadhammavibhāgena bhinditvā āha ‘‘pañca cetokhilappahānāni pañca vinibandhappahānānī’’ti. Bhabboti yutto arahati nipphattiyā. Ñāṇenāti maggañāṇena. Kilesabhedāyāti kilesānaṃ samucchindanāya. Khemassāti anupaddavassa.
「于揣测义」:即“是否可能会这样呢?”所表示的那种分别、可能性的意思。「如此地」:并不是只说“如此”这一个数目,而是将它和另一个数目合在一起说的方式,在世间是一种通畅的表达,就像说“两滴或三滴水”一样。「妥善地孵卧」:指母鸡不用脚等部位对鸡蛋造成任何伤害,为了防范风等外来的危险,妥善地卧在蛋上孵蛋。「令其得热」:就是为了蒸发掉蛋里的湿气,用自己身体的体温使蛋变得温热。因此才说:“使它们变温热了”。「妥善地培育」:就是妥善地、完全地以母鸡抱窝的方式去孵化。因此才说:“令它们获得了母鸡的气味”。应知,这种培育母鸡气味的过程,是通过妥善地孵卧和妥善地温热才得以成就的,所以称为“随后成就的”。「借由」:指借着与母鸡一起存在的各种条件而成就,所以说“通过完成了三种动作”。虽然母鸡并不会真的生起“啊!但愿这些小鸡”这样的愿望,但因为各种条件都已具足,经文应当这样理解:“它们应当能够破壳而出”。为什么说“应当能够”呢?注释师解释说:“因为它们确实能。”显示巴利原文
Sambhāvanattheti (sārattha. ṭī. 1.11; a. ni. ṭī. 3.7.71) ‘‘api nāmevaṃ siyā’’ti vikappanattho sambhāvanattho. Evaṃ hīti evaṃ ekameva saṅkhyaṃ avatvā aparāya saṅkhyāya saddhiṃ vacanaṃ loke siliṭṭhavacanaṃ hoti yathā ‘‘dve vā tīṇi vā udakaphusitānī’’ti. Sammā adhisayitānīti pādādīhi attanā nesaṃ kiñci upaghātaṃ akarontiyā bahivātādiparissayapariharaṇatthaṃ sammadeva upari sayitāni. Utuṃ gāhāpentiyāti tesaṃ allasinehapariyādānatthaṃ attano kāyusmāvasena utuṃ gaṇhāpentiyā. Tenāha ‘‘usmīkatānī’’ti. Sammā paribhāvitānīti sammadeva sabbaso kukkuṭavāsanāya vāsitāni. Tenāha ‘‘kukkuṭagandhaṃ gāhāpitānī’’ti. Ayañca kukkuṭagandhaparibhāvanā sammāadhisayanasammāparisedananipphattiyā ‘‘anunipphādī’’ti (sārattha. ṭī. 1.11) daṭṭhabbā. Tehi pana saddhiṃyeva ijjhanato vuttaṃ ‘‘tividhakiriyākaraṇenā’’ti. Kiñcāpi na evaṃ ‘‘aho vatime’’tiādinā icchā uppajjeyya, kāraṇassa pana sampāditattā atha kho bhabbāva abhinibbhijjitunti yojanā . Kasmā bhabbāti āha ‘‘te hi yasmā tāyā’’tiādi. Ettha yathā kapālassa tanutā ālokassa anto paññāyamānassa kāraṇaṃ, tathā kapālassa tanutāya nakhasikhāmukhatuṇḍakānaṃ kharatāya ca allasinehassa pariyādānaṃ kāraṇavacananti daṭṭhabbaṃ, tasmāti ālokassa anto paññāyamānato, sayañca paripākagatattā.
「譬喻的成就」:指譬喻所表达的意义,与所譬喻的事情之间,契合得十分妥当。「以义」:即通过所譬喻之事的意义。正如母鸡对鸡蛋所做的三种动作,是小鸡能从蛋壳里出来的根本原因;同样,一位比丘具足“奋发及十五支”,也是他能从无明蛋壳中出来的根本原因,因此说:“那只母鸡……具足的状态”。因为无明与蛋壳在覆盖、遮蔽上相似,所以通过强大的观力,使无明的蛋壳变薄;而当观智成熟之际,便是转入出起道之时,此时此观智犹如怀上了道智的胎儿,因此说:“入胎之时”。「属于神通的部分」:这是指属于世间神通的部分。因为出世间神通才能彻底击破无明的蛋壳。在这首偈颂中,“击破无明之蛋壳”这句话,是形容借着这种教法的巧妙表达,去冲击存在于应受教化者生命相续中的无明硬壳,使它无法再安住在原来的地方。显示巴利原文
Opammasampaṭipādananti opammatthassa upameyyena sammadeva paṭipādanaṃ. Atthenāti upameyyatthena. Yathā kukkuṭiyā aṇḍesu tividhakiriyāya karaṇaṃ kukkuṭacchāpakānaṃ aṇḍakosato nikkhamanassa mūlakāraṇaṃ, evaṃ bhikkhuno ussoḷhīpannarasāni aṅgāni avijjaṇḍakosato nikkhamanassa mūlakāraṇanti āha ‘‘tassā kukkuṭiyā…pe… samannāgatabhāvo’’ti. Paṭicchādanasāmaññena avijjāya aṇḍakosasadisatāya balavavipassanāvasena avijjaṇḍakosassa tanubhāvo, vipassanāñāṇassa pariṇāmakālo vuṭṭhānagāminibhāvāpatti, tadā ca sā maggañāṇagabbhaṃ dhārentī viya hotīti āha ‘‘gabbhaggahaṇakālo’’ti. Abhiññāpakkheti lokiyābhiññāpakkhe. Lokuttarābhiññā hi avijjaṇḍakosaṃ padālikāti. Gāthāya avijjaṇḍakosaṃ paharatīti desanāvilāsena vineyyasantānagataṃ avijjaṇḍakosaṃ ghaṭṭeti, yathāṭhāne ṭhātuṃ na deti.
「审察断」:指以彼分断为前导的镇伏断。因为在经文中,已经取用了前行部分的神足,所以说:“以神足说明了镇伏断。”然而,由于经文有“具足奋发及十五支的比丘,堪能趋向厌离……”等说法,所以出世间神足其实已经通过“正觉”一词被包含在内了。「于道中已至」:指对于那位具足奋发及十五支的比丘,当策励他修观时,道便在他的相续中生起;或者在经文中,通过“破壳”、“正觉”等词来说明“于道中已至”。而「于果中已至」的意思,也应按前面的方式去理解。不过,因为涅槃在经文中并未被直接提到,所以没有取用出离断。其余的内容就容易理解了。显示巴利原文
Paṭisaṅkhānappahānanti tadaṅgappahānapubbakaṃ vikkhambhanappahānaṃ. Pubbabhāgiyā iddhipādā pāḷiyaṃ gahitāti ‘‘iddhipādehi vikkhambhanappahāna’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ussoḷhipannarasaṅgasamannāgato bhikkhu bhabbo abhinibbidāyā’’tiādivacanato (ma. ni. 1.189) lokuttariddhipādā pana sambodhaggahaṇeneva gahitā. Magge āgateti ussoḷhīpannarasaṅgasamannāgatassa bhikkhuno vipassanaṃ ussukkāpayato magge āgate uppanne, pāḷiyaṃ vā abhinibbhidāsambodhaggahaṇehi magge āgate. Phale āgateti etthāpi vuttanayena attho veditabbo. Nibbānassa pana pāḷiyaṃ anāgatattā nissaraṇappahānaṃ na gahitaṃ. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
第七 《林薮经》注疏显示巴利原文
7. Vanapatthapariyāyasuttavaṇṇanā
190 “Vanīyati”,被希求远离者所渴求、所亲近;又或“vanute”,仿佛为令他们安住自身成就而恳请一般,故称为“林”(vana)。“Patiṭṭhanti ettha”,希求远离者依所期之殊胜证得而住立于此,故称为“处”(pattha)。于林中、密林处之坐卧具,即“林薮”(vanapattha)。“Pariyāyati”,取自行果而转起,故“pariyāya”指原因。因此说“林薮教说”,即林薮之原因。何以故?于依彼林薮而住者,此林薮乃是亲近之因。故佛说“依林薮而住”。再者,“pariyāyati”,安立所应说之义理,故“pariyāya”亦指教说。以林薮为缘所起之教说,即是林薮教说;于彼教说中,两处言及林薮,仅为代表其特征,因村落等处,于此亦可为原因及教说之对象。显示巴利原文
190. Vanīyati vivekakāmehi bhajīyati, vanute vā te attasampattiyā vasanatthāya yācanto viya hotīti vanaṃ, patiṭṭhanti ettha vivekakāmā yathādhippetavisesādhigamenāti patthaṃ, vanesu patthaṃ gahanaṭṭhāne senāsanaṃ vanapatthaṃ. Pariyāyati attano phalaṃ pariggahetvā vattatīti pariyāyo, kāraṇanti āha ‘‘vanapatthapariyāyanti vanapatthakāraṇa’’nti. Vanapatthañhi taṃ upanissāya viharato upanissayakāraṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘vanapatthaṃ upanissāya viharatī’’ti. Pariyāyati desetabbamatthaṃ patiṭṭhapetīti pariyāyo, desanā. Vanapatthaṃ ārabbha pavattā desanā vanapatthadesanā, taṃ, ubhayatthāpi vanapatthaggahaṇaṃ lakkhaṇamattaṃ gāmādīnampettha kāraṇabhāvassa, desanāya visayabhāvassa ca labbhamānattā.
191 “Nissāya”,即依止,意为作为远离住处的依止。“未呈现”等,显示该林薮中坐卧具之适宜性有所缺乏,或显示季节、人、闻法之适宜性亦有所缺。“生命的资具”(jīvitasambhārā),即维持生命相续所需的资具、缘。“应被集起”(samudānetabbā),应通过如法、无过的捡拾等行,向上获取、达成。而这些如此集得之时,便称为“已集得”,故说“应被集得”(samāharitabbā)。“难生”(dukkhena uppajjanti),即不易获得,以此显示食物适宜等之缺乏。“夜间时分或日间时分”本为处格,此处用作业格,故说“夜间时分或日间时分”。唯应于夜间离去,因沙门法于彼处不成就故。显示巴利原文
191.Nissāyāti apassāya, vivekavāsassa apassayaṃ katvāti attho. Na upaṭṭhātītiādīhi tasmiṃ vanapatthe senāsanasappāyābhāvaṃ, utupuggaladhammassavanasappāyābhāvampi vā dasseti. Jīvitasambhārāti (a. ni. ṭī. 3.9.6) jīvitappavattiyā sambhārā paccayā. Samudānetabbāti sammā ñāyena anavajjauñchācariyādinā uddhaṃ uddhaṃ ānetabbā pāpuṇitabbā. Te pana tathā samudānitā samāhaṭā nāma hontīti āha ‘‘samāharitabbā’’ti. Dukkhena uppajjantīti sulabhuppādā na honti. Etena bhojanasappāyādiabhāvaṃ dasseti. Rattibhāgaṃ vā divasabhāgaṃ vāti bhummatthe upayogavacananti āha ‘‘rattikoṭṭhāse vā divasakoṭṭhāse vā’’ti. Rattiṃyeva pakkamitabbaṃ samaṇadhammassa tattha anipphajjanato.
192-3 “Saṅkhāpi”,即使作如是思择:“我为何而出家?此目标于此地不能成就;然而衣等却能获得。我并非为衣等而出家,我留在此处何用?”于紧接着的段落中,“saṅkhāpi”意为即使思择:“我为何而出家?此目标于此地得以成就;然而衣等却不可获得。我并非为衣等而出家。”因此说“了知沙门法成就之状态后”。显示巴利原文
192-3.Saṅkhāpīti ‘‘yadatthamahaṃ pabbajito, na metaṃ idha nipphajjati, cīvarādi pana samudāgacchati, nāhaṃ tadatthaṃ pabbajito, kiṃ me idha vāsenā’’ti paṭisaṅkhāyapi. Anantaravāre saṅkhāpīti ‘‘yadatthamahaṃ pabbajito, taṃ me idha nipphajjati, cīvarādi pana na samudāgacchati, nāhaṃ tadatthaṃ pabbajito’’ti paṭisaṅkhāyapīti attho. Tenāha ‘‘samaṇadhammassa nipphajjanabhāvaṃ jānitvā’’ti.
195-7 “那补特伽罗”一词与“不应被跟随”相关联,意指不应不辞而别、不应跟随。因为即使相隔遥远,关联仍可成立。将“那补特伽罗”从主格转为业格,意思是对于那位补特伽罗,不告辞便离去。这是依据义理而作的变格。“应告辞后离去”一句也是同样情况。而教导“应告辞后离去”,是为了彰显知恩与感恩。显示巴利原文
195-7.Sopuggalo anāpucchā pakkamitabbaṃ, nānubandhitabboti ‘‘so puggalo’’ti padassa ‘‘nānubandhitabbo’’ti iminā sambandho. Yassa yena hi sambandho, dūraṭṭhenapi so bhavati . Taṃ puggalanti ‘‘so puggalo’’ti paccattavacanaṃ upayogavasena pariṇāmetvā taṃ puggalaṃ anāpucchā pakkamitabbanti attho. Atthavasena hi vibhattivipariṇāmoti. Taṃ āpucchā pakkamitabbanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Āpucchā pakkamitabbanti ca kataññutakataveditāya niyojanaṃ.
198 “这样的”:指依止它,比丘只应期许功德增长,而于资具不致劳苦;这样的住处,即使需以惩罚等方式整肃,也不应舍离。因此说“即使……”等等。显示巴利原文
198.Evarūpoti yaṃ nissāya bhikkhuno guṇehi vuddhiyeva pāṭikaṅkhā, paccayehi ca na parissamo, evarūpo daṇḍakammādīhi niggaṇhāti cepi, na pariccajitabboti dasseti ‘‘sacepī’’tiādinā.
第八 《蜜丸经》注疏显示巴利原文
8. Madhupiṇḍikasuttavaṇṇanā
199 “原生林”:指自然生长的树林,因此称为“非种植的”。“为了隐居”:即为了达到心的独一状态;或者指,从各种散乱所缘中收回心,系念于最极寂静的涅槃,以果等至而令心安住。“手中有杖者”:为说明他为何被称为“杖手”,故说“这个人……”等。“以杖维生”:意即对杖有特别的嗜好。由于他沉迷于杖,且精通杖术,以杖技闻名,因此总是持杖而行。“为除腿脚疲劳”:为了消除在王殿久坐所引起的腿脚疲劳。“偶然外出”:即随意外出,并非经常出行。“靠着”:即紧紧依靠而站立。为说明他被称为“靠着”的状态,故说“如同牧牛童……”等。显示巴利原文
199.Jātivananti sayaṃjātaṃ vanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘aropima’’nti. Paṭisallānatthāyāti ekībhāvatthāya, puthuttārammaṇato vā cittaṃ paṭinivattetvā accantasante nibbāne phalasamāpattivasena allīyāpanatthaṃ. Daṇḍo pāṇimhi assāti daṇḍapāṇi. Yathā so ‘‘daṇḍapāṇī’’ti vuccati, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ayañhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Daṇḍavittatāyāti daṇḍe soṇḍatāya. So hi daṇḍapasuto daṇḍasippe ca sukusalo tattha pākaṭo paññāto, tasmā daṇḍaṃ gahetvāva vicarati. Jaṅghākilamathavinodanatthanti rājasabhāya ciranisajjāya uppannajaṅghāparissamassa apanayanatthaṃ. Adhiccanikkhamanoti yādicchakanikkhamano, na abhiṇhanikkhamano. Olubbhāti sannirumbhitvā ṭhito. Yathā so ‘‘olubbhā’’ti vutto, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘gopālakadārako viyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
200 “言说”(vādo),即依之而言说;“见”(diṭṭhi),即见解。因此问:“持什么言论者?持什么见解者?”(kiṃ vādīti, kiṃ diṭṭhiko)。“宣说什么”(kimakkhāyī),意为“宣说什么?是哪种法说者?”“以不恭敬的心”(acittīkārena),便是带着轻视。为说明为何这样发问,才说了“为何”(kasmā)等语。“就让那个(家庭)毁灭吧”(nassatetanti),意为“愿那家庭毁灭”。显示巴利原文
200. Vadanti etenāti vādo, diṭṭhīti āha ‘‘kiṃ vādīti, kiṃ diṭṭhiko’’ti? Kimakkhāyīti kimācikkhako, kīdisadhammakatho? Acittīkārenāti anādarena. Tathāpucchane kāraṇaṃ dassento ‘‘kasmā’’tiādimāha. Nassatetanti nassatu etaṃ kulaṃ.
“不知义”(atthaṃ na jānāti):即使他对义有一部分了解,也可能错误执取,并顽固坚持、起对抗心。如此会使他长夜受苦、受损,因此世尊希望他能了知意义。接下来,“争论性谈话”(viggāhikakathaṃ),即引发争执的谈话,意思是粗暴的谈话(sārambhakathaṃ)。有人会责难:“除了世尊,世间不是还有许多沙门、婆罗门持有各种不同的见解吗?”为此说到“如来”(tathāgato)等。如来不争论,因为引发争论的爱欲与见取已被道彻底断除;其余人则未断除,所以世间会与如来争论。如实说法的法说者不会与法说者争论,因他们毫无争论的意欲;非法说者却不然,他们不把法说者当回事,依然要与之争论。因此经中说:“比丘们,法说者在世间不和任何人争论。”而非法说者由于未断除争论的根源,必定会争论,经中也说:“比丘们,正是非法说者才会争论。”显示巴利原文
Atthaṃna jānātīti atthaṃ ce ekadesena jāneyya, taṃ micchā gahetvā paṭippharitvāpi tiṭṭheyya. Tassa dīgharattaṃ ahitāya dukkhāyāti tadassa atthājānanaṃ bhagavatā icchitaṃ. Viggāhikakathanti viggahakathaṃ, sārambhakathanti attho. Nanu bhagavatā saddhiṃ loke puthū samaṇabrāhmaṇā nānāvādā santīti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘tathāgato hī’’tiādi. Na vivadati vivādahetukānaṃ kāmadiṭṭhijjhosānānaṃ maggeneva samugghātitattā, tadabhāvato pana loko tathāgatena vivadati. Dhammavādī yathābhūtavādī dhammavādīhi na vivadati tesaṃ vivaditukāmatāya eva abhāvato, adhammavādī pana tiṇāyapi namaññamāno tehi kiñci vivadati. Tenāha ‘‘na, bhikkhave, dhammavādī kenaci lokasmiṃ vivadatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.94). Adhammavādī pana asamucchinnavivādahetukattā vivadateva. Tathā cāha ‘‘adhammavādīva kho, bhikkhave, vivadatī’’ti.
这里的「如同」(yathā)一词,就像在“他了知未生起的爱欲如何生起”(《增支部》)中一样,表示原因,所以解释为「以什么原因」(yena kāraṇena)。或者这里的“如同”表示原因的相状,而从意义上说因相就是原因,所以也说“以什么原因”。“这样吗?那样吗?”不断生起,所以叫「疑惑」(kathaṃkathā),也就是疑(vicikicchā)。没有这种疑惑的人,就是「无疑惑者」(akathaṃkathī),指那个无疑惑的人。世尊用不来道断除了追悔与对所造恶事的追悔(vippaṭisārakukkuccaṃ),用最高道断除了身体行为的追悔(hatthapādakukkuccaṃ),因为他证得了独特法(āveṇikadhammā)。“一处又一处生起的有”(bhavābhavo)在这里指“一次又一次的有”,所以解释为「在再三的有之中」(punappunabbhave)。或者,如同“防护与非防护”、“果与非果”那样,小与大之“有”被称为「有与非有」(bhavābhavo),所以又解释为「在低劣或殊胜的有之中」(hīnapaṇīte vā bhave)。有增长到极点,就称为“非有”(abhavo),像“无学之法”(asekkhā dhammā)那种情况。“烦恼想”(kilesasaññā)指的是欲想等;或者烦恼本身就用了“想”这个名字,像“断除想,只证得甘露”这类说法里那样。「他显得是一位诸漏尽者」(attano khīṇāsavabhāvaṃ dīpeti)这句话,也显示他为他人说法,让他们也能成为那样,这个意思也应知道。「取出后让游戏」(nīharitvā kīḷāpetvā)就是取出来并且让他游戏,或者通过取出的方式来让他游戏。「三枝的」(tivisākha)指的是额头上像三道皱眉那样的额部皱纹(nalāṭika)。显示巴利原文
Yathā ca panāti ettha yathā-saddo ‘‘yathā ca anuppannassa kāmacchandassa uppādo hoti, tañca pajānātī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 3.122) viya kāraṇatthoti āha ‘‘yena kāraṇenā’’ti. Kāraṇākāro vā idha yathā-saddena vutto, so pana atthato kāraṇamevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘yena kāraṇenā’’ti. ‘‘Idaṃ kathaṃ idaṃ kathaṃ’’ti pavattanato kathaṃkathā, vicikicchā. Sā yassa natthi, so akathaṃkathī, taṃ akathaṃkathiṃ. Vippaṭisārakukkuccaṃ bhagavatā anāgāmimaggeneva chinnaṃ, hatthapādakukkuccaṃ aggamaggena āveṇikadhammādhigamato. Aparāparaṃ uppajjanakabhavo ‘‘bhavābhavo’’ti idhādhippetoti āha ‘‘punappunabbhave’’ti. Saṃvarāsaṃvaro phalāphalaṃ viya khuddakamahanto bhavo ‘‘bhavābhavo’’ti vuttoti āha ‘‘hīnapaṇīte vā bhave’’ti. Bhavo vuḍḍhippatto ‘‘abhavo’’ti vuccati yathā ‘‘asekkhā dhammā’’ti (dha. sa. 11.tikamātikā). Kilesasaññāti kāmasaññādike vadati. Kilesā eva vā saññānāmena vuttā ‘‘saññā pahāya amataṃ eva pāpuṇātī’’tiādīsu viya. Attano khīṇāsavabhāvaṃ dīpetīti imināva paresañca tathattāya dhammaṃ desetīti ayampi attho vibhāvitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Nīharitvā kīḷāpetvāti nīharitvā ceva kīḷāpetvā ca, nīharaṇavasena vā kīḷāpetvā. Tivisākhanti tibhaṅgabhākuṭi viya nalāṭe jātattā nalāṭikaṃ.
201 「为何呢」(kintinu kho) 是指“出于什么原因?”「把握了连接」(anusandhiṃ gahetvā) 即提出了提问的关联。「从何因而起」(yatonidānanti) 意为“以此为因”,也就是“由于这个原因”。因为前句未省略词尾而加以解说,正是“以内在六处、外在六处等为因”之意。「虚妄分别」(saṅkhāti koṭṭhāsā):因为它们以虚妄的状态被了知,所以称为“虚妄分别”,因此说“虚妄分别即是类别”。虽然此处慢也属于虚妄,但就其执取欢喜的自性而言,故解释为“与渴爱、慢、见之虚妄相应的想”。下文将会说到“应欢喜的”等。「转起」(samudācaranti) 是指全然向上、向上遍取之后而起。由于此处的‘ākāra’一词含有范围的意义,依此关系,“人”(purisaṃ) 取对格,正如“比丘们,如来、阿拉汉、正自觉者有两种寻现起”(《如是语》)。渴爱等不超越各自转起的形态,以反复串习的方式向上转起,因此它们被称为「虚妄分别之想」。显示巴利原文
201.Kintinu khoti kiṃ kāraṇenāti attho. Anusandhiṃ gahetvāti pucchānusandhiṃ uṭṭhapetvā. Yatonidānanti yaṃnidānaṃ, yaṃkāraṇāti vuttaṃ hoti. Purimapade hi vibhatti alopaṃ katvā niddeso, chaajjhattikabāhirāyatanādinidānanti ayameva attho. Saṅkhāyanti saṅkhābhāvena ñāyantīti saṅkhāti āha ‘‘saṅkhāti koṭṭhāsā’’ti. Kāmañcettha mānopi papañco, abhinandanasabhāve eva pana gaṇhanto ‘‘taṇhāmānadiṭṭhipapañcasampayuttā’’ti āha. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘abhinanditabba’’ntiādi. Samudācarantīti sabbaso uddhaṃ uddhaṃ pariyādāya pavattanti. Mariyādattho hi ayamākāro, tena ca yogena purisanti upayogavacanaṃ yathā ‘‘tathāgataṃ, bhikkhave, arahantaṃ sammāsambuddhaṃ dve vitakkā samudācarantī’’ti (itivu. 38). Taṇhādayo ca yathāsakaṃ pavattiākāraṃ avilaṅghantiyo āsevanavasena uparūpari pavattanti. Tathā hi tā ‘‘papañcasaṅkhā’’ti vuttā.
「在原因上」(kāraṇeti) 即于转起的缘上。「即使一处……也没有」(ekāyatanampi …pe… natthi):眼处等任何一个处,都没有可欢喜、可称说、可执取的对象。“难道不是没有吗?为何说‘如果没有’呢?”的确是没有,但对于未断除欢喜、称说、执取的凡夫而言,诸处会显现为可欢喜等的样态,因此对他们不能说“没有”;而对于已断除欢喜等的人,则全然不存在,所以才说“如果没有”。「我、我所」(ahaṃ mamanti):对于应欢喜的对象,以见的欢喜计执为“我”,以渴爱的欢喜计执为“我所”,也就是应喜好。「应当称说」(abhivaditabbanti) 即应以执取、安立的方式而说,因此说“应当说为‘我、我所’”。「执取之后」(ajjhosāya) 指见与渴爱渗入所依之后,将两种执取视为不与他人共的专属物,因此说“吞下之后、彻底确定之后”。「凭此」(etenāti) 就是凭藉“若在这里没有”等语句。「在这里」(etthāti) 即于诸处之中。通过指出渴爱等无所依,说明显示巴利原文
Kāraṇeti pavattipaccaye. Ekāyatanampi …pe… natthīti cakkhāyatanādi ekampi āyatanaṃ abhinanditabbaṃ abhivaditabbaṃ ajjhositabbañca natthi ce, nanu natthi eva, kasmā ‘‘natthi ce’’ti vuttanti? Saccaṃ natthi, appahīnābhinandanābhivadanaajjhosānānaṃ pana puthujjanānaṃ abhinanditabbādippakārāni āyatanāni hontīti tesaṃ na sakkā natthīti vattu, pahīnābhinandanādīnaṃ pana sabbathā natthīti ‘‘natthi ce’’ti vuttaṃ. Ahaṃ mamanti abhinanditabbanti diṭṭhābhinandanāya ‘‘aha’’nti taṇhābhinandanāya ‘‘mama’’nti rocetabbaṃ. Abhivaditabbanti abhinivisanasamuṭṭhāpanavasena vattabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘ahaṃ mamanti vattabba’’nti. Ajjhositvāti diṭṭhi taṇhā vatthuṃ anupavisitvā gāhadvayaṃ anaññasādhāraṇaṃ viya katvā. Tenāha ‘‘gilitvā pariniṭṭhapetvā’’ti. Etenāti ‘‘ettha ce natthī’’tiādivacanena. Etthāti āyatanesu. Taṇhādīnaṃ avatthubhāvadassanamukhena taṇhādīnaṃyeva appavattiṃ kilesaparinibbānaṃ kathitanti. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘esevanto’’tiādi, ayameva abhinandanādīnaṃ natthibhāvakaro maggo, tappaṭippassaddhibhūtaṃ phalaṃ, taṃnissaraṇaṃ vā nibbānaṃ rāgānusayādīnaṃ anto avasānaṃ appavattīti attho. Tenāha ‘‘ayaṃ …pe… anto’’ti. Sabbatthāti ‘‘esevanto paṭighānusayānaṃ’’tiādīsu sabbapadesu.
「被抓住」(ādiyatīti) 指以施予打击等方式被捉住。「达到极点的争论」(matthakappattaṃ kalahan) 并非停留在一般的争吵,而是以口舌刺伤等方式达到顶点的争论。「以什么而作」(yāya karotīti) 表示关联,其余诸句亦同此理。以相违的执取而成种种执,同样以相违的言论而成种种论。「如此转起的粗暴谈话」(evaṃ pavattanti sārambhakathaṃ):对于本应尊重者也不予尊重,只是“你、你”这般转起的粗暴言语,以何种思而作,彼思即是“你、你”。「依止」(nissāyāti) 就是缘,也就是以依止等为条件的意思。诸处可作为烦恼生起的因相——有它们时烦恼方生——但怎能又成为灭的因相呢?因为此处不涵盖出世间法,只针对世间法。为了避免这种责难,而说“即使是在它们息灭时”等。为了说明只是名称上称为因相,在解释了“在何处生起,即在何处息灭”之后,引经文证成此义,说了「这个意义」等。显示巴利原文
Ādiyatīti pahāradānādivasena gayhati. Matthakappattaṃ kalahanti bhaṇḍanādimatte aṭṭhatvā mukhasattīhi vitudanādivasena matthakappattaṃ kalahaṃ. Yāya karotīti sambandho. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Viruddhaggāhavasena nānāgāhamattaṃ, tathā viruddhavādavasena nānāvādamattaṃ. Evaṃ pavattanti garukātabbesupi gāravaṃ akatvā ‘‘tuvaṃ tuva’’nti evaṃ pavattaṃ sārambhakathaṃ, yāya cetanāya yaṃ karoti, sā tuvaṃ tuvaṃ. Nissāyāti paṭicca, nissayādipaccaye katvāti attho. Kilesānaṃ uppattinimittatā tāva āyatanānaṃ hotu tabbhāve bhāvato, nirodhanimittatā pana kathaṃ. Na hettha lokuttaradhammānaṃ saṅgaho lokiyānaṃyeva adhippetattāti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘nirujjhamānāpī’’tiādi. Nāmamattena nimittataṃ sandhāya vuttoti dassento ‘‘yatthuppannā, tattheva niruddhā hontī’’ti vatvā tamatthaṃ suttantarena sādhento ‘‘svāyamattho’’tiādimāha.
其中,“以集谛的提问”即《大念处》中对集谛的阐述。由“于何处生起”等提问方式而展开,故称之为“提问”。若有人质疑:“那里面只说了渴爱的生灭,并非一切烦恼的灭。”为了显示此责难全无立足之地,故说“正如”等。通过“得称”指出:以烦恼不转起的因相,涅槃因而被共称为“边际”。由此可知,这也解释了“无有欢喜等”。又有人问:“在超越一切有为的涅槃中,何以会有不善法的灭?”答:“任何法于何处无有,于彼处即说为‘灭’。”而所谓“于不转起的状态中称为灭”这一义理,应由灭的提问来阐明。因为在涅槃中,并非说“寻与伺生起又灭去,它们止息了”,而是说它们根本不转起。显示巴利原文
Tattha samudayasaccapañhenāti mahāsatipaṭṭhāne samudayasaccaniddesena. So hi ‘‘kattha uppajjamānā’’tiādinā pucchāvasena pavattattā pañhoti vutto. Nanu tattha taṇhāya uppattinirodhā vuttā, na sabbakilesānanti īdisī codanā anavakāsāti dassento ‘‘yatheva cā’’tiādimāha. Laddhavohāreti iminā rāgādīnaṃ appavattinimittatāya antoti samaññā nibbānassāti dasseti. Eteneva abhinandanādīnaṃ abhāvoti ca idaṃ saṃvaṇṇitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kathaṃ pana sabbasaṅkhatavinissaṭe nibbāne akusaladhammānaṃ nirodhasambhavoti āha ‘‘yañhi yattha natthi, taṃ tattha niruddhaṃ nāma hotī’’ti. Yvāyaṃ appavattiyaṃ nirodhavohāro vutto, svāyamattho nirodhapañhena dīpetabbo. Na hi tattha uppajjitvā niruddhā vitakkavicārā paṭippassaddhāti vuttā, atha kho appavattā evāti.
203 “如此具足者”(evaṃsampadanti)意思是:具有这样的完全智,应当被这样看待,这是我的请求。因此说“就是这样的”。“知所知者”(jānaṃ jānāti):以一切知智了知一切应知。因为通过最高级的说明和不作简别的方式,“知”这个词无余地囊括了一切应知的范围;由这种认知行为的范畴,一切知智才适合作为工具。或者根据上下文,由于“世尊”一词在后面出现,也可以显明这个意思。“见应见者”(passitabbameva passati):以天眼、慧眼、法眼、佛眼、普眼等智眼,确实见到应当见到的。另一种解释:“知所知者”——其他有颠倒的人虽然也在认知,却是以颠倒的方式去认知,世尊则不同,因为世尊断除了颠倒,所以“知所知”就是如实地知,“见应见”就是如实地见,因为已经舍弃了错见。“以引导看见的意义而成为眼”(dassanapariṇāyakaṭṭhena):就像肉眼引导众生去看那样,由于世尊成就了世间如实看见,所以在履行观看功能的引导意义上,他成为了「眼」(cakkhubhūto);或者说,他拥有慧眼,或透过自生智圆满了慧眼,所以称为「眼」。「成为智体者」(ñāṇabhūto)也是同样的道理。或者,菩提分法使他成为法的体,因为这些法从他而生起,世间也因他而生起这些法;或者他证得了不与他人共的法,所以是「法体者」(dhammabhūto)。“梵”(brahmā)指的是道,因为他生起了道,也令世间生起此道,并且以自生智证得此道,所以他成为「梵体者」(brahmabhūto)。他宣说四圣谛法,所以是「说者」(vattā)。他长久地令证谛之法持续运转而宣说,所以是「运转者」(pavattā)。「取出义」(atthaṃ nīharitvāti)意思是拔出苦等之义,在苦等中又拔出逼迫等义。或者,他令人达到究竟义、涅槃,令众生生起对不死的证得,所以把不死给予人,成为「不死的施予者」(amatassa dātā)。因为菩提分法等完全依赖他,所以他成为「法主」(dhammassāmī)。显示巴利原文
203.Evaṃsampadanti evaṃsampajjanakaṃ evaṃ passitabbaṃ idaṃ mama ajjhesanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘īdisanti attho’’ti. Jānaṃ jānātīti (a. ni. ṭī. 3.10.113-116) sabbaññutaññāṇena jānitabbaṃ sabbaṃ jānāti. Ukkaṭṭhaniddesena hi avisesaggahaṇena ca ‘‘jāna’’nti iminā niravasesaṃ ñeyyajātaṃ pariggaṇhātīti tabbisayāya jānanakiriyāya sabbaññutaññāṇameva karaṇaṃ bhavituṃ yuttaṃ. Atha vā pakaraṇavasena ‘‘bhagavā’’ti saddantarasannidhānena cāyamattho vibhāvetabbo. Passitabbameva passatīti dibbacakkhu-paññācakkhu-dhammacakkhu-buddhacakkhu-samantacakkhu-saṅkhātehi ñāṇacakkhūhi passitabbaṃ passati eva. Atha vā jānaṃ jānātīti yathā aññe savipallāsā kāmarūpapariññāvādino jānantāpi vipallāsavasena jānanti, na evaṃ bhagavā. Bhagavā pana pahīnavipallāsattā jānanto jānāti eva, diṭṭhidassanassa ca abhāvā passanto passatiyevāti attho. Dassanapariṇāyakaṭṭhenāti yathā cakkhu sattānaṃ dassanatthaṃ pariṇeti, evaṃ lokassa yāthāvadassanasādhanato dassanakiccapariṇāyakaṭṭhena cakkhubhūto, paññācakkhumayattā vā sayambhuñāṇena paññācakkhuṃ bhūto pattoti vā cakkhubhūto. Ñāṇabhūtoti etassa ca evameva attho daṭṭhabbo. Dhammā vā bodhipakkhiyā tehi uppannattā lokassa ca taduppādanato, anaññasādhāraṇaṃ vā dhammaṃ pattoti dhammabhūto. Brahmā vuccati maggo tena uppannattā lokassa ca taduppādanattā, tañca sayambhuñāṇena pattoti brahmabhūto. Catusaccadhammaṃ vadatīti vattā. Ciraṃ saccapaṭivedhaṃ pavattento vadatīti pavattā. Atthaṃ nīharitvāti dukkhādiatthaṃ tatthāpi pīḷanādiatthaṃ uddharitvā. Paramatthaṃ vā nibbānaṃ pāpayitā, amatasacchikiriyaṃ sattesu uppādento amataṃ dadātīti amatassa dātā. Bodhipakkhiyadhammānaṃ tadāyattabhāvato dhammassāmī.
204 这段诵出也同样适用于他自身,所以长老说“我们确实”。因为佛陀的教导遍及一切世间。现在,为了先显示那些令“虚妄分别之想”在人身中转起的门与所缘,经文以“眼与”等展开,阐明依六处分别而作的解释。其中,“依止性”即依止缘的关系。依止缘唯限于净色眼,而非指十四种所生色或四十四种所生色构成的复合眼,故说“缘眼净色而”。“所缘性”即所缘缘的关系。所缘缘可以是四因所生色中的任何一种,故说“缘四因生色而”。显示巴利原文
204. So vā uddeso attanopi hotīti thero ‘‘yaṃ kho no’’ti āha. Sabbalokasādhāraṇā hi buddhānaṃ desanāti. Idāni yehi dvārārammaṇehi purisaṃ papañcasaññāsaṅkhā samudācaranti, tāni tāva dassento papañcasaññāsaṅkhā dassetuṃ yena saḷāyatanavibhaṅgena niddeso kato, tassa atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘cakkhuñcā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha nissayabhāvenāti nissayapaccayabhāvena. Nissayapaccayo ca pasādacakkhuyeva hoti, na cuddasasambhāraṃ, catucattālīsasambhāraṃ vā sasambhāracakkhunti āha ‘‘cakkhupasādañca paṭiccā’’ti. Ārammaṇabhāvenāti ārammaṇapaccayabhāvena. Ārammaṇapaccayo ca catusamuṭṭhānikarūpesu yaṃ kiñci hotīti āha ‘‘catusamuṭṭhānikarūpe ca paṭiccā’’ti.
这里,眼作为眼识的缘仅是单一法,而色处则是多个色法聚合而成的。为显示这一差别,在依止的意义上说“缘眼净色而”,在所缘的意义上说“缘四因生色而”,从而在措辞上作了区分。那么,为何眼作为识的缘是单一的,而色则是多个色法聚合呢?这是由于缘的种类不同。眼作为眼识的缘,在以依止缘、前生缘、根缘、不相应缘为缘时,只是凭其存在性而为缘——即因为有眼才有此识,没有眼则没有此识。所以说眼以有缘和不离去缘作为它的缘。再者,眼作为识的依止,不应理解为识像部分附着那样依靠眼,因为眼是无色的。而应如同国王于臣民、师长于弟子那样,识是由眼所制约而转起的。至于其他的缘,则各有各的差别,应当了知。显示巴利原文
Ettha cakkhu ekampi viññāṇassa paccayo hoti, rūpāyatanaṃ pana anekameva saṃhatanti imassa visesassa dassanatthaṃ nissayabhāvena ‘‘cakkhupasādañca ārammaṇabhāvena catusamuṭṭhānikarūpe cā’’ti vacanabhedo kato. Kiṃ pana kāraṇaṃ cakkhu ekampi viññāṇassa paccayo hoti, rūpaṃ pana anekamevāti? Paccayabhāvavisesato. Cakkhu hi cakkhuviññāṇassa nissayapurejātaindriyavippayuttapaccayehi paccayo hontaṃ atthibhāveneva hoti tasmiṃ sati tassa bhāvato, asati abhāvato, yato taṃ atthiavigatapaccayehissa paccayo hotīti vuccati, tannissitatā cassa na ekadesena allīyanavasena icchitabbā arūpabhāvato. Atha kho garurājādīsu sissarājapurisādīnaṃ viya tappaṭibaddhavuttitāya, itare pana paccayā tena tena visesena veditabbā.
如果这种缘性不能在单一法上成立,为了表明即使单一眼净色也能作为眼识的缘,经文便用单数说:“贤友,缘于眼(cakkhuñcāvuso, paṭicca)”。然而,色虽也像眼一样,以前生缘、有缘、不离去缘为缘——也就是先已生起,在存续的刹那提供助益——但由于它是所缘,所以必须由多个色法聚合才能成为缘。凡是能成为所缘缘的法,或者是具有自性的真实法,或者只是被构想出来的相状;当识生起时,它就能清晰地呈现出来。虽然在别的情况下其他法也能作缘,但因为这种识具有取所缘的特质,对于没有所缘就不能生起的识来说,所缘就是它所依托而生起的依据,是可以被缘取的对象,因此称为所缘。由此可知,识正是通过这种方式获得所缘缘的自性,识就依那个色而生起,并且所清晰呈现的,正是那个色的自性。而依凭眼根转起的识,在把握所缘的自性时,并不依靠缺了一两个色聚或仅靠几个色聚的色相,而是依靠与作意相应、现前呈现出来的色相。所以,为了显示色必定是多法聚合,并且以聚合的力量成为识的缘,经文才用复数说:“缘于诸色,眼识生起(rūpe ca upa...)”。显示巴利原文
Sacāyaṃ paccayabhāvo na ekasmiṃ na sambhavatīti ekampi cakkhu cakkhuviññāṇassa paccayo hotīti dassetuṃ pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘cakkhuñcāvuso, paṭiccā’’ti ekavacanavasena vuttaṃ. Rūpaṃ pana yadipi cakkhu viya purejātaatthi-avigatapaccayehi paccayo hoti puretaraṃ uppannaṃ hutvā vijjamānakkhaṇe eva upakārakattā tathāpi anekameva saṃhataṃ hutvā paccayo hoti ārammaṇabhāvato. Yañhi paccayadhammaṃ sabhāvabhūtaṃ, parikappitākāramattaṃ vā viññāṇaṃ vibhāventaṃ pavattati, tadaññesañca satipi paccayabhāve so tassa sārammaṇasabhāvatāya yaṃ kiñci anālambhitvā pavattituṃ asamatthassa olubbhapavattikāraṇabhāvena ālambanīyato ārammaṇaṃ nāma, tassa yasmā yathā tathā sabhāvūpaladdhi viññāṇassa ārammaṇapaccayalābho, tasmā cakkhuviññāṇaṃ rūpaṃ ārabbha pavattamānaṃ tassa sabhāvaṃ vibhāventameva pavattati. Sā cassa indriyādhīnavuttikassa ārammaṇasabhāvūpaladdhi na ekadvikalāpagatavaṇṇavasena hoti, nāpi katipayakalāpagatavaṇṇavasena, atha kho ābhogānurūpaṃ āpāthagatavaṇṇavasenāti anekameva rūpaṃ saṃhaccakāritāya viññāṇassa paccayo hotīti dassento ‘‘rūpe ca uppajjati cakkhuviññāṇa’’nti bahuvacanavasenāha.
然而,《发趣论》(《发趣》1.1.2 缘分别)中所说:“色处对眼识界及与它相应的诸法,以所缘缘为缘”,这是针对怎样的色处成为眼识的所缘缘而说的。那是什么样的呢?就是“聚合的”——这个意思很清楚。正因如此,那些主张“眼识等是以处的观照作用作为观照对象,而不是以具有自性的观照作用为对象”的人,他们的话说得也很合理。在这里,不应该怀疑会成为所缘的是聚合,因为并没有对聚合的作意;然而聚合在一起的诸色法,确实能成为所缘缘。如果问:单个色法没有这种力量,聚合起来怎么就成所缘缘了呢?就像盲人单个看不见,集合在一起也看不到呀?这种质疑并不绝对成立,因为像轿夫等人各自力量不足,但一起抬轿时就显现出力量,这是可以看到的。又如毛发等,放在某个位置时,单根毛发的颜色无法被识别,而在同一地点聚集起来时就能被识别,这更加说明了它们聚合的力量。由此可知,已经驳斥了“眼识是以极微色为所缘,还是以它的聚合为所缘”这类诘难。“贤友,缘于耳(sotañca, āvuso, paṭicca)”等经文,也应该按照这个道理来理解。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ pana paṭṭhāne (paṭṭhā. 1.1.2 paccayaniddesa) ‘‘rūpāyatanaṃ cakkhuviññāṇadhātuyā taṃsampayuttakānañca dhammānaṃ ārammaṇapaccayena paccayo’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ yādisaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ cakkhuviññāṇassa ārammaṇapaccayo, tādisaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Kīdisaṃ pana tanti ? Samuditanti pākaṭoyamattho. Evañca katvā yadeke vadanti ‘‘āyatanasallakkhaṇavasena cakkhuviññāṇādayo sallakkhaṇavisayā, na drabyasallakkhaṇavasenā’’ti, tampi suvuttameva hoti. Na cettha samudāyārammaṇatā āsaṅkitabbā samudāyābhogasseva abhāvato, samuditā pana vaṇṇadhammā ārammaṇapaccayā honti. Kathaṃ pana paccekaṃ asamatthā samuditā ārammaṇapaccayā honti. Na hi paccekaṃ daṭṭhuṃ asakkontā andhā samuditā passantīti? Nayidamekantikaṃ visuṃ visuṃ asamatthānampi sivikāvahanādīsu samatthatāya dassanato. Kesādīnañca yasmiṃ ṭhāne ṭhitānaṃ paccekaṃ vaṇṇaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkā, tasmiṃyeva ṭhāne samuditānaṃ taṃ gahetuṃ sakkāti bhiyyopi tesaṃ saṃhaccakāritā paribyattā. Etena kiṃ cakkhuviññāṇassa paramāṇurūpaṃ ārammaṇaṃ, udāhu taṃsamudāyotiādikā codanā paṭikkhittāti veditabbā. ‘‘Sotañca, āvuso, paṭiccā’’tiādīsupi iminā nayena attho veditabbo. Cakkhuviññāṇaṃ nāmāti cakkhunissitarūpavijānanalakkhaṇaṃ cakkhuviññāṇaṃ nāma uppajjati.
“三者和合”,即眼、色、眼识这三者的和合与聚集。名为“触”——此虽为非色法,然因其是以触对的方式作用于所缘而生起,具有“触”的特征,这样的法便称为“触”而生起。依俱生等方式,即与眼识相应的触,依俱生缘、相互缘等而为缘;前生的触则依无间缘等为缘;其它的触则依亲依止缘为缘——从触之缘、触之因中生起受。在领纳的同时,对所缘的了知亦随之发生,所以说“那受所领纳的所缘,想便了知它”。此处即指眼门诸法,当随这些法辗转生起的受等被执取时,或者可以说,“了知”是表原因的词语:因领纳了所缘,想方了知之。若无感受,则任何时候都不会有想的生起。其余各句,义理相同。因想,依其如何想,将存在或不存在的所缘,通过寻而思惟;又依见、爱、慢、妄执等,对所构思者加以计执,而进行戏论。是故经中如是说。显示巴利原文
Tiṇṇaṃ saṅgatiyāti cakkhu, rūpaṃ, cakkhuviññāṇanti imesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ saṅgatiyā samodhānena. Phasso nāmāti arūpadhammopi samāno ārammaṇe phusanākāreneva pavattanato phusanalakkhaṇo phasso nāma dhammo uppajjati. Sahajātādivasenāti cakkhuviññāṇasampayuttāya sahajātaaññamaññādivasena, anantarāya anantarādivasena, itarāya upanissayavasena paccayabhāvato phassapaccayā phassakāraṇā vedanā uppajjati. Anubhavanasamakālameva ārammaṇassa sañjānanaṃ hotīti ‘‘tāya vedanāya yaṃ ārammaṇaṃ vedeti, tadeva saññā sañjānātī’’ti vuttaṃ. Cakkhudvārikā dhammā idhādhippetāti tadanusārena pana aparāparuppannānaṃ vedanādīnaṃ gahaṇe sati, yanti vā kāraṇavacanaṃ, yasmā ārammaṇaṃ vedeti, tasmā taṃ sañjānātīti attho. Na hi asati vedayite kadāci saññuppatti atthi. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Saññāya hi yathāsaññātaṃ vijjamānaṃ, avijjamānaṃ vā ārammaṇaṃ vitakkavasena parikappeti, yathāparikappitañca taṃ diṭṭhitaṇhāmānamaññanāhi maññamāno papañcetīti vutto. Tenevāha ‘‘pathaviṃ pathavito sañjānā’’ti, ‘‘pathaviṃ pathavito saññatvā pathaviṃ maññatī’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.2), ‘‘takkañca diṭṭhīsu pakappayitvā, saccaṃ musāti dvayadhammamāhū’’ti (su. ni. 892; mahāni. 121) ca. Balappattapapañcavasenevāyamatthavaṇṇanā katā, aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana paridubbalavasena.
“以眼、色等为因”,就是以眼识、触、受、想、寻等作为因。虽说它们亦可非因,但由于它们的存在,故此处称之为因。因为若已被遍知,它们便不再是因。所以说“未遍知之因”。即以三种遍知皆未遍知的事物为所依。“覆蔽”即遮蔽、淹没。“俱生”在此处的含义是:也应将那非俱生的受、想等包含在内,因有“以眼触为缘,有受蕴,乃是善”这样的说法。若如此,在讲“戏论之”时,如果指的是与五门速行俱生的戏论,因为它们只缘取现前之境,为何还会抓取过去与未来呢?问难者如是问。答者以“因如是而生故”等语作答。其中,“因如是而生故”意为:如同现在出现时眼门中的戏论是这样生起的,在过去、未来时,它也是这样生起的,因此才执取过去和未来,而并非由过去或未来的眼与色,令眼门中的那些戏论生起。显示巴利原文
Cakkhurūpādīhi kāraṇehīti cakkhuviññāṇaphassavedanāsaññāvitakkehi kāraṇabhūtehi. Akāraṇabhūtānampi tesaṃ atthitāya kāraṇaggahaṇaṃ. Pariññātā hi te akāraṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘apariññātakāraṇa’’nti. Tīhipi pariññāhi apariññātavatthukaṃ. Abhibhavantīti ajjhottharanti. Sahajātā hontīti ettha ‘‘cakkhusamphassapaccayā vedanākkhandho atthi kusalo’tiādivacanato vedanāsaññā asahajātāpi gahetabbā. Yadi evanti ‘‘papañcetī’’ti ettha yadi pañcadvārajavanasahajātā papañcasaṅkhā adhippetā tāsaṃ paccuppannavisayattā, kasmā atītānāgataggahaṇaṃkatanti codeti. Itaro ‘‘tathā uppajjanato’’tiādinā pariharati. Tattha tathā uppajjanatoti yathā vattamānakāle, evaṃ atītakāle anāgatakāle ca cakkhudvāre papañcasaṅkhānaṃ uppajjanato atītānāgataggahaṇaṃ kataṃ, na atītesu, anāgatesu vā cakkhurūpesu cakkhudvārikānaṃ tāsaṃ uppajjanato.
“贤友,缘于意”这一句中,“意”有两种:纯粹的有分,或包含转向的有分。因有两种说法:在“生起门论”中,被撞击两次的有分心名为意门,如同眼等被色等撞击时,由于在那里成为更上层识生起的门,故得门之名。在“缘论”中,指的则是包含转向的有分,如在“以意触为缘,有善”等说法中,所说的意触乃是带有转向的意触,而非有分意触,因为有分意触不能产生。此处依第一种理趣,“意”即指有分心。“诸法”指三地法所缘,这是为了显示只有在自性法中才有烦恼生起;有人或谓此说不合,因概念亦能成为法所缘,且经文中已如是说。然而,这里说“三地法所缘”是为了表明,在此处亦能有三地法,并非说概念不能成为所缘。此点应当承认,否则不善心的生起便会成为无所缘了。在“生起门论”中,转向如同眼识等,亦属于门的部分,所以说“意识即是转向”。在“缘论”中,因其已包含转向,故说“或是速行”。为显示两种理趣中诸法的俱生差异,故说“当取转向时”等语。此合于理,从非异门的角度看,确是如此。显示巴利原文
Manañjāvuso, paṭiccāti ettha duvidhaṃ manaṃ kevalaṃ bhavaṅgaṃ, sāvajjanaṃ vā. Duvidhā hi kathā. Uppattidvārakathāyaṃ dvikkhattuṃ calitaṃ bhavaṅgaṃ manodvāraṃ nāma, cakkhādi viya rūpādinā yena taṃ ghaṭṭitaṃ tattha upari viññāṇuppattiyā dvārabhāvato. Paccayakathāyaṃ sāvajjanabhavaṅgaṃ, ‘‘manosamphassapaccayā atthi kusalo’’tiādīsu hi sāvajjanamanosamphasso icchito, na bhavaṅgamanosamphasso asambhavato. Tattha paṭhamanayaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘mananti bhavaṅgacitta’’nti. Dhammeti tebhūmakadhammārammaṇanti iminā sabhāvadhammesu eva kilesuppattīti keci, tadayuttaṃ tadupādānāyapi paññattiyā dhammārammaṇatāya vuttattā. Idha pana tebhūmakāpi dhammā labbhantīti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘tebhūmakadhammārammaṇa’’nti vuttaṃ, na paññattiyā anārammaṇattā. Evañcetaṃ sampaṭicchitabbaṃ, aññathā akusalacittuppādā anārammaṇā nāma siyuṃ. Uppattidvārakathāyaṃ cakkhuviññāṇādi viya āvajjanampi dvārapakkhikamevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘manoviññāṇanti āvajjanaṃ vā’’ti. Paccayakathāyaṃ pana āvajjanaṃ gahitanti ‘‘javanaṃ vā’’ti vuttaṃ. Nayadvaye dhammānaṃ sahajātavibhāgaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘āvajjanegahite’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yuttamevāti nippariyāyato yuttameva.
只要尚未生起对缘的透彻了解,自性法便仅以施设的方式了知,各法并未被分别施设,因此说“名为触的一个法生起”。如此,以触的施设而施设之后,便会生起观照此所缘的智慧。“此有故彼有”,是说有了眼等这些缘时,便会有触等缘所生法生起。或说依十二处门,即依十二处的理趣,亦即缘起之理趣。依遮遣十二处门,即“此无故彼无”,以遮遣十二处的方式,显示缘的不存在与缘所生法的不存在的次第。显示巴利原文
So yāva na paccayapaṭivedho sambhavati, tāva paññattimukheneva sabhāvadhammā paññāyanti paccekaṃ apaññāpaneti āha ‘‘phasso nāma eko dhammo uppajjatī’’ti. Evaṃ phassapaññattiṃ paññapessatīti paññapetvā tabbisayadassanaṃ ñāṇaṃ uppādessati. Imasmiṃ sati idaṃ hotīti imasmiṃ cakkhuādike paccaye sati idaṃ phassādikaṃ paccayuppannaṃ hoti. Dvādasāyatanavasenāti dvādasannaṃ āyatanānaṃ vasena āgatena paṭiccasamuppādanayavasena. Dvādasāyatanapaṭikkhepavasenāti ‘‘imasmiṃ asati idaṃ na hotī’’ti paccayābhāvapaccayuppannābhāvadassanakkame dvādasannaṃ āyatanānaṃ paṭikkhepavasena.
“由声闻弟子解答了问题”:这个问题是由声闻弟子所解答的,以此因缘,你们不应生疑。或者,“对于略说的义理,由那位被尊为第一的大声闻弟子以详细分别来解答”:以此因缘,对于此问题,你们不应生疑。你们不应像明明有金匠在场,却自己去鉴别金币那样,而应在世尊面前生起无疑之心。显示巴利原文
Sāvakena pañho kathitoti ayaṃ pañho sāvakena kathito, iti iminā kāraṇena mā nikkaṅkhā ahuvattha. Atha vā saṃkhittena vuttamatthaṃ vitthārena vibhajantena etadagge ṭhapitena mahāsāvakena pañho kathitoti iminā kāraṇena etasmiṃ pañhe mā nikkaṅkhā ahuvattha, heraññike sati kahāpaṇaṃ sayaṃ nicchinantā viya ahutvā bhagavato eva santike nikkaṅkhā hotha.
205 「行相」:指能依各自的界限令果报生起者,也就是种种的因。「由各别之因」:因为依六门的不同,而分别开示了戏论之因,故有此说。或者,虽然许多法共同令果报生起时,它们的因性必须总集,只有因缘和合才有果报,但也可以说每一法都是各别之因,故于此说“由各别之因”。「以诸句」:即名等诸句及其集合而成的语句。因此说「以字母之聚合」:正是由于字母依照与意义相符的句与语的形式,才得以对种种意义加以区分。「以诸音节」:能令意义显明,故称为音节,即种种音声。而这些音节因为有差别的转起,故称为“字母”,因此说“以诸字母”。在这里,依于这些行相、这些句及音节,来开示戏论的现行、轮回与还灭之义,以进行详细分别,应作如此融会贯通。「以智慧」:即依于智慧。为了显示智慧的特相,如“尊者,云何为智者?诸比丘,于此有比丘是界善巧者……”等经句所说,故说“以四种原因”等。于无碍解中,为了显示已依谛证悟而生起的大慧,故说“于大义”等。显示巴利原文
205. Ākaronti phalaṃ tāya tāya mariyādāya nibbattentīti ākārā, kāraṇāni. Pāṭiyekkakāraṇehīti channaṃ dvārānaṃ vasena visuṃ visuṃ papañcakāraṇassa niddiṭṭhattā vuttaṃ. Atha vā yadipi yattakehi dhammehi yaṃ phalaṃ nibbattati, tesaṃ samuditānaṃyeva kāraṇabhāvo sāmaggiyāva phaluppattito, tathāpi paccekaṃ tassa kāraṇamevāti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘pāṭiyekkakāraṇehī’’ti. Padehīti nāmādipadehi ceva taṃsamudāyabhūtehi vākyehi ca. Tenāha ‘‘akkharasampiṇḍanehī’’ti. Akkharāniyeva hi atthesu yathāvaccaṃ padavākyabhāvena paricchijjanti. Byañjanehīti atthassa abhibyañjanato byañjanasaññitehi vaṇṇehi. Tāni pana yasmā pariyāyassa akkharaṇato ‘‘akkharānī’’ti vuccanti, tasmā āha ‘‘akkharehī’’ti. Ettha ca imehi ākārehi imehi padabyañjanehi papañcasamudācārassa vaṭṭassa ca vivaṭṭassa ca dassanaattho vibhattoti yojanā. Paṇḍiccenāti paññāya. ‘‘Kittāvatā nu kho, bhante, paṇḍito hoti ? Yato kho bhikkhu dhātukusalo ca hotī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.124) ādisuttapadavasena paṇḍitalakkhaṇaṃ dassento ‘‘catūhi vā kāraṇehī’’tiādimāha. Saccapaṭivedhavasena paṇḍiccaṃ dassitanti paṭisambhidāvasena mahāpaññataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘mahante atthe’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
「糖饼」:即用糖混合制成的饼。「系缚之炒面球」:是用蜜和糖团成团状的炒面粉团。「应灌注者」:因需预先用蜜等调和,故得此名。「思惟性者」:指本性习惯于如理思惟法义的人。「我将唯以一切知智」:我将只以一切知智令他了知此经的功德,随后为他取名。显示巴利原文
Guḷapūvanti guḷe missitvā katapūvaṃ. Baddhasattuguḷakanti madhusakkharāhi piṇḍīkataṃ sattupiṇḍaṃ. Asecitabbakaṃ madhuādinā pageva tehi samayojitabbattā. Cintakajātikoti dhammacintāya cintakasabhāvo. Sabbaññutaññāṇenevassāti sabbaññutaññāṇeneva assa suttassa guṇaṃ paricchindāpetvā nāmaṃ gaṇhāpessāmi.
《蜜丸经》的注释——阐明隐秘的含义,至此圆满结束。显示巴利原文
Madhupiṇḍikasuttavaṇṇanāya līnatthappakāsanā samattā.
9.《双想经》注疏显示巴利原文
9. Dvedhāvitakkasuttavaṇṇanā
206 「分成一对一对」:即分成两两的部分。虽然依照经文“我将此归为一类,将彼归为第二类”的说法,一切寻仅依杂染与清净的区分而分成两类,但鉴于它们不断交替生起和惯行的情况,在经文中使用了重叠词“分为二类”来表达,因此通过重叠的用法说为“分成一对一对”。或者,因为这两类具有相互对立性,世尊为了把每一对直接对立的两者各别清晰地把握,而说“应将寻分为二类而住”。这样思惟之后,为了显示此处将邪寻与正寻毫无遗漏、不相混杂地把握的状况,而说“我将此归为一类,将彼归为第二类”。「与欲相应的」:即与名为欲贪的欲相应,或者与欲连结。其余词语也同理。这里的差别在于:「嗔害」是指让心恼怒的东西,也就是瞋。「害」是指以此来伤害众生,或者这些寻的伤害性就是害,这是对以恼害方式生起、与悲悯相对立的恶法的称呼。「内」:以内在诸法为所缘。「外」:以外部诸法为所缘。「粗」:与强烈的欲贪等相应。与此相反的为「细」。「寻是属于不善分的」:这是为了显示,由于这些寻都具有‘寻’的共性,并且其中不善的状态也具有共性,因此归为一类,而不是因为它们本身是同一体。显示巴利原文
206.Dvedve bhāgeti dve dve koṭṭhāse katvā. Kāmañcettha ‘‘imaṃ ekaṃ bhāgamakāsiṃ, imaṃ dutiyabhāgamakāsi’’nti vacanato sabbepi vitakkā saṃkilesavodānavibhāgena dveva bhāgā katā, aparāparuppattiyā panetesaṃ abhiṇhācāraṃ upādāya pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘dvidhā katvā’’ti āmeḍitavacananti ‘‘dve dve bhāge katvā’’ti āmeḍitavacanavaseneva vutto. Atha vā bhāgadvayassa sappaṭibhāgatāya tattha yaṃ yaṃ dvayampi kho ujuvipaccanīkaṃ, taṃ taṃ visuṃ visuṃ gahetukāmo bhagavā āha ‘‘dvidhā katvā vitakke vihareyya’’nti. Evaṃ pana cintetvā tattha micchāvitakkānaṃ sammāvitakkānañca anavasesaṃ asaṅkarato ca gahitabhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘imaṃ ekaṃ bhāgamakāsiṃ, imaṃ dutiyabhāgamakāsi’’nti avoca. Kāmapaṭisaṃyuttoti kāmarāgasaṅkhātena kāmena sampayutto, kāmena paṭibaddho vā. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Ayaṃ pana viseso – byāpajjati cittaṃ etenāti byāpādo, doso. Vihiṃsati etāya satte, vihiṃsanaṃ vā tesaṃ etanti vihiṃsā, paresaṃ viheṭhanākārena pavattassa karuṇāpaṭipakkhassa pāpadhammassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Ajjhattanti ajjhattadhammārammaṇamāha. Bahiddhāti bāhiradhammārammaṇaṃ. Oḷārikoti bahalakāmarāgādipaṭisaṃyutto. Tabbipariyāyena sukhumo. Vitakkoakusalapakkhikoyevāti iminā vitakkabhāvasāmaññena tatthāpi akusalabhāvasāmaññena ekabhāgakaraṇaṃ, na ekacittuppādapariyāpannatādivasenāti dasseti.
「出离」:指因超越贪而达至的初禅,也指因出离一切不善而成就的一切善法。但这里因为意指欲寻的对立面,所以说“从诸欲中出离、与出离相应的寻”。这就是出离寻。「乃至初禅为止」:从最初的作意开始,直至初禅生起之间,所生起的寻都是出离寻。这里说“初禅”,是因为在那之后寻就不再存在。「无嗔」:心不因此而被恼害,或者是嗔害的对立面。这是慈心的前行、修习慈心的出发点。「无害」:不以此伤害他人,或者是害的对立面。这是悲悯的前行、修习悲悯的出发点。显示巴利原文
Nekkhammaṃ vuccati lobhātikkantattā paṭhamajjhānaṃ, sabbākusalehi nikkhantattā sabbaṃ kusalaṃ. Idha pana kāmavitakkapaṭipakkhassa adhippetattā āha ‘‘kāmehi nissaṭo nekkhammapaṭisaṃyutto vitakko’’ti. Soti nekkhammavitakko. Yāva paṭhamajjhānāti paṭhamasamannāhārato paṭṭhāya yāva paṭhamajjhānaṃ etthuppanno vitakko nekkhammavitakkoyeva. Paṭhamajjhānanti ca idaṃ tato paraṃ vitakkābhāvato vuttaṃ. Na byāpajjati cittaṃ etena, byāpādassa vā paṭipakkhoti abyāpādo, mettāpubbabhāgo mettābhāvanārambho. Na vihiṃsanti etāya, vihiṃsāya vā paṭipakkhoti avihiṃsā, karuṇāpubbabhāgo karuṇābhāvanārambho.
对于大菩萨们,自从大出离时起,便获得机缘,正思惟层层增上、转更殊胜地生起,因此说“六年……生起”。由于智慧尚未成熟,依于过去习性之力,有时因失念也会生起邪寻的杂染,为显示此义而说“因失念……住立”。犹如久闭的房屋,有时窗扉一开,风即得机会吹入;同样,即使菩萨已守护根门,由于失念而得机会,不善寻也会生起;生起后,便截断善法之流而住立。那时,大士即刻驱除这刚刚生起的寻,并为了使它们未来不再生起,如实辨别“这些是邪寻,这些是正寻”,不给邪寻机会,增长正寻。因此说“这些是我的……”等等。显示巴利原文
Mahābodhisattānaṃ mahābhinikkhamanaṃ nikkhantakālato paṭṭhāya laddhāvasarā sammāsaṅkappā uparūpari savisesaṃ pavattantīti āha ‘‘chabbassāni…pe… pavattiṃsū’’ti. Ñāṇassa aparipakkattā pubbavāsanāvasena satisammosato kadāci micchāvitakkalesopi hotiyevāti taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘satisammosena…pe… tiṭṭhantī’’ti āha. Yathā niccapihitepi gehe kadāci vātapāne vivaṭamatte laddhāvasaro vāto anto paviseyya, evaṃ guttindriyepi bodhisattasantāne satisammosavasena laddhāvasaro akusalavitakko uppajji, uppanno ca kusalavāraṃ pacchinditvā aṭṭhāsi, atha mahāsatto taṃmuhuttuppannameva paṭivinodetvā tesaṃ āyatiṃ anuppādāya ‘‘ime micchāvitakkā, ime sammāvitakkā’’ti yāthāvato te paricchinditvā micchāvitakkānaṃ avasaraṃ adento sammāvitakke parivaḍḍhesi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘mayhaṃ ime’’tiādi.
207 “放逸”即是念的背离,因此说“不放逸”为安住于念不背离的状态。“具足精勤”指具有调伏烦恼的精进者。“派遣心者”指为了从有中解脱而将心放出,对身命无所顾恋之人。“便如此成为本性”:他依自身而生起喜悦的状态,使其归入世俗喜之类。这是因为他有大智慧,能见到微细之处。显示巴利原文
207. Pamādo nāma sativippavāsoti āha ‘‘appamattassāti satiyā avippavāse ṭhitassā’’ti. Ātāpavīriyavantassāti kilesānaṃ niggaṇhanavīriyavato. Pesitacittassāti bhavavimokkhāya vissaṭṭhacittassa kāye ca jīvite ca nirapekkhassa. ‘‘Evaṃ paṭipākatiko jāto’’ti attano attabhāvaṃ nissāya pavattaṃ somanassākāraṃ gehassitasomanassapakkhikaṃ akāsi, paññāmahantatāya sukhumadassitā.
“住于未遍知者”指未住于遍知,即未持遍知。“寻……等”获得此三种名称,意思是:对于那样的人来说,所生起的邪寻,并不能相应地说“这是自害的”“这是害他的”或“这是二者俱害的”,因为它不能超出自性。“使慧灭者”:由于它具有令未生的慧不生、已生的慧衰退的征相,所以说“令慧灭去”。“令未生的……等”即指此义。“归于无有”是指以反思力镇伏断除。“消灭”等词也是表达这个意思。而“已离散”等词,是指如同连根拔除一般,令它于彼时不再生起。显示巴利原文
Apariññāyaṃṭhitassāti na pariññāyaṃ ṭhitassa, apariggahitapariññassāti attho. Vitakko…pe… etāni tīṇi nāmāni labhatīti tādisassa uppanno micchāvitakko yathārahaṃ attabyābādhako ubhayabyābādhako ca na hotīti na vattabbo taṃ sabhāvānativattanatoti adhippāyo. Anuppannānuppādauppannaparihāninimittatāya paññaṃ nirodhetīti paññānirodhiko. Tenāha ‘‘anuppannāyā’’tiādi. Natthibhāvaṃ gacchatīti paṭisaṅkhānabalena vikkhambhanappahānamāha. Nirujjhatītiādīhipi tadeva vadati. Vigatantantiādīhi pana samūlaṃ uddhaṭaṃ viya tadā appavattanakaṃ akāsinti vadati.
208 「心变异的状态」,即心的变样,原初心的消失。「多所缘纷乱相」,即是散乱。在那里,心有如为寻思所逼恼,故说「执取它而成为害寻」。「悲悯」,是指缘于他人之苦而心被触动。因此说:「当他人有苦时,善人的心被震撼,这就是悲悯。」这是说以悲悯的方式生起的心被撼动,才说「害寻生起」,并非指对有情造成伤害。这便是它的含义。显示巴利原文
208.Cittavipariṇāmabhāvo cittassa aññathattaṃ pakaticittavigamo. Anekaggatākāro vikkhepo. Tattha vitakkena cittaṃ vihaññamānaṃ viya hotīti āha ‘‘taṃ gahetvā vihiṃsāvitakkaṃ akāsī’’ti. Kāruññanti paradukkhanimittaṃ cittakhedaṃ vadati. Tenevāha – ‘‘paradukkhe sati sādhūnaṃ manaṃ kampetīti karuṇā’’ti (ma. ni. ṭī. 1.1; saṃ. ni. ṭī. 1.1.1). Nti karuṇāyanavasena pavattacittapakampanaṃ sandhāya ‘‘uppajjati vihiṃsāvitakko’’ti āha, na sattesu vihiṃsā pavattatīti adhippāyo.
「以此之行相、彼之行相」:比丘以任何行相而寻思、伺察,他的心便随之倾向那种行相。因此说「在欲寻等之中」等语。「已断除」是因时态错乱而说的,所以解释为「正在断除」。但为显示其断除由于对治的成就而实已成立,故说「断除了」,如同说「村民们受用了无主之物」一样。在「多所作」中也是同理。「就这样地倾向」:即成为与欲寻相应的行相本身,或者以与欲寻相应的行相而转变。「耕作」即是耕田,意为犁耕;而由于它的产出是谷物,便以因代果,将谷物称为「田」,故说「在谷物拥挤时」。「四种怖畏」是指杀害、捆绑、损失和斥责。「危难」是指产生不利的状况。「低劣」是指下劣的状态。「在自己的诸蕴上」,即在自己的五蕴上。「堕入」,意思是烦恼的侵入。从杂染中净化的过程即是清净,此清净本身就是「洁净」,故而说「洁净分,这便是它的同义词」。显示巴利原文
Tena tena cassākārenāti yena yena ākārena bhikkhunā anuvitakkitaṃ anuvicāritaṃ, tena tena ākārenassa cetaso nati hoti. Tenevāha ‘‘kāmavitakkādīsū’’tiādi. Pahāsīti kālavipallāsena vuttanti āha ‘‘pajahatī’’ti. Pahānaṃ panassa siddhameva paṭipakkhassa siddhattāti dassetuṃ ‘‘pahāsī’’ti vuttaṃ yathā ‘‘asāmibhoge gāmikāādīyiṃsū’’ti. Bahulamakāsīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Evamevaṃ namatīti kāmavitakkasampayogākārameva hoti, kāmavitakkasampayuttākārena vā pariṇamati. Kasanaṃ kiṭṭhaṃ, kasīti attho, tannibbattattā pana kāraṇūpacārena sassaṃ ‘‘kiṭṭha’’nti vuttanti āha ‘‘sassasambādhe’’ti. Cattāri bhayānīti vadhabandhajānigarahāni. Upaddavanti anatthuppādabhāvaṃ. Lāmakanti nihīnabhāvaṃ. Dhandhesūti attano khandhesu. Otāranti anuppavesaṃ kilesānaṃ. Saṃkilesato visujjhanaṃ visuddhi, sā eva vodānanti āha ‘‘vodānapakkhanti idaṃ tasseva vevacana’’nti.
209 「一切善法,即是出离」:因为与一切不善法相对、由此而出的缘故。唯独涅槃才是出离:因为从一切烦恼、一切有为而出的缘故。「如谷物拥挤之所」:比喻于放逸时,色等所缘会成为灾祸生起的处所。「如犄角牛」:比喻诡诈之心,因其难以调伏的性质。「如善巧的牧牛者」:比喻菩萨,因为兼具方便善巧。「如四种怖畏」:比喻邪寻,因其具可畏的性质。「慧增长者」:是有慧增长的人。「恼害」:以此令心被恼害,即心的痛苦。属于彼方的即是「恼害分」,并非恼害分的即是「非恼害分」。「能导向涅槃的」:能带来涅槃。「应动摇」:意为应是掉举、应是散乱的。「我令其安立」:我令其完全正确地安住。为显示已安立的状态被称为善安立,而说「我令其平静」等等。「我令其平静」:令定对立面的烦恼平息下来,将心安顿于行处,令其平静。「由成就无散乱状态而令心一境性」:如同在所缘上善作安止,我正确地、完全正确地令心专注,使之成为等持。由于如这些持的心已善安住于所缘,不会从中跌落,故说「善安立之义」。「勿令动摇」:意为勿被逼恼、勿被……显示巴利原文
209.Sabbakusalaṃnekkhammaṃ sabbākusalapaṭipakkhatāya tato nissaṭattā. Nibbānameva nekkhammaṃ sabbakilesato sabbasaṅkhatato ca nissaṭattā. Kiṭṭhasambādhaṃ viya rūpādiārammaṇaṃ pamāde sati anatthuppattiṭṭhānabhāvato. Kūṭagāvo viya kūṭacittaṃ duddamabhāvato. Paṇḍitagopālako viya bodhisatto upāyakosallayogato. Catubbidhabhayaṃ viya micchāvitakkā sappaṭibhayabhāvato. Paññāya vuddhi etassa atthīti paññāvuddhiko. Vihaññati cittaṃ etenāti vighāto, cetodukkhaṃ, tappakkhiko vighātapakkhiko, na vighātapakkhikoti avighātapakkhiko. Nibbānasaṃvattaniko nibbānavaho. Ugghātīyeyyāti uddhataṃ siyā vikkhittañca bhaveyyāti attho. Saṇṭhapemīti sammadeva paṭṭhapemi. Yathā pana ṭhapitaṃ saṇṭhapitaṃ nāma hoti, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sannisīdāpemī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sannisīdāpemīti samādhipaṭipakkhe kilese sannisīdāpento cittaṃ gocarajjhatte sannisīdāpemi. Abyaggabhāvāpādakena ekaggaṃ karomi, yathā ārammaṇe suṭṭhu appitaṃ hoti, evaṃ sammā sammadeva ādahāmi samāhitaṃ karomi, yasmā tathāsamāhitaṃ cittaṃ suṭṭhu ārammaṇe āropitaṃ nāma hoti, na tato paripatati, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘suṭṭhu āropemīti attho’’ti. Mā ugghātīyittāti mā haññittha, mā ūhataṃ atthāti attho.
210 “就是那寻……被这样说了”:以此来说,虽然因在道刹那中具有三种类别,而看似将一个善寻显示为三种名称,但不应如此看待。因为这是依着相续流转,以同一性的理趣,而说“就是那,以与嗔恨相违的意义……”等。在同类相续的善心中生起的寻,行相相同,便可得称为“就是那个”,如同说“就是那只鹧鸪,就是那些药草”一样。然而,大人当时的那些寻,并非是以不净、慈、悲为近依而被这样说的。显示巴利原文
210.Soyeva…pe… vuttoti iminā kiñcāpi ekaṃyeva kusalavitakkaṃ maggakkhaṇe viya tividhattasambhavato tividhanāmikaṃ katvā dassitaṃ viya hoti, na kho panetaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pabandhapavattañhi upādāya ekattanayena ‘‘soyeva byāpādapaccanīkaṭṭhenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ekajātiyesu hi kusalacittesu uppanno vitakko samānākāratāya so evāti vattabbataṃ labhati yathā ‘‘sā eva tittirī, tāni eva osadhānī’’ti (saṃ. ni. ṭī. 2.2.19). Na hi tadā mahāpurisassa asubhamettākaruṇāsannissayā te vitakkā evaṃ vuttāti.
“依于等至”是指进入等至后,从中出定。“观也稚嫩”即是作这样的连结。身体感到疲倦,是因为止与观还稚嫩,于修习的前后之间未能获得殊胜。因此说“心被打击、被恼害”。等至对观大有帮助,正如所说:“诸比丘,应修习定,有定者能如实知见。”显示巴利原文
Samāpattiṃnissāyāti samāpattiṃ samāpajjitvā, tato vuṭṭhahitvāti attho. Vipassanāpi taruṇāti yojanā. Kāyo kilamati samathavipassanānaṃ taruṇatāya bhāvanāya pubbenāparaṃ visesassa alabbhamānattā. Tenāha ‘‘cittaṃ haññati vihaññatī’’ti. Vipassanāyabahūpakārāsamāpatti, tathā hi vuttaṃ – ‘‘samādhiṃ, bhikkhave, bhāvetha, samāhito yathābhūtaṃ jānāti passatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.5; 4.99; 5.1071).
如同休息处能消除战士的疲劳,为消除疲劳而用木板搭成的休息处,便称为木板小房。然而等至对观更有帮助,因为它能摧破定的障碍,或者摧破一切烦恼而使之变得虚弱。因此说:“当观产生力量时,也能保护等至,令其产生力量。”难道这不会造成互相依止的过失吗?这不成为绝对的过失,为了显示在世间中通过互相依止也能成就事业,所以说“正如……”等等。显示巴利原文
Yathā vissamaṭṭhānaṃ yodhānaṃ parissamaṃ vinodeti, tathā parissamavinodanatthaṃ phalakehi kātabbaṃ vissamaṭṭhānaṃ phalakakoṭṭhako, samāpattiyā pana vipassanā bahukāratarā samādhiparipanthakānaṃ, sabbesampi vā kilesānaṃ vimathanena dubbalabhāvāpajjanato. Tenāha ‘‘vipassanā thāmajātā samāpattimpi rakkhati,thāmajātaṃ karotī’’ti. Nanu cevaṃ itarītarasannissayadoso āpajjatīti? Nayidamekantikaṃ, itarītarasannissayāpi kiccasiddhi loke labbhatīti dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
「带到村边」:指被带到靠近村庄的地方。「这样,牛」:意思是只需生起正念,如同守护牛只一般,因为没有其他可守护的对象。「那时」:指止与观产生力量的阶段。说随观能迅速生起,是就「仅一击即登」而言;然而,随观实际上是循着次第渐次而登的。显示巴利原文
Gāmantaṃ āhaṭesūti gāmasamīpaṃ upanītesu. Etāgāvoti sati uppādanamattameva kātabbaṃ yathā gāvo rakkhitabbā, tadabhāvato. Tadāti samathavipassanānaṃ thāmajātakāle. Anupassanānaṃ lahuṃ lahuṃ uppattiṃ sandhāya ‘‘ekappahāreneva āruḷhova hotī’’ti vuttaṃ, kameneva pana anupassanāpaṭipāṭiṃ ārohati.
215 如此,世尊在展示了自身的不放逸行道,以及由彼所获、不共他人的殊胜之后——即展示了因成就伴随果成就——如今为了展示利益众生的成就,而说「犹如……」等语。此处应如此理解其间的关联。仅因符合林相而称为「林」;因是大林而称为「pavana」;树木繁茂,即是pavana。所谓四轭,即饥饿轭、渴轭、怖畏轭与邪行轭。安稳而无灾厄,故称「安稳」。带来吉祥、无灾,故称「sovatthiko」。能将喜乐引入墙内,故称「pītigamanīyo」。能去往饮喜乐之饮水处,故称「pītagamanīyo」。因有枝条等——即长满刺枝与刺藤的丛林。凡不通向栖息处者,即使有水,亦名非道;其余则因不能前往饮喜乐,亦名非道。以「等」字包含稠密丛林。在猎人猎区活动的鹿,称为「okacaro」,即岛鹿。因为林间一见鹿踪影,便与之一起奔逃,故有系以长绳的束缚。显示巴利原文
215. Evaṃ bhagavā attano appamādapaṭipadaṃ, tāya ca laddhaṃ anaññasādhāraṇaṃ visesaṃ dassento hetusampattiyā saddhiṃ phalasampattiṃ dassetvā idāni sattūpakārasampattiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘seyyathāpī’’tiādimāhāti evaṃ ettha anusandhi veditabbā. Araññalakkhaṇayoggamattena araññaṃ. Mahāvanatāya pavanaṃ. Pavaddhañhi vanaṃ pavanaṃ. Catūhi yogehīti jighacchāpipāsābhayapaṭipattisaṅkhātayogehi. Khemaṃ anupaddavataṃ. Suvatthiṃ anupaddavaṃ āvahatīti sovatthiko. Pītiṃ kuṭṭhiṃ gameti upanetīti pītigamanīyo. Pītaṃ pānatitthaṃ gacchatīti pītagamanīyo. Sākhādīhīti kaṇṭakasākhākaṇṭakalatāvanehi. Anāsayagāmitāya udakasanniruddhopi amaggo vutto, itarāni apītigamanīyatāyapi. Ādi-saddena gahanaṃ pariggaṇhāti. Okemigaluddakassa gocare caratīti okacaro, dīpakamigo. Araññe mige disvā tehi saddhiṃ palāyeyyāti dīgharajjubandhanaṃ.
「住于此」:指鹿的栖息处,它们从该栖息处经由此道出来。「在此活动」:指在此处觅食。「在此饮水」:指在此饮水处饮水。「经此道进入」:指经由此道进入该饮水处。「遮断道路」:指阻断它们平常行走的道路。当想要一只不剩地捕杀林鹿时,暂时什么也不做。显示巴利原文
Idha vasantīti migānaṃ āsayaṃ vadati, tato āsayato iminā maggena nikkhamanti. Etthacarantīti etasmiṃ ṭhāne gocaraṃ gaṇhanti. Etthapivantīti etasmiṃ nipānatitthe udakaṃ pivanti. Iminā maggena pavisantīti iminā maggena nipānatitthaṃ pavisanti. Maggaṃ pidhāyāti pakatimaggaṃ pidahitvā. Na tāva kiñci karoti anavasese vanamige ghātetukāmo.
「由无明而成为不知」:指被无明遮蔽,丧失智慧;被喜贪牵引,紧紧粘着于色等所缘。喜贪能诱人,故称「okacaro」;无明能迷人,故称「okacārika」,以此譬喻而说。「它们」即指此二者。「用那段折下的树枝」:指用气味更为粗糙的折断树枝,以此除去人的气味。所谓「已扫除」,即已打扫干净、拂拭干净。显示巴利原文
Avijjāya aññāṇā hutvāti avijjāya nivutattā ñāṇarahitā hutvā, nandīrāgena upanītā rūpārammaṇādīni ābandhitvā. Palobhanato okacaraṃ nandīrāgoti. Byāmohanato okacārikaṃ avijjāti katvā dasseti. Tesanti okacarokacārikānaṃ. Sākhābhaṅgenāti tādisena lūkhataragandhena sākhābhaṅgena. Manussagandhaṃ apanetvā tassa sākhābhaṅgassa gandhena. Sammattoti sammajjito byāmuñcho.
佛陀们游履安稳之道、遮断邪道,此虽普遍适用于一切世间,然据实而言,唯是应于堪受调伏之众生。为显此义,故说「如阿若憍陈如等堪能之人」。「拔出」:即连根拔除、去除,故说「断为两截而丢弃」。「消灭」:即令其不现,故说「彻底完全拔除」。「利益行处」:即行利益众生之事。显示巴利原文
Buddhānaṃ khemamaggavicaraṇaṃ kummaggapidhānañca sabbalokasādhāraṇampi atthato veneyyapuggalāpekkhamevāti dassento ‘‘aññātakoṇḍaññādīnaṃ bhabbapuggalāna’’nti āha. Ūhatoti samūhato nīhatoti āha ‘‘dvedhā chetvā pātito’’ti. Nāsitāti adassanaṃ gamitāti āha ‘‘sabbena sabbaṃ samugghāṭitā’’ti. Hitūpacāranti sattānaṃ hitacariyaṃ.
《二寻思经》注疏中,对隐晦义理的解释至此圆满结束。显示巴利原文
Dvedhāvitakkasuttavaṇṇanāya līnatthappakāsanā samattā.
10. 《寻止息经》注疏显示巴利原文
10. Vitakkasaṇṭhānasuttavaṇṇanā
216 「以十善业道」一语,唯应视作举例。因此处不以作轮回基础的等至心为增上心,故随后说「以观为基础的八等至心」。另一种解释:为显明唯有摄于超人法之内者,方可独称「本然心」,故于说了「以十善业道生起之心,仅是心」之后,即指明此中所指的增上心即是彼,而说「以观为基础的八等至心」。然而,应知此处并不排斥其他方式。亦有一些人认为:与观相应之心,即是增上心。「以专精」:指为使未生善法生起、已生善法增长,而再再、持续地致力于此。「根本业处」:即作为根本而持守的禅修业处。「执取而住」:即专注投入修习。即便修习未至安止定,亦可说为致力于增上心,因依词义,以彼为目的之行为亦可获此名称。显示巴利原文
216.Dasakusalakammapathavasenāti idaṃ nidassanamattaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ vaṭṭapādakasamāpatticittassapi idha adhicittabhāvena anicchitattā. Tenāha ‘‘vipassanāpādakaaṭṭhasamāpatticitta’’nti. Atha vā anuttarimanussadhammasaṅgahitameva kevalaṃ ‘‘pakaticitta’’nti vattabbanti dassento ‘‘dasakusalakammapathavasena uppannaṃ cittaṃ cittamevā’’ti vatvā yadettha adhicittanti adhippetaṃ, taṃ tadeva dassento ‘‘vipassanāpādakaaṭṭhasamāpatticitta’’nti āha. Itarassa panettha vidhi na paṭisedhetīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vipassanāya sampayuttaṃ adhicittanti keci. Anuyuttenāti anuppannassa uppādanavasena, uppannassa paribrūhanavasena anu anu yuttena. Mūlakammaṭṭhānanti pārihāriyakammaṭṭhānaṃ. Gahetvā viharantoti bhāvanaṃ anuyuñjanto. Bhāvanāya appanaṃ appattopi adhicittamanuyuttoyeva tadatthepi taṃsaddavohārato.
那些在果将生起之处仿佛被构想出的,即是「相」,因此说为「缘由」。在「时时」一句中,「时」是以处格作具格而说的,所以释为「于时时中」。难道不应……时时应无间断地作意吗?为何这样说?难道不是因为修习已步入行道,世尊在开示拔除灾患的方法时,便以“于五相应时时作意”这一教示作为开端吗?说“于增上心已策励者”,是指如实无间断地修习、已相应、已策励的人,才得名为于增上心已策励者——这是问难者的意图。而另一方则这样显示:对于正在修习的初业者,有时会生起修习的随烦恼,为了净化其心,应当依时而作意这些相,所以导师说“时时”。为显明此义,才说“于圣典中”等。此处“这些”即指圣典中所说的五种相。“阿浮陀”指灾患。显示巴利原文
Yehi phalaṃ nāma yathā uppajjanaṭṭhāne pakappiyamānaṃ viya hoti, tāni nimittāni. Tenāha ‘‘kāraṇānī’’ti. Kālena kālanti ettha kālenāti bhummatthe karaṇavacananti āha ‘‘samaye samaye’’ti. Nanu ca…pe… nirantaraṃ manasi kātabbanti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu ca bhāvanāya vīthipaṭipannattā abbudanīharaṇavidhiṃ dassentena bhagavatā ‘‘pañca nimittāni kālena kālaṃ manasi kātabbānī’’ti ayaṃ desanā āraddhāti? ‘‘Adhicittamanuyuttenā’’ti vuttattā avicchedavasena bhāvanāya yuttappayutto adhicittamanuyutto nāmāti codakassa adhippāyo. Itaro bhāvanaṃ anuyuñjantassaādikammikassa kadāci bhāvanupakkilesā uppajjeyyuṃ, tato cittassa visodhanatthāya yathākālaṃ imāni nimittāni manasi kātabbānīti ‘‘kālena kāla’’nti satthā avocāti dassento ‘‘pāḷiyañhī’’tiādimāha. Tattha imānīti imāni pāḷiyaṃ āgatāni pañca nimittāni. Abbudanti upaddavaṃ.
「欲俱行、贪相应」,即与渴爱之欲俱行、与欲贪相应。「于可爱、不可爱、不正观者」之中:「于可爱」指可喜的,「于不可爱」指不可喜的,「不正」指不正当地观者。所谓「不正观」,是指依凭世俗无明舍而对所缘作不如理的执取,对此经中说:“愚痴凡夫眼见于色后而生起舍……”等等。那些即是寻。所谓「从彼相而异」,即是从那些欲俱行等不善寻生起的因之外,另取一个新的相。由于经中说“作意者”,因此所缘即是相,或者先前已经生起的某种心转起的方式即是相。「善所依相」即是善心生起的因,应当作意,应当安立于心中,应当以修习而思念,或者应当引入心相续。所谓「不净即是不净相」,当于诸行中生起欲俱行的寻时,应将这句话引来与此联系。同样,在“嗔俱行”等句中,也应当各自恰当地引彼处之语来联系。「于任何处」即指经中所说“于诸有情、于诸行”中的任何一处。「五种法近依」即是五种与法相连的近依。显示巴利原文
Chandasahagatā rāgasampayuttāti taṇhāchandasahagatā kāmarāgasampayuttā. Iṭṭhāniṭṭhaasamapekkhitesūti iṭṭhesu piyesu, aniṭṭhesu appiyesu, asamaṃ asammā pekkhitesu. Asamapekkhananti gehassitaaññāṇupekkhāvasena ārammaṇassa ayoniso gahaṇaṃ. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā upekkhā bālassa mūḷhassa puthujjanassā’’tiādi (ma. ni. 3.308). Te parivitakkā. Tato nimittato aññanti tato chandūpasaṃhitādiakusalavitakkuppattikāraṇato aññaṃ navaṃ nimittaṃ. ‘‘Manasikaroto’’ti hi vuttaṃ, tasmā ārammaṇaṃ, tādiso purimuppanno cittappavattiākāro vā nimittaṃ. Kusalanissitaṃ nimittanti kusalacittappavattikāraṇaṃ manasi kātabbaṃ citte ṭhapetabbaṃ, bhāvanāvasena cintetabbaṃ, cittasantāne vā saṅkamitabbaṃ. Asubhañhi asubhanimittanti. Saṅkhāresu uppanne chandūpasaṃhite vitakketi ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Evaṃ ‘‘dosūpasañhite’’tiādīsu yathārahaṃ taṃ taṃ padaṃ ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Yattha katthacīti ‘‘sattesu saṅkhāresū’’ti yattha katthaci. Pañcadhammūpanissayoti pañcavidho dhammūpasaṃhito upanissayo.
如此,为了详细开显以“欲俱行”等句略说的义理,而展开了“此之双手美妙”等文。其中,先说明了“应以不净而转起”,为了显示转起的方式而说:“你于何处染着?”「由肤色之贪」,即因对肤色的染着而呈显黑、褐等色泽。「充满腐尸之果」,指充满了成熟而腐败的果实。或有另读作“充满黑果”。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ ‘‘chandūpasañhite’’tiādinā saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘imassa hatthā vā sobhanā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha ‘‘asubhatoupasaṃharitabba’’nti vatvā upasaṃharaṇākārassa dassanaṃ ‘‘kimhi sārattosī’’ti. Chavirāgenāti chavirāgatāya kāḷasāmādivaṇṇanibhāya. Kuphaḷapūritoti pakkehi kuṇapaphalehi puṇṇo. ‘‘Kaliphalapūrito’’ti vā pāṭho.
依无主、依暂时性而作意者:此钵将渐次经历色泽变异与朽坏,或成有洞有缝,或至破裂,终成碎片。此袈裟亦将渐次经历色泽变异与朽坏,沦为擦脚布,最终被弃于棍端。倘若它们有主,便不会任其如此毁坏。即依此无主性,以及‘此不可靠、唯是暂时’的暂时性而作意,乃如是行。显示巴利原文
Assāmikatāvakālikabhāvavasenāti idaṃ pattaṃ anukkamena vaṇṇavikārañceva jiṇṇabhāvañca patvā chiddāvachiddaṃ bhinnaṃ vā hutvā kapālaniṭṭhaṃ bhavissati. Idaṃ cīvaraṃ anupubbena vaṇṇavikāraṃ jiṇṇatañca upagantvā pādapuñchanacoḷakaṃ hutvā yaṭṭhikoṭiyā chaḍḍanīyaṃ bhavissati. Sace pana nesaṃ sāmiko bhaveyya, na nesaṃ evaṃ vinassituṃ dadeyyāti evaṃ assāmikabhāvavasena, ‘‘anaddhaniyaṃ idaṃ tāvakālika’’nti evaṃ tāvakālikabhāvavasena ca manasikaroto.
‘应折伏愤恨……应修习慈’:即依《折伏愤恨经》——如《增支部》中所说:“诸比丘,有此五种折伏愤恨之法。比丘于何处生起愤恨,即应于彼处彻底折伏”等开示,以及《锯喻教诫》、《柴火喻》等经典所示的方式,先行折伏愤恨,而后修习慈。显示巴利原文
Āghātavinaya…pe… bhāvetabbāti – ‘‘pañcime, bhikkhave, āghātapaṭivinayā. Yattha hi bhikkhuno uppanno āghāto sabbaso paṭivinetabbo’’tiādinā nayena āgatassa āghātavinayasuttassa (a. ni. 5.161) ceva kakacūpamovāda(ma. ni. 1.222-233) chavālātūpamādīnañca (itivu. 91) vasena āghātaṃ paṭivinodetvā mettā bhāvetabbā.
‘依止师长而住’,即依止师长而共住。‘诵授’,即对教典之法,既令他人诵持,亦自行诵持。‘于所学策问义趣’,即对已受持之法,反复征问其义理。‘依五种法而近依’,即缘于依止师长等五种法。‘痴界’,即是痴。显示巴利原文
Garusaṃvāsoti garuṃ upanissāya vāso. Uddesoti pariyattidhammassa uddisāpanañceva uddisanañca. Uddiṭṭhaparipucchananti yathāuggahitassa dhammassa atthaparipucchā. Pañca dhammūpanissāyāti garusaṃvāsādike pañca dhamme paṭicca. Mohadhātūti moho.
“应依止”即应亲近,或即以此读法为准。“凡有勤备者”,是指对于村落出入、问事等事务已生起努力、已准备就绪的状态。“其时彼痴得断”,是说那位比丘如此相应、策励之后,后来那个痴便消失。“如是”,即通过对诵授的精勤也是如此。又,“如是”,即通过对法义的提问来消除疑惑也是如此。“于各各之处,义显了”,是指在听闻法时,对于法在各个段落中——“这里讲的是戒,这里讲的是定,这里讲的是慧”——每一处义理都清清楚楚。这个是眼、色、光明等,是眼识的因;那个是稻种、土地、水等,是稻芽的因。“此非因”,是说眼、色、光明等对于耳识并非其因;稻种等对于稗子芽并非其因。如此,便成为善于辨别处与非处的人。显示巴利原文
Upanissitabbāti upanissayitabbā, ayameva vā pāṭho. Yattappaṭiyattoti yatto ca gāmappavesanāpucchākaraṇesu ussukkaṃ āpanno sajjito ca hotīti attho. Athassa moho pahīyatīti assa bhikkhuno evaṃ tattha yuttappayuttassa pacchā so moho vigacchati. Evampīti evaṃ uddese appamajjanenapi. Puna evampīti atthaparipucchāya kaṅkhāvinodanepi. Tesu tesu ṭhānesu attho pākaṭo hotīti suyyamānassa dhammassa tesu tesu padesu ‘‘idha sīlaṃ kathitaṃ, idha samādhi, idha paññā’’ti so so attho vibhūto hoti. Idaṃ cakkhurūpālokādi imassa cakkhuviññāṇassa kāraṇaṃ, idaṃ sālibījabhūmisalilādi imassa sāliaṅkurassa kāraṇaṃ. Idaṃ na kāraṇanti tadeva cakkhurūpālokādi sotaviññāṇassa, tadeva sālibījādi kudrusakaṅkurassa na kāraṇanti ṭhānāṭṭhānavinicchaye cheko hoti.
“于所缘中”,即指于业处中。“这些寻”是指欲寻等。若笼统地认为“一切善法是对治一切不善法”,因而说它们可被“断除”,但实际上并非一切善法都是一切不善法的直接对立面,所以便带着疑虑说:“断除吗?”因此接着才解释说“这些”……。显示巴利原文
Ārammaṇesūti kammaṭṭhānesu. Ime vitakkāti kāmavitakkādayo. Sabbe kusalā dhammā sabbākusalapaṭipakkhāti katvā ‘‘pahīyantī’’ti vattabbe na sabbe sabbesaṃ ujuvipaccanīkabhūtāti ‘‘pahīyanti evā’’ti sāsaṅkaṃ vadati. Tenāha ‘‘imānī’’tiādi.
“善所依”:即依止于善,是应当去依止的。“善的缘”是它的同义词,指善生起的原因,亦即前面所说的不净相等。“心材板”:指用栴檀木做成的心材板。“不平的楔子”:指以不平整的方式安在那里的楔子。“应击打”:即应当敲打它,把它拔出来。显示巴利原文
Kusalanissitanti kusalena nissitaṃ nissayitabbaṃ. Kusalassa paccayabhūtanti tasseva vevacanaṃ, kusaluppattikāraṇaṃ yathāvuttaasubhanimittādimeva vadati. Sāraphalaketi candanamaye sāraphalake. Visamāṇinti visamākārena tattha ṭhitaṃ āṇiṃ. Haneyyāti pahareyya nikkhāmeyya.
217 「病」:指有病,被恶臭等逼迫而受困。「苦」:指已生起痛苦。而“依这些理由”是说:这些不善法,因从不善巧中生起,是善的对立面,又因家居的病而有病态,故被智者呵责、令人厌离、有过失,将带来不可意的果报,是苦的异熟,且必然导致索然无味。如此以种种理由逐一审察不善等状态。显示巴利原文
217.Aṭṭoti āturo, duggandhabādhatāya pīḷito. Dukkhitoti sañjātadukkho. Imināpi kāraṇenāti akosallasambhūtatāya kusalapaṭipakkhatāya gehassitarogena sarogatāya ca ete akusalā viññugarahitabbatāya jigucchanīyatāya ca sāvajjā aniṭṭhaphalatāya nirassādasaṃvattaniyatāya ca dukkhavipākāti evaṃ tena tena kāraṇena akusalādibhāvaṃ upaparikkhato.
‘‘Āturaṃ asuciṃ pūtiṃ, passa nande samussayaṃ; Uggharantaṃ paggharantaṃ, bālānaṃ abhinandita’’nti. (apa. therī 2.4.157) –
如此,有关厌离身体的谈论等;而“等”字还包含:显示巴利原文
Evamādi kāyavicchandanīyakathādīhi vā. Ādi-saddena –
以嗔怒回应嗔怒者,其人更劣;
不以嗔怒回应嗔怒者,他赢得了难胜之战。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Tasseva tena pāpiyo, yo kuddhaṃ paṭikujjhati; Kuddhaṃ appaṭikujjhanto, saṅgāmaṃ jeti dujjaya’’nti. (theragā. 442) –
如这些类,亦包括了镇伏嗔恚的谈论等。显示巴利原文
Evamādi paṭighavūpasamanakathādikāpi saṅgaṇhāti.
218 ‘非忆念’即不存在、不随念。‘不作意’即不作意。‘取业处后应当坐下’意指唯以对业处的作意而坐。‘已领受的法谈集录’指对业处有助益的法谈汇编。‘手量书’即手掌大小、可随身携带的小册。‘以完全作意者’即全然作意而行事者。‘无机会’是说,对于已着手修习者,因其必须完成修习,故无闲暇。‘已着手者是终结,还是不开始’,此为上座部所说。‘彼’指亲教师。清扫洞窟是身业;为镇伏寻而开始诵读《相应部》,是语业;为完成所见的任务而作火遍的前方便——他如此累积了三业。长老了知他的习性及遍处的殊胜后,便说出‘在此寺中……’等语。由此,他一切所愿皆得成就。名为‘无念之品’,是因为通过无念来阐明寻的镇伏。显示巴利原文
218. Na saraṇaṃ asati, ananussaraṇaṃ. Amanasikaraṇaṃ amanasikāro. Kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā nisīditabbanti kammaṭṭhānamanasikāreneva nisīditabbaṃ. Uggahito dhammakathāpabandhoti kammaṭṭhānassa upakāro dhammakathāpabandho. Muṭṭhipotthakoti muṭṭhippamāṇo pārihāriyapotthako. Samannānentenāti samannāharantena. Okāso na hoti āraddhassa pariyosāpetabbato. Āraddhassa antagamanaṃ anārambhovāti theravādo. Tassāti upajjhāyassa. Pabbhārasodhanaṃ kāyakammaṃ, ārabhanto eva vitakkaniggaṇhanatthaṃ saṃyuttanikāyasajjhāyanaṃ vacīkammaṃ, dassanakiccapubbakammakaraṇatthaṃ tejokasiṇaparikammanti tīṇi kammāni ācinoti. Thero tassa āsayaṃ kasiṇañca savisesaṃ jānitvā ‘‘imasmiṃ vihāre’’tiādimavoca. Tenassa yathādhippāyaṃ sabbaṃ sampāditaṃ. Asatipabbaṃ nāma asatiyā vitakkaniggahaṇavibhāvanato.
219 ‘寻根分别品’:辨明寻之根及其分别,故名寻根分别品。‘造作寻’即寻行,也就是寻的缘——对于净相等对象,以净等的方式作不如理作意。此寻行安住于此,故为‘寻行安住’,即于不净中起净等想颠倒。故说:‘应当作意诸寻之根及根之根。’‘趣向诸寻根之根者’:指的是通过审察,以慧之趣向,探究诸邪寻所生起的根本原因之人。当如实了知之后,如前一般,寻不再频频生起,故说:‘寻之现行变得松缓。’当其松缓时,便达顶点——依所说之理,寻之现行变得松缓,于彼松缓之中,次第达至坚固,在寻趣向根的过程中达到顶点。‘诸寻完全灭尽’:指一切邪寻皆消失,不复现行;又或由于修习达到圆满,被无余断除。显示巴利原文
219.Vitakkamūlabhedaṃ pabbanti vitakkamūlassa tammūlassa ca bhedavibhāvanaṃ vitakkamūlabhedaṃ pabbaṃ. Vitakkaṃ saṅkharotīti vitakkasaṅkhāro, vitakkapaccayo subhanimittādīsupi subhādinā ayonisomanasikāro. So pana vitakkasaṅkhāro saṃtiṭṭhati etthāti vitakkasaṅkhārasaṇṭhānaṃ, asubhe subhantiādi saññāvipallāso. Tenāha ‘‘vitakkānaṃ mūlañca mūlamūlañca manasi kātabba’’nti. Vitakkānaṃ mūlamūlaṃ gacchantassāti upaparikkhanavasena micchāvitakkānaṃ mūlaṃ uppattikāraṇaṃ ñāṇagatiyā gacchantassa. Yāthāvato jānantassa pubbe viya vitakkā abhiṇhaṃ nappavattantīti āha ‘‘vitakkacāro sithilo hotī’’ti. Tasmiṃ sithilībhūte matthakaṃ gacchanteti vuttanayena vitakkacāro sithilabhūto, tasmiṃ vitakkānaṃ mūlagamane anukkamena thirabhāvappattiyā matthakaṃ gacchante. Vitakkā sabbaso nirujjhantīti micchāvitakkā sabbepi gacchanti na samudācaranti, bhāvanāpāripūriyā vā anavasesā pahīyanti.
“落在耳根处”,意为在兔子耳边,如同撞击耳鼓般骤然落下。据说,那兔子下方有个大老鼠挖出的大坑,状如地道,因此兔子坠落时发出了巨大的响声。它们纷纷逃散,口中呼喊:“大地正在裂开!”“若寻其根的根,再去追究”,意思是既然这只兔子是因“大地裂开”而惊起,就应去到那里,深入探究其根本原因。到了那所谓大地裂开之处,兔子却说:“谁知道呢?未来又会怎样?大人,我实在说不上来。”因为有所求时,言语便会变得柔软。“发出咚咚声”,即发出“咚咚”的响声,这不过是对其声音的描述。“尊者”,是对兽王的爱称;兽王,意为“愿您吉祥”。“这是怎么回事”,即问“这是什么?它的根本原因是什么?”;“咚咚”,同样只是声音的描摹。“如此”,意思是,正如兔子的“大地崩裂”这一声响,源于错误的执取,全无根基一样,寻的现行也是由想颠倒而生起的,同样没有根基。因此,他说了“寻……”等语。显示巴利原文
Kaṇṇamūle patitanti sasakassa kaṇṇasamīpe kaṇṇasakkhaliṃ paharantaṃ viya upapatitaṃ. Tassa kira sasakassa heṭṭhā mahāmūsikāhi khatamahāvāṭaṃ umaṅgasadisaṃ ahosi, tenassa pātena mahāsaddo ahosi. Palāyiṃsu ‘‘pathavī udrīyatī’’ti. Mūlamūlaṃ gantvā anuvijjeyyanti ‘‘pathavī bhijjatī’’ti yatthāyaṃ saso uṭṭhito, tattha gantvā tassa mūlakāraṇaṃ yaṃnūna vīmaṃseyyaṃ. Pathaviyā bhijjanaṭṭhānaṃ gate ‘‘ko jānāti, kiṃ bhavissatī’’ti saso ‘‘na sakkomi sāmī’’ti āha. Ādhipaccavato hi yācanaṃ saṇhamudukaṃ. Duddubhāyatīti duddubhāti saddaṃ karoti. Anuravadassanañhetaṃ. Bhaddanteti migarājassa piyasamudācāro, migarāja, bhaddaṃ te atthūti attho. Kimetanti kiṃ etaṃ, kiṃ tassa mūlakāraṇaṃ? Duddubhanti idampi tassa anuravadassanameva. Evanti yathā sasakassa mahāpathavībhedanaṃ ravanāya micchāgāhasamuṭṭhānaṃ amūlaṃ, evaṃ vitakkacāropi saññāvipallāsasamuṭṭhāno amūlo. Tenāha ‘‘vitakkāna’’ntiādi.
220 “上齿”,指能征服的齿,也就是上齿的意思,所以说“上齿”。因为上齿在咀嚼时,就像杵之胜过臼一样,有着特别的征服作用。“以善心”,指与强有力的正思惟相应的心。“不善心”,即伴随着欲寻等的不善心。“应该加以镇伏”,意思是应当如此胜过它、压制它,令它将来不再生起,达到不复再起的状况。“你们即使长久修习,尚且如此脆弱;而我,如今才仿佛刚在依靠中站稳,却立刻要让它失去依靠”——如此征服之后。接着,为了显示那种征服的方法,他说了“就算皮肤、肉……”等语,也就是策励具备四支的精进。“阐明义理”,指纯粹说明镇伏寻思的意义。“譬喻”,就是“诸比丘,譬如大力士……”等譬喻。显示巴利原文
220.Abhidantanti abhibhavanadantaṃ, uparidantanti attho. Tenāha ‘‘uparidanta’’nti. So hi itaraṃ musalaṃ viya udukkhalaṃ visesato kassaci khādanakāle abhibhuyya vattati. Kusalacittenāti balavasammāsaṅkappasampayuttena. Akusalacittanti kāmavitakkādisahitaṃ akusalacittaṃ. Abhiniggaṇhitabbanti yathā tassa āyatiṃ samudācāro na hoti, evaṃ abhibhavitvā niggahetabbaṃ, anuppattidhammatā āpādetabbāti attho. Ke ca tumhe satipi cirakālabhāvanāya evaṃ adubbalā ko cāhaṃ mama santike laddhappatiṭṭhe viya ṭhitepi idāneva appatiṭṭhe karonto iti evaṃ abhibhavitvā. Taṃ pana abhibhavanākāraṃ dassento ‘‘kāmaṃ taco cā’’tiādinā caturaṅgasamannāgatavīriyapaggaṇhanamāha. Atthadīpikanti ekantato vitakkaniggaṇhanatthajotakaṃ. Upamanti ‘‘seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, balavā puriso’’tiādikaṃ upamaṃ.
221 “取尽分别”,是指就最初开示的“致力于增上心的比丘,应于时时作意五种相”而言,对这五种相在作意时令其完全取尽的详细分别。或者,这是一个结论,即“诸比丘,因此……”等内容。因为对先前所说义理的再次宣说,便称为结论。又或者,这是为了显示依此修行者已达到自在与清净,才宣说了“诸比丘,因此……”等语。“导师之师”,指的是教授射箭术的老师。如同在教法中,虽非导师,亦可摄于导师的范畴;同样地,弓术这一技能,也含摄于完整的射箭术之中。显示巴利原文
221.Pariyādānabhājanīyanti yaṃ taṃ ādito ‘‘adhicittamanuyuttena bhikkhunā pañca nimittāni kālena kālaṃ manasi kātabbānī’’ti niddiṭṭhaṃ, tattha tassa nimittassa manasikaraṇakālapariyādānassa vasena vibhajanaṃ. Nigamanaṃ vā etaṃ, yadidaṃ ‘‘yato kho, bhikkhave’’tiādi. Yathāvuttassa hi atthassa puna vacanaṃ nigamananti. Tathāpaṭipannassa vā vasībhāvavisuddhidassanatthaṃ ‘‘yato kho, bhikkhave’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Satthācariyoti dhanubbedācariyo. Yathā hi sasanato asatthampi satthaggahaṇeneva saṅgayhati, evaṃ dhanusippampi dhanubbedapariyāpannamevāti.
“遍行”(pariyāyo)即周遍地思惟,故称遍行。“轮”(vāro)则说“在寻的轮转诸道中”,即寻以轮转的方式运行于种种轨道。“修习自在”指经由反复修习而得自在。“娴熟自在”指经由善加修习而得自在。他仅就正思惟,能如其意欲而思惟;至于另一种(邪思惟),则纯粹只是为了摧破障碍。显示巴利原文
Pariyāyati parivitakketīti pariyāyo. Vāroti āha ‘‘vitakkavārapathesū’’ti, vitakkānaṃ vārena pavattanamaggesu. Ciṇṇavasīti āsevitavasī. Paguṇavasīti subhāvitavasī. Sammāvitakkaṃyeva yathicchitaṃ tathāvitakkanato, itarassa panassa setughātoyevāti.